reledmac (12oct18)

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@48894 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
author: Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> 2018-10-12 21:42:10 +0000
committer: Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> 2018-10-12 21:42:10 +0000
commit: f60e45c7636a3b54b556da015da13743807d34d7 (patch)
tree: 4096cdd5c94d86c21b0415cca71273c8b474c708 /Master/texmf-dist/source/latex
parent: 2cd9698e5b60d9707958452fdf16a5f990fd33c7 (diff)
3 files changed, 1282 insertions, 1279 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/reledmac/migration.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/reledmac/migration.dtx
index a4574afc430..0a8c221d37b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/reledmac/migration.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/reledmac/migration.dtx
@@ -1,13 +1,13 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
 % reledmac.dtx
-% Author: Peter Wilson (Herries Press) herries dot press at earthlink dot net 
+% Author: Peter Wilson (Herries Press) herries dot press at earthlink dot net
 % Maintainer:Maïeul Rouquette maieul at maieul dot net
 % Copyright 2003 -- 2005 Peter R. Wilson / 2011-.. Maïeul Rouquette
 %
 % This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
 % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
-% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any 
+% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any
 % later version.
 % The latest version of the license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
@@ -103,8 +103,8 @@
 %
 % \begin{abstract}
 %
-%  This file contains the description of migration's process from one version of \macpackage to an other version. 
-% 
+%  This file contains the description of migration's process from one version of \macpackage to an other version.
+%
 %  If no description about migration from one version to an other is written, that means user has nothing to do to migrate.
 % \end{abstract}
 %
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/reledmac/reledmac.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/reledmac/reledmac.dtx
index ba5f27a5f23..cf8f4e10485 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/reledmac/reledmac.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/reledmac/reledmac.dtx
@@ -1,13 +1,13 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
 % reledmac.dtx
-% Author: Peter Wilson (Herries Press) herries dot press at earthlink dot net 
+% Author: Peter Wilson (Herries Press) herries dot press at earthlink dot net
 % Maintainer:Maïeul Rouquette maieul at maieul dot net
 % Copyright 2003 -- 2005 Peter R. Wilson / 2011-.. Maïeul Rouquette
 %
 % This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
 % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
-% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any 
+% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any
 % later version.
 % The latest version of the license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@
 %   \SpecialItIndex{#1}\@esphack\ignorespaces}
 % \newcommand*{\SpecialItIndex}[1]{\@bsphack
 %   \index{#1\actualchar{\protect\ttfamily#1}\encapchar usage}\@esphack}
-%    
+%
 % \DoNotIndex{\@,\@@par,\@beginparpenalty,\@empty}
 % \DoNotIndex{\@flushglue,\@input}
 % \DoNotIndex{\@makefnmark,\@makeother,\@maketitle}
@@ -139,7 +139,7 @@
 %
 % \newcommand{\dtxfilename}{\texttt{reledmac.dtx}}
 % \GetFileInfo{reledmac.sty}
-% ^^A To put the changes in the right order : see http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/74113/7712 
+% ^^A To put the changes in the right order : see http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/74113/7712
 %\makeatletter
 %  \let\org@changes@\changes@
 %    \def\my@changes v#1.#2.#3\@nil{%
@@ -307,7 +307,7 @@
 % \changes{v1.24.3}{2015/07/07}{Restore marginal numbers and notes with sectioning command (bug introduced in v1.21.0)}
 % \changes{v1.24.4}{2015/07/19}{Fix spurious space with \protect\cs{edindex} when using xindy+hyperref option.}
 % \changes{v1.24.5}{2015/07/16}{Fix a bug of indent, when a  added in 1.1.0, when a \protect\cs{beginnumbering} immediately follow a sectioning command.}
-% \changes{v2.0.0}{2015/07/19}{Package's name becomes \reledmac.} 
+% \changes{v2.0.0}{2015/07/19}{Package's name becomes \reledmac.}
 % \changes{v2.0.0}{2015/07/19}{In order to have a more consistent name's convention, many names has been changed.}
 % \changes{v2.0.0}{2015/07/19}{Many \LaTeX's output macros are now patched and not override.}
 % \changes{v2.0.0}{2015/07/19}{Add nonum option for endnotes.}
@@ -469,18 +469,18 @@
 % \changes{v2.20.0}{2017/05/04}{Fix a bug when using familiar footnotes in \protect\cs{eledsection} and related.}
 % \changes{v2.20.0}{2017/05/04}{Reset font specification at the beginning of familiar footnotes.}
 % \changes{v2.20.0}{2017/05/04}{Add starred version of \protect\cs{AtEveryPstart}, \protect\cs{AtEveryPend}, \protect\cs{AtEveryStanza} and \protect\cs{AtEveryStopStanza}.}
-% \changes{v2.20.0}{2017/05/04}{Add \protect\cs{AtStartEveryStanza},  \protect\cs{BeforeEveryStopStanza},  \protect\cs{AtEndEveryPend},  \protect\cs{AtStartEveryPstart}.} 
-% \changes{v2.20.0}{2017/05/04}{Add second optional argument to \protect\cs{pstart}, \protect\cs{pend} and \protect\cs{stanza}.} 
-% \changes{v2.20.0}{2017/05/04}{Add third and fourth optional argument to \protect\cs{newverse}.} 
-% \changes{v2.21.0}{2017/06/04}{Fix a bug when using formatting command in the argument of \protect\cs{edindex} inside \protect\cs{edtext}.} 
+% \changes{v2.20.0}{2017/05/04}{Add \protect\cs{AtStartEveryStanza},  \protect\cs{BeforeEveryStopStanza},  \protect\cs{AtEndEveryPend},  \protect\cs{AtStartEveryPstart}.}
+% \changes{v2.20.0}{2017/05/04}{Add second optional argument to \protect\cs{pstart}, \protect\cs{pend} and \protect\cs{stanza}.}
+% \changes{v2.20.0}{2017/05/04}{Add third and fourth optional argument to \protect\cs{newverse}.}
+% \changes{v2.21.0}{2017/06/04}{Fix a bug when using formatting command in the argument of \protect\cs{edindex} inside \protect\cs{edtext}.}
 % \changes{v2.21.0}{2017/06/04}{Now, as explained in the handbook, a \protect\cs{edindex} inside \protect\cs{edtext} only creates an index reference to the main text, and not to the critical footnote.}
 % \changes{v2.21.0}{2017/06/04}{Add the possibility of nested \protect\cs{sameword} commands.}
 % \changes{v2.22.0}{2017/06/08}{Fix a bug added in v2.16.0  when using \protect\cs{Xtxtbeforenotes} with paragraphed or normal footnotes.}
-% \changes{v2.22.0}{2017/06/08}{Fix a bug with three and two columns critical footnotes, broken in v.~2.17.6.} 
-% \changes{v2.22.0}{2017/06/08}{Add \protect\cs{txtbeforenotesX} hook.} 
-% \changes{v2.22.0}{2017/06/08}{Add \protect\cs{txtbeforenotesonlyonceX} and \protect\cs{Xtxtbeforenotesonlyonce} hooks.} 
+% \changes{v2.22.0}{2017/06/08}{Fix a bug with three and two columns critical footnotes, broken in v.~2.17.6.}
+% \changes{v2.22.0}{2017/06/08}{Add \protect\cs{txtbeforenotesX} hook.}
+% \changes{v2.22.0}{2017/06/08}{Add \protect\cs{txtbeforenotesonlyonceX} and \protect\cs{Xtxtbeforenotesonlyonce} hooks.}
 % \changes{v2.22.1}{2017/07/07}{Compatibility with new version of \protect\reledpar.}
-% \changes{v2.22.1}{2017/07/07}{Fix a bug with some commands inside \protect\cs{sameword}.} 
+% \changes{v2.22.1}{2017/07/07}{Fix a bug with some commands inside \protect\cs{sameword}.}
 % \changes{v2.22.2}{2017/07/17}{Do not print footnotes at the first run.}
 % \changes{v2.23.0}{2017/07/31}{Add \protect\option{swcaseinsensitive} option}
 % \changes{v2.23.0}{2017/07/31}{Optimisation of the code added on v2.22.2 to not print footnotes at the first run.}
@@ -515,6 +515,7 @@
 % \changes{v2.26.11}{2018/05/21}{Allow to use \protect\cs{edtext} inside \protect\cs{sameword}}
 % \changes{v2.26.12}{2018/07/19}{Precise minimal version of xparse package required.}
 % \changes{v2.27.0}{2018/09/13}{Add \protect\cs{doinsidethislinehook}.}
+% \changes{v2.27.1}{2018/10/12}{Fix spurious space in \protect\cs{hidenumbering}.}
 %      Typeset scholarly editions with \LaTeX\thanks{This file (\dtxfilename)
 % has version number \fileversion, last revised \filedate.}}
 %
@@ -541,13 +542,13 @@
 % It can be used in combination with \parpackage in order to typeset two texts in parallel,
 % like an original text and its translation in a modern language.
 %
-% 
+%
 % \Macpackage provides many tools and options. Normally, they are all documented in this file.
 % Also provided is a help folder, ``\href{examples/.}{examples}''. The folder contains additional examples (although not for every possible case).
 % Examples starting with ``1-'' are for basic uses, those starting with ``2-'' are for advanced uses.
-% 
+%
 % To report bugs or request a new feature, please go to ledmac GitHub page and click on ``New Issue'': \url{https://github.com/maieul/ledmac/issues/}.
-% You must create an account on github.com to access my page (maieul/ledmac). 
+% You must create an account on github.com to access my page (maieul/ledmac).
 % GitHub accounts are free for open-source users. You can post messages in English or in French (preferred).
 %
 % You can subscribe to the \macpackage mail list at:\\ \url{http://geekographie.maieul.net/146}
@@ -582,19 +583,19 @@
 % the formatting and visual correlation of all the disparate types
 % of information.
 %
-% Apart from \macpackage there are other \LaTeX\ packages for typesetting critical editions. 
-% However, the aim of \macpackage is to provide an ``all in one'' and flexible tool in the field of critical editions. 
-% 
+% Apart from \macpackage there are other \LaTeX\ packages for typesetting critical editions.
+% However, the aim of \macpackage is to provide an ``all in one'' and flexible tool in the field of critical editions.
+%
 % Any suggestions for new features are welcome.
 %
-% This manual contains a general description of how to use \macpackage followed by 
+% This manual contains a general description of how to use \macpackage followed by
 % the complete source code and its extensive documentation (in sections~\ref{overview} and following, enumerated with Roman numerals).
 % It ends with a list of actions to do when migrating from one version to other, a change history and an index to the
 % source code.
-% 
+%
 % You do not need to read the source code for this package in order to use it; we
-% provide this code primarily for reference, and many of our 
-% comments on it repeat material that is also found in earlier sections. But no documentation, 
+% provide this code primarily for reference, and many of our
+% comments on it repeat material that is also found in earlier sections. But no documentation,
 % however thorough, can cover every question that comes up and many can be
 % answered quickly by consulting the code. On a first reading,
 % we suggest that you read only the general documentation in
@@ -605,7 +606,7 @@
 % \subsubsection{\edmac}
 %
 % The original version of \edmac{} was \texttt{TEXTED.TEX}, written
-% by John Lavagnino\index{Lavagnino, John} 
+% by John Lavagnino\index{Lavagnino, John}
 % in late 1987 and early 1988 for formatting
 % critical editions of English plays.
 %
@@ -691,7 +692,7 @@
 % produced, as was the previous book, by Gyula Mayer\index{Mayer, Gyula}
 % in Budapest.} the collected letters and papers of
 % Leibniz,\index{Leibniz}\footnote{Leibniz, {\em S\"amtliche Schriften und
-% Briefe}, series {\sc I, III, VII,} being edited by Dr.\ H.\ 
+% Briefe}, series {\sc I, III, VII,} being edited by Dr.\ H.\
 % Breger\index{Breger, Herbert}, Dr.~N. G\"adeke\index{G\"adeke, Nora} and
 % others at the Leibniz-Archiv, Nieders\"achsische Landesbibliothek, Hannover.
 % (see \url{http://www.nlb-hannover.de/Leibniz})}
@@ -706,44 +707,44 @@
 %
 %
 %
-%    Version 1.0 of \tabmac{} was released by 
+%    Version 1.0 of \tabmac{} was released by
 % Herbert Breger\index{Breger, Herbert} in October
 % 1996. This added the capability for typesetting tabular material.
 %
-%    Version 0.01 of \edstanza{} was released by 
+%    Version 0.01 of \edstanza{} was released by
 % Wayne Sullivan~\index{Sullivan, Wayne}
 % in June 1992, to help a colleague with typesetting Irish verse.
 %
 %    In March 2003 Peter Wilson started an attempt to port \edmac{}
-% from TeX to LaTeX. The starting point was \edmac{} version 3.16 
+% from TeX to LaTeX. The starting point was \edmac{} version 3.16
 % as documented on 19 July 1994 (available from CTAN). In August 2003
 % the \tabmac{} functions were added; the starting point for these
 % being version 1.0 of Ocober 1996. The \edstanza{} (v0.01) functions were
 % added in February 2004. Sidenotes and regular footnotes in numbered
 % text were added in April 2004. This port was called \ledmac (\LaTeX\ \edmac).
-% 
+%
 % Since July~2011, ledmac is maintained by Ma\"ieul Rouquette. It is increasingly
 % powerful and flexible, but it also has become increasingly divergent from the original TeX macro.
 %
 % \subsubsection{\eledmac}
 % Important changes were put in version 1.0, to make \ledmac more easily extensible (see \reff{displayoptions}).
-% These changes can trigger small problems with the old customization. That is why a new name was selected: \eledmac (extended \ledmac). 
+% These changes can trigger small problems with the old customization. That is why a new name was selected: \eledmac (extended \ledmac).
 %
 % To migrate from \ledmac to \eledmac, please read \reff{migration}.
 %
 % \subsubsection{\reledmac}
-% 
+%
 % \eledmac has facilitated the creation of customized critical editions.
 % However, the changes made to allow such customization were made in a non-systematic way.
-% Many deprecated commands were kept and many technical `debts' were accumulated, 
+% Many deprecated commands were kept and many technical `debts' were accumulated,
 % hindering the future evolution of the package.
 %
 % For these reasons, Maïeul Rouquette decided on a spring cleaning of the code.
 % As some commands name were changed, the resulting compatibility was broken (a little).
-% 
-% A new name was selected: \reledmac (extended renewed \eledmac). 
+%
+% A new name was selected: \reledmac (extended renewed \eledmac).
 % To migrate from \eledmac to \reledmac, please read \reff{migratereledmac}.
-% 
+%
 % \subsection{Bibliography}
 % A collaborative list of works edited with (r)(e)(ledmac is available at
 % \url{https://www.zotero.org/groups/209265/critical_editions_typeset_with_edmac_ledmac_eledmac_and_reledmac/}.
@@ -751,11 +752,11 @@
 %
 % If you write a book or an article about (r)(e)ledmac, please add it on the collaborative bibliography on \url{https://www.zotero.org/groups/1024519/}.
 % \section{How the package works --- the problem of the number of \LaTeX\ runs}\label{howto}
-% The \macpackage package is a three-pass package like \LaTeX\ itself. 
+% The \macpackage package is a three-pass package like \LaTeX\ itself.
 % Although your textual apparatus and line
 % numbers will be printed on the first run, it takes two more
 % compilations by \LaTeX\ to be sure that everything is correctly
-% placed, and one more if you typeset right-to-left text with \XeLaTeX. 
+% placed, and one more if you typeset right-to-left text with \XeLaTeX.
 % If you make any subsequent changes altering the number
 % of lines or notes, the input file may similarly
 % require three passes to get everything to the right place.
@@ -764,7 +765,7 @@
 % problems with a line or two misnumbered at the top of a page, try
 % running \LaTeX\ once or twice more.
 %
-% \textbf{However, the best way to be sure that one has made the right number of runs 
+% \textbf{However, the best way to be sure that one has made the right number of runs
 % is to use some of \LaTeX's run scripts like \emph{latexmk}}.
 %
 % \section{Compatibility warning}
@@ -772,7 +773,7 @@
 % If you use other classes than \cs{article} or \cs{book}, or modify the layout with \package{geometry}, some settings should be made to have correct height for the blocks of notes.
 %
 %Please read \reff{Xmaxhnotes}.
-% 
+%
 % A file may mix \emph{numbered} and \emph{unnumbered} text.
 %
 % Numbered text is printed with marginal line numbers and can include
@@ -788,9 +789,9 @@
 % \section{Options}
 % The package can be loaded with a number of global options which are listed here. There are two types of options:
 % 1) options which provide specific features, and, 2) options which optimize the package's performance.
-% It is advisable for you to read the relevant parts of the handbook, before reading about the first type of option 
+% It is advisable for you to read the relevant parts of the handbook, before reading about the first type of option
 % (specific features), but you can look at the second type (package optimization) in your first reading of the manual.
-% 
+%
 % \subsection{Specific features}
 % \begin{description}
 % \item[draft] underlines lemmas in the main text.
@@ -811,13 +812,13 @@
 % \item[widthliketwocolumns] set the width of the text printed in a single column to be the same as the width of the text printed in two parallel columns with \parpackage. This is useful when alternating between normal and parallel typesetting.
 % \item[xindy] and \verb|xindy+hyperref| select \verb+xindy+ as the index processor (\reff{xindy}).
 % \end{description}
-% 
+%
 % \subsection{Optimizing package performance}\label{option:performance}
 % \begin{description}
-% \item[nocritical] disables tools for critical footnotes (\protect\cs{Afootnote}, \protect\cs{Bfootnote} etc.). If you do not need critical footnotes, this option lets \macpackage\ run faster. 
+% \item[nocritical] disables tools for critical footnotes (\protect\cs{Afootnote}, \protect\cs{Bfootnote} etc.). If you do not need critical footnotes, this option lets \macpackage\ run faster.
 % It will also preserve room for other packages.
 % \item[noeledsec] disables tools for \protect\cs{eledsection} and related commands (\reff{eledsection}).
-% \item[noend] disables tools for endnotes (\protect\cs{Aendnote}, \protect\cs{Bendnote} etc.). If you do not need endnotes, this option lets \macpackage\ run faster. 
+% \item[noend] disables tools for endnotes (\protect\cs{Aendnote}, \protect\cs{Bendnote} etc.). If you do not need endnotes, this option lets \macpackage\ run faster.
 % It will also preserve room for other packages.
 % \item[nofamiliar] disables tools for familiar footnotes (\protect\cs{footnoteA}, \protect\cs{footnoteB} etc.). If you do not need familiar footnotes, this option lets \macpackage\ run faster.
 % It will also preserve room for other packages.
@@ -827,13 +828,13 @@
 % This is why, if your work does not require the entire A--E series, you can narrow down the available number of series.
 % For example, if you only need A and B series, call the package with \verb+series={A,B}+ option.
 % \end{description}
-% 
+%
 % \section{Text lines and paragraphs numbering}
-% 
+%
 % \subsection{Text lines numbering}
 % \DescribeMacro{\beginnumbering}
 % \DescribeMacro{\endnumbering}
-% Each section of numbered text must be preceded by \protect\cs{beginnumbering} 
+% Each section of numbered text must be preceded by \protect\cs{beginnumbering}
 % and followed by \protect\cs{endnumbering}, as in the following example. \\
 % \egstart
 % \begin{verbatim}
@@ -858,7 +859,7 @@
 % \protect\cs{beginnumbering} and \protect\cs{endnumbering} commands. But your text
 % will most often contain chapter or other divisions marking sections
 % that should be independently numbered, and these will be appropriate
-% places to begin new numbered sections. 
+% places to begin new numbered sections.
 %
 % \Macpackage has to read and store in memory
 % a certain amount of information about the entire section when it
@@ -874,9 +875,9 @@
 % Within a numbered section, each paragraph of numbered text must
 % be marked using the \protect\cs{pstart} and \protect\cs{pend} commands like this: \\
 % \egstart
-% \begin{verbatim} 
+% \begin{verbatim}
 % \pstart
-% Paragraph of text. 
+% Paragraph of text.
 % \pend
 % \end{verbatim}
 % \egend
@@ -941,7 +942,7 @@
 %
 % \subsubsection{Content before specific \protect\cs{pstart} and after specific \protect\cs{pend}}\label{pstart:optionalarg}
 % \changes{v1.12.0}{2014/08/05}{Optional arguments for \protect\cs{pstart} and \protect\cs{pend}.}
-% Both \protect\cs{pstart} and \protect\cs{pend} can take a optional argument in brackets. 
+% Both \protect\cs{pstart} and \protect\cs{pend} can take a optional argument in brackets.
 % Its content will be printed before the beginning of \protect\cs{pstart} / after the end of  \protect\cs{pend} instead of the argument of \protect\cs{AtEveryPstart} / \protect\cs{AtEveryPend}.
 %
 % Note that a \cs{noindent} will be automatically added before this argument, and, consequently, a \cs{parskip} will be inserted.
@@ -964,22 +965,22 @@
 % \label{AtEveryPstart} \DescribeMacro{\AtEveryPstart}\DescribeMacro{\AtEveryPend}
 % You can use both \protect\cs{AtEveryPstart} and \protect\cs{AtEveryPend}.
 % Their arguments will be printed before every \protect\cs{pstart} begins / after  every \protect\cs{pend} ends.
-% 
-% Note that a \cs{noindent} will be inserted before the argument, and, consequently, a \cs{parskip}. You can use the starred version of \protect\cs{AtEveryPstart} and \protect\cs{AtEveryPend} to avoid the \cs{noindent}. 
+%
+% Note that a \cs{noindent} will be inserted before the argument, and, consequently, a \cs{parskip}. You can use the starred version of \protect\cs{AtEveryPstart} and \protect\cs{AtEveryPend} to avoid the \cs{noindent}.
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\AtStartEveryPstart}\DescribeMacro{\AtEndEveryPend}
 %  The argument of \cs{AtStartEveryPstart} / \cs{AtEndEveryPend} will be inserted at the beginning  / the end of every \cs{pstart} / \cs{pend} in the same paragraph. For example, if you want  each \cs{pstart} to start with a star, you can use:
 % \begin{verbatim}
-% \AtStartEveryPstart{*} 
+% \AtStartEveryPstart{*}
 % \end{verbatim}
 % Instead of manually doing
 % \begin{verbatim}
-% \pstart * Real pstart content.\pend 
+% \pstart * Real pstart content.\pend
 % \end{verbatim}
 % \subsubsection{Numbering paragraphs (\protect\cs{pstart})}
 % \changes{v0.12.0}{2011/10/01}{Possibility to number \protect\cs{pstart}.}
-% It is possible to insert a number at every \protect\cs{pstart} command; you must use the \DescribeMacro{\numberpstarttrue}\protect\cs{numberpstarttrue} command to have it. You can stop the numbering with \DescribeMacro{\numberpstartfalse}\protect\cs{numberpstartfalse}. 
-% You can redefine the command \DescribeMacro{\thepstart}\protect\cs{thepstart} to change style. 
+% It is possible to insert a number at every \protect\cs{pstart} command; you must use the \DescribeMacro{\numberpstarttrue}\protect\cs{numberpstarttrue} command to have it. You can stop the numbering with \DescribeMacro{\numberpstartfalse}\protect\cs{numberpstartfalse}.
+% You can redefine the command \DescribeMacro{\thepstart}\protect\cs{thepstart} to change style.
 % You can change the value of the pstart number by using \emph{after} \protect\cs{beginnumbering}:
 % \begin{verbatim}
 % \setcounter{pstart}{value}
@@ -994,11 +995,11 @@
 % \changes{v1.1.0}{2012/09/25}{Add \protect\cs{labelpstarttrue}.}
 % \DescribeMacro{\labelpstarttrue}
 % With the \protect\cs{labelpstarttrue} command, a \protect\cs{label} added just after a \protect\cs{pstart} will refer to the number of this pstart.
-% 
+%
 % \subsubsection{Languages written in Right to Left}
 % If you use languages written right to left with \LuaLaTeX\ or \XeLaTeX,
-% you must switch text direction \emph{before} the \protect\cs{pstart} command. 
-% 
+% you must switch text direction \emph{before} the \protect\cs{pstart} command.
+%
 % \subsubsection{Memory limits}
 % \textbf{This paragraph is kept for history, but the problems described below should not appear with the most recent version of \LaTeX.}
 %
@@ -1011,9 +1012,9 @@
 % speak.  If your text has a very long numbered section it is
 % possible that your \LaTeX\ may reach its memory limit.  There are
 % two solutions to this.
-% 
-% The first solution is to get a larger \LaTeX\ with increased memory.  
-% 
+%
+% The first solution is to get a larger \LaTeX\ with increased memory.
+%
 % The second solution is to
 % split your long section into several smaller ones.  The trouble
 % with this is that your line numbering will start again at zero
@@ -1037,7 +1038,7 @@
 % \endnumbering
 % \end{verbatim}
 % \egend
-% 
+%
 % We have defined these commands as two macros, in case you find it necessary
 % to insert text between numbered sections without disturbing the
 % line numbering.  But if you are really just using these macros to
@@ -1051,25 +1052,25 @@
 % \egend
 %
 % \subsection{Lineation commands}
-% 
+%
 % \subsubsection{Disabling lineation}
 % \DescribeMacro{\numberlinefalse} \DescribeMacro{\numberlinetrue}
 % Line numbering can be disabled with  \protect\cs{numberlinefalse}. It can be enabled again with \protect\cs{numberlinetrue}.
-% 
+%
 % \subsubsection{Setting lineation start and step}
 % \DescribeMacro{\firstlinenum}
 % \DescribeMacro{\linenumincrement}
 %  By default, \macpackage numbers every 5th line. There are two counters that control this behaviour:
 % \verb?firstlinenum? and \verb?linenumincrement?. They can be changed using \protect\cs{firstlinenum}\marg{num} and
-% \protect\cs{linenumincrement}\marg{num}. \protect\cs{firstlinenum} specifies the first 
-% line that will have a printed number, and \protect\cs{linenumincrement} is 
+% \protect\cs{linenumincrement}\marg{num}. \protect\cs{firstlinenum} specifies the first
+% line that will have a printed number, and \protect\cs{linenumincrement} is
 % the difference between succesive numbered lines. For example, to start printing numbers at the first line
 % and to have every other line numbered: \\
 % \verb?\firstlinenum{1} \linenumincrement{2}?
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\firstsublinenum}
 % \DescribeMacro{\sublinenumincrement}
-% There are similar commands, \protect\cs{firstsublinenum}\marg{num} and 
+% There are similar commands, \protect\cs{firstsublinenum}\marg{num} and
 % \protect\cs{sublinenumincrement}\marg{num} for controlling sub-line numbering.
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\linenumberlist}\label{linenumberlist}
@@ -1093,27 +1094,27 @@
 % Lines can be numbered either by page, by pstart or by section; you specify
 % this using the \protect\cs{lineation}\marg{arg}
 % macro, where \meta{arg} is either
-% \texttt{page}, \texttt{pstart} or \texttt{section}. 
+% \texttt{page}, \texttt{pstart} or \texttt{section}.
 
 % You may only use this command at places
 % where numbering is not in effect; you can't change the lineation system
 % within a section. You can change it between sections: they don't all
-% have to use the same lineation system. 
+% have to use the same lineation system.
 % The package's standard setting is \verb"\lineation{section}". If the lineation is by pstart, the pstart number will be printed before the line number in the notes.
 %
 % \subsubsection{Setting line number margin}
 % \DescribeMacro{\linenummargin}
 % The command \protect\cs{linenummargin}\marg{location} specifies the margin
 % where the line (or pstart) numbers will be printed. The permissable values
-% for \meta{location} are \texttt{left}, \texttt{right}, \texttt{inner}, or \texttt{outer}: 
+% for \meta{location} are \texttt{left}, \texttt{right}, \texttt{inner}, or \texttt{outer}:
 % for example, \verb"\linenummargin{inner}".
 % The package's default setting is \\
 % \verb"\linenummargin{left}" \\
-% to typeset the numbers in the left hand margin. 
-% You can change this whenever you're not in the  middle of 
-% making a paragraph. 
+% to typeset the numbers in the left hand margin.
+% You can change this whenever you're not in the  middle of
+% making a paragraph.
 %
-% More precisely, the value of 
+% More precisely, the value of
 % \protect\cs{linenummargin} used is the value in effect at the \protect\cs{pend}
 % of a numbered paragraph. Apart from an initial setting for
 % \protect\cs{linenummargin}, only change \protect\cs{linenummargin} after a \protect\cs{pend},
@@ -1154,12 +1155,12 @@
 % frozen and the sub-line counter advances instead. If one of these
 % commands appears in the middle of a line, it doesn't take effect
 % until the next line; in other words, a line is counted as a line
-% or sub-line depending on what it started out as, even if it 
+% or sub-line depending on what it started out as, even if it
 % changes in the middle.
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{Xsublinesep}
-% \DescribeMacro{Xsublinesepside} 
-% You can change the separator between the line number and the subline number either by using \cs{Xsublinesep} without any optional argument (\reff{Xsublinesep}) or by using \cs{Xsublinesepside}. In the second case, it will change the separator only for line numbers in the margins, not in the footnotes. 
+% \DescribeMacro{Xsublinesepside}
+% You can change the separator between the line number and the subline number either by using \cs{Xsublinesep} without any optional argument (\reff{Xsublinesep}) or by using \cs{Xsublinesepside}. In the second case, it will change the separator only for line numbers in the margins, not in the footnotes.
 % \subsubsection{Locking lineation}
 % \DescribeMacro{\startlock}
 % \DescribeMacro{\endlock}
@@ -1188,7 +1189,7 @@
 % In some cases you may want to modify the line numbers that are
 % automatically calculated: if you are printing only fragments
 % of a work but want to print line numbers appropriate to a complete
-% version, for example. The \protect\cs{setline}\marg{num} and 
+% version, for example. The \protect\cs{setline}\marg{num} and
 % \protect\cs{advanceline}\marg{num} commands
 % may be used to change the current line's number (or the sub-line
 % number, if sub-lineation is currently on). They change both the
@@ -1202,8 +1203,8 @@
 % The \protect\cs{setline} and \protect\cs{advanceline} macros should only be used
 % within a \protect\cs{pstart}\ldots\protect\cs{pend} group. The \protect\cs{setlinenum}\marg{num}
 % command can be used outside such a group, for example, between
-% a \protect\cs{pend} and a \protect\cs{pstart}. It sets the line number 
-% to \meta{num}. 
+% a \protect\cs{pend} and a \protect\cs{pstart}. It sets the line number
+% to \meta{num}.
 % It has no effect if used within a \protect\cs{pstart}\ldots\protect\cs{pend} group.
 %
 % \subsubsection{Line number style}
@@ -1228,7 +1229,7 @@
 % \subsubsection{Skipping and hidding number}
 % \DescribeMacro{\skipnumbering}
 % When inserted into a numbered line the macro \protect\cs{skipnumbering} causes
-% the numbering of that particular line to be skipped; that is, the line 
+% the numbering of that particular line to be skipped; that is, the line
 % number is unchanged and no line number will be printed.
 % Note that if you use it in \protect\cs{stanza}, you must call it at the beginning of the verse.
 %
@@ -1237,25 +1238,25 @@
 % When inserted into a numbered line, the macro \protect\cs{hidenumbering} causes
 % the number for that particular line to be hidden; namely, no line number will print.
 % Note that if you use it in \protect\cs{stanza}, you must call it at the beginning of the verse.
-% 
+%
 % \DescribeMacro{\hidenumberingonleftpage}
 % \cs{hidenumberingonleftpage} is like \protect{hidenumbering}, but is applied only on left page. \cs{hidenumberingonrightpage} is applied on right page.
 % They can be useful  if the position of the line number is depending of the position of the page, but the position of marginal note is fixed.
 % \subsection{Executing code at each line}\label{linehook}
 % \Macpackage provides an advanced feature for users.
 % \DescribeMacro{\dolinehook}\DescribeMacro{\doinsidelinehook}
-% The argument passed to \protect\cs{dolinehook}\marg{arg} will be executed 
+% The argument passed to \protect\cs{dolinehook}\marg{arg} will be executed
 % before slicing a new line in the paragraph.
 % The argument passed to \protect\cs{doinsidelinehook}\marg{arg} will be executed before printing a new line, when the line number has already been fixed.
 % In many cases, the latter is more useful than the former.
 % The file \href{examples/2-line_numbers_in_header.tex}{examples/2-line\_numbers\_in\_header.tex} provides
 % an example for printing the first and last line numbers of a page in the header.
 %
-% \section{Execution code at a specific line}
+% \subsection{Executing code at a specific line}
 % Sometime, you want to execute a code at a precise point in the flow of your text.
 % For example, if the current header of the page corresponds to the position inside the text, you may want to use \cs{markboth} (or similar) command.
 % The main problem is that you need to execute \cs{markboth} when \macpackage\ typesets the text, and not when it reads it, because that could create damage with vertical spacing.
-% 
+%
 % \DescribeMacro{\doinsidethislinehook}
 % The \cs{doinsidethislinehook}\marg{code} macro allows \meta{code} to be executed when the text is typeset. The \meta{code} will be executed in the line equivalent to the position of \cs{doinsidethislinehook} in the flow of the text.
 %
@@ -1270,14 +1271,14 @@
 % \verb+\markboth{1}{1}+ will be executed at the line the \verb+1.+ will be typeset.
 % The \meta{code} of \cs{doinsidethislinehook}  will be executed only at the second run of \LaTeX.
 %
-% See the file 
+% See the file
 % \href{examples/2-subdivision-number-in-header.tex}{examples/2-subdivision-number-in-header.tex} for an example.
 % Especially, the use of this command with \LaTeX\ counters is quite complex, but the example show you how to deal with this problem.
-% 
+%
 % \section{Apparatus commands}
 %
 % \subsection{Terminology}
-% We call ``critical notes'' notes which refer to both a lemma, that is a part of text and a line number. 
+% We call ``critical notes'' notes which refer to both a lemma, that is a part of text and a line number.
 % Critical notes are subdivided in critical footnotes and critical endnotes.
 %
 % We call ``familiar notes'' notes which refer to a footnote mark in the main text.
@@ -1286,7 +1287,7 @@
 % A series of notes is identified by an uppercase letter.
 % When the series letter is at the \emph{beginning} of a command name, it refers to a critical footnote.
 % When the series letter is at the \emph{end} of a command name, it refers to a familiar footnote.
-% 
+%
 % So :
 % \begin{itemize}
 %  \item \protect\cs{Afootnote} is a critical footnote of the series A.
@@ -1305,12 +1306,12 @@
 %
 % The \meta{lemma} argument is the lemma in the main text: \protect\cs{edtext}
 % both prints this as part of the text, and makes it available to the
-% \meta{commands} you specify to generate notes. 
+% \meta{commands} you specify to generate notes.
 %
 % For example:
 % \egstart
 % \begin{verbatim}
-% I am happy : 
+% I am happy :
 % I saw my friend \edtext{Smith}{
 % \Afootnote{Jones C, D.}}
 % on Tuesday.
@@ -1381,19 +1382,19 @@
 % \DescribeMacro{\Dfootnote}
 % \DescribeMacro{\Efootnote}
 % Five separate series of footnotes are maintained; each macro
-% takes one argument like \protect\cs{Afootnote}\marg{text}. 
-% When all of the five 
+% takes one argument like \protect\cs{Afootnote}\marg{text}.
+% When all of the five
 % are used, the \texttt{A} notes appear in a layer just below the main
 % text, followed by the rest in turn, down to the \texttt{E} notes at
-% the bottom.  
+% the bottom.
 % These are the main macros that you will use to construct
-% the critical apparatus of your text. 
+% the critical apparatus of your text.
 %
 % If you need more series of critical notes, please look at \reff{newseries}.
 %
 %\changes{v1.0.0}{2012/09/15}{Options nonum and nosep in \protect\cs{Xfootnote}.}
 %\changes{v1.20.0}{2015/03/22}{Options fulllines in \protect\cs{Xfootnote}.}\label{Xfootnoteopt}
-% An optional argument can be added before the text of the footnote. Its value is a comma-separated list of options. 
+% An optional argument can be added before the text of the footnote. Its value is a comma-separated list of options.
 % \label{fulllines}The available options are:
 % \begin{itemize}
 % \item \verb|fulllines| to disable \protect\cs{Xtwolines} and \protect\cs{Xmorethantwolines} features for this note (cf. \reff{Xtwolines}).
@@ -1417,8 +1418,8 @@
 %
 % The mechanism is similar to the one for footnotes: each macro takes one or more optional arguments and one single argument, like:\\
 % \protect\cs{Aendnote}\oarg{option}\marg{text}.
-% 
-% \label{Xendnoteopt}\meta{option} can contain a comma-separated list of values. Allowed values are: 
+%
+% \label{Xendnoteopt}\meta{option} can contain a comma-separated list of values. Allowed values are:
 % \begin{itemize}
 % \item \verb|fulllines| to disable \protect\cs{Xendtwolines} and \protect\cs{Xendmorethantwolines} features for this particular note (cf. \reff{Xtwolines}).
 % \item \verb+nonum+ to disable line number for this particular note.
@@ -1433,7 +1434,7 @@
 % In this case, all the endnotes of the \meta{s} series are printed, for all numbered sections.
 % \changes{v1.22.0}{2015/04/25}{Add \protect\cs{doendnotesbysection} command.}
 % \changes{v1.22.0}{2015/04/25}{Standardize endnotes handbook.}
-% 
+%
 % \DescribeMacro{\doendnotesbysection} However, you may want to print the endnotes of one given series covering the first numbered section, then the endnotes of another given series covering the first numbered section, then the endnotes of the first given series covering the second numbered section, then the endnotes of the second given series covering the second numbered section, and so forth.
 % In this case, use \protect\cs{doendnotesbysection}\marg{s}.
 % For each value of \meta{s}, the first call of the command will print the notes for the first series, the second call will print the notes for the second series etc.
@@ -1447,18 +1448,18 @@
 % \doendnotesbysection{A}
 % \doendnotesbysection{B}
 % \end{verbatim}
-% 
-% Note that by default inside endnotes no separator is used between the lemma and the content. 
+%
+% Note that by default inside endnotes no separator is used between the lemma and the content.
 % However you can use the \protect\cs{Xendlemmaseparator} macro to define one (\reff{Xendlemmaseparator}).
 %
 % As endnotes may be printed at any point in the document they always
-% start with the page number where they are called. 
+% start with the page number where they are called.
 %
 % \paragraph{Code between endnotes}
 % \DescribeMacro{toendnotes}
 % \DescribeMacro{Xtoendnotes}
 % Sometimes, it is useful to insert content between endnotes of the same series: for example to separate endnotes of different sections of the same text.
-% In this case, you could use \emph{inside 
+% In this case, you could use \emph{inside
 % numbered text} the command:\\
 % \cs{toendnotes}\oarg{series}\marg{content}
 % where \meta{series} is a comma-separated list of the series of endnotes where \meta{content} must be inserted.
@@ -1472,8 +1473,8 @@
 % Alternatively, you can use \cs{Xtoendnotes}\marg{content}, where \enquote{X} must be replaced by a series letter.
 %
 % Remember that the endnotes are temporarily stored in an auxiliary file. That means in general you want to write the \meta{content} in the auxiliary file \emph{without expanding it}, that is without interpreting \TeX\ content.
-% 
-% However, in some cases, you may want to write a 
+%
+% However, in some cases, you may want to write a
 % once-expanded\footnote{The expansion mechanism of \TeX\ is a quite complex problem, but fundamental. We have no place to explain it fully here. Read introduction to \TeX\ to understand well.}
 % version of the \meta{content}, that is the version where the commands are expanded on the first level.
 % This can be, for example, to get a counter value.
@@ -1482,9 +1483,9 @@
 % \begin{verbatim}
 % \Atoendnotes*{\string\section{Letter 1 (chap. \thechapter)}}
 % \end{verbatim}
-% 
+%
 % \subsubsection{Paragraph in critical apparatus}
-% By default, no paragraph can be made in the notes of the critical apparatus. 
+% By default, no paragraph can be made in the notes of the critical apparatus.
 % You can allow it by adding the options \verb+parapparatus+ when loading the package :
 % \begin{verbatim}
 % \usepackage[parapparatus]{eledmac}
@@ -1496,7 +1497,7 @@
 % \DescribeMacro{\lemma}
 % \changes{v1.0.0}{2012/09/15}{\protect\cs{lemma} can contain commands.}
 % If you want to change the lemma that gets passed to the notes, you
-% can do this by using \protect\cs{lemma}\marg{alternative} within the 
+% can do this by using \protect\cs{lemma}\marg{alternative} within the
 % second argument to \protect\cs{edtext} and before the note commands.
 % The most common use of this command is to abbreviate the lemma that's
 % printed in the notes. For example:
@@ -1568,7 +1569,7 @@
 % widely divergent notions of what sort of notes are required, where
 % they should be printed, and what they should be called. But this
 % does not mean you have to type \protect\cs{Afootnote} when you would rather
-% type something you find more meaningful, like \protect\cs{variant}. 
+% type something you find more meaningful, like \protect\cs{variant}.
 %
 % We recommend that you create a series of such aliases and use them
 % instead of the names chosen here; all you have to do is put commands
@@ -1589,23 +1590,23 @@
 % Sometimes, the same word occurs twice (or more) in the same line.
 % \Macpackage provides  tools to disambiguate references in the critical notes.
 % The lemma will be followed by a reference number if a given word occurs more that once in the same line.
-% 
+%
 % \subsubsection{Basic use}
 % \DescribeMacro{\sameword} To use this tool, you have to mark every occurrence of the potentially ambiguous term with the \protect\cs{sameword} command:
 %   \begin{verbatim}
 %   Lupus \sameword{aut} canis \edtext{\sameword{aut}}{\Afootnote{et}} felix
-%   \end{verbatim} 
+%   \end{verbatim}
 % In this example, \verb+aut+ will be followed, in the critical note, by the exponent \verb+2+ if it is printed in the same line as the first \verb+aut+, but it will not if it is printed in a different line. The number is printed only after the second run.
 %
 % \subsubsection{Case setting}
 % By default, \cs{sameword} is sensitive to the case. E.g. \enquote{foo} is considered as a different word to \enquote{Foo}.
-% 
+%
 % You can use the \option{swcaseinsensitive} when loading the package to make \cs{sameword} insensitive to the case, i.e.
 % to consider \enquote{foo} as identical \enquote{Foo}.
 %
 % \subsubsection{Notes about input encoding with UTF-8 processor}
 %
-% If you use UTF-8 processor, like \XeLaTeX\ or \LuaLaTeX, there should not be any glitches. 
+% If you use UTF-8 processor, like \XeLaTeX\ or \LuaLaTeX, there should not be any glitches.
 % However, pay attention to how characters are encoded. Similar-looking characters may be represented differently in unicode numbering.
 %
 % For instance, in Greek, ``ᾳ'' has two possible unicode numbers:
@@ -1620,13 +1621,13 @@
 % \begin{itemize}
 %   \item If you use \XeLaTeX, add this line in your preamble:\verb+ \XeTeXinputnormalization 1+.
 %   \item If you use \LuaLaTeX, use the \protect\package{uninormalize} package of Michal Hoftich\footnote{\url{https://github.com/michal-h21/uninormalize}.} with the \verb+buffer+ option set to true.
-% \end{itemize} 
+% \end{itemize}
 %
-% With these tools, \XeTeX\ / \LuaTeX\ will dynamicaly normalize unicode input when reading the file. 
+% With these tools, \XeTeX\ / \LuaTeX\ will dynamicaly normalize unicode input when reading the file.
 % Consequently, you will have no problems with the \protect\cs{sameword} command.
 % \subsubsection{Use with \protect\cs{lemma} command}
 % If you use the \protect\cs{lemma} command, \macpackage\ cannot know to which occurence of \cs{sameword} in the first argument of \cs{edtext} a word marked with \cs{sameword} in \cs{lemma} should refer.
-% 
+%
 % For example, in the following example:
 % \begin{verbatim}
 %    some thing
@@ -1637,17 +1638,17 @@
 %       {\lemma{\sameword{sw} \ldots all}\Afootnote{critical note}}.%
 % \end{verbatim}
 % \Macpackage\ cannot know if the ``sw'' in \protect\cs{lemma} refers to the word after ``thing'', after ``other'', or after ``again''.
-% 
+%
 % Consequently, you must tell \macpackage to which instance of \protect\cs{sameword} you are referring in the first argument of \protect\cs{edtext}:
 % \begin{itemize}
 %   \item In the content of \protect\cs{lemma}, use \protect\cs{sameword} with no optional argument.
 %   \item In the first argument of \protect\cs{edtext}, use \protect\cs{sameword} with the optional argument \oarg{X}. \meta{X} is the depth of the \protect\cs{edtext} where the \protect\cs{lemma} is used.
 % So if the \protect\cs{lemma} is called in a \protect\cs{edtext} inside another \protect\cs{edtext}, \meta{X} is equal to \verb+2+.
 % If the \protect\cs{lemma} is called in a \protect\cs{edtext} ``of first level'', \meta{X} is equal to \verb|1|. If the lemma is called in both 1 and 2 \protect\cs{edtext} depth, \meta{X} is \verb+1,2+. If that word is referenced in the lemma of every \protect\cs{edtext} depth, \meta{X} can also be set to \verb+inlemma+.
-% \end{itemize} 
+% \end{itemize}
 % Note that only words that are actually referenced in a \protect\cs{lemma} need the optional argument. Therefore, the first \protect\cs{sameword} in the example above should have ``1'' as its optional argument, to be referenced correctly in the lemma.
 %
-% Note also that the \meta{X} does not refer to the level where the \protect\cs{sameword} occurs, but to the level of the \protect\cs{lemma} that refers to that \protect\cs{sameword}. For example: 
+% Note also that the \meta{X} does not refer to the level where the \protect\cs{sameword} occurs, but to the level of the \protect\cs{lemma} that refers to that \protect\cs{sameword}. For example:
 % \begin{verbatim}
 %    \edtext{some \edtext{\sameword[1]{word}}{\Afootnote{om. M}}
 %            and other \sameword{word}
@@ -1662,15 +1663,15 @@
 % Each number is an occurrence of \protect\cs{sameword}. After a framed box,
 % the text in superscript represents the content of \protect\cs{lemma} for that \protect\cs{edtext} level.
 % The text in subscript at the right of a number represents the content of the optional argument of \protect\cs{sameword}.
-% 
+%
 %\fbox{%
 %  \fbox{%
-%   $1_{\mathrm{inlemma}}$ 
+%   $1_{\mathrm{inlemma}}$
 %   \fbox{$2$}
 %   $3_2$%
 %       }\textsuperscript{$1$\ldots$3$}%
 %     4
-%     $5_1$ 
+%     $5_1$
 %   }\textsuperscript{1\ldots5}
 %
 % The \protect\cs{sameword} number~3 is called in a \protect\cs{lemma} related to an \protect\cs{edtext} of level~2.
@@ -1683,7 +1684,7 @@
 % However, as \protect\cs{lemma} is called only in level~1 and~2, ``1,2'' could replaced by ``inlemma''.
 %
 % The \protect\cs{sameword} number~2 is in the first argument of a \protect\cs{edtext} of level~3, but it has no \protect\cs{lemma}-command, so there is no need to mark it.
-% 
+%
 % Here, the corresponding code:
 % \egstart
 % \begin{verbatim}
@@ -1754,20 +1755,20 @@
 % \begin{verbatim}
 %\sameword{per} \sameword{causam}
 %tamen scire
-%\edtext{\sameword{causam}}{\Bfootnote{fnote}} 
+%\edtext{\sameword{causam}}{\Bfootnote{fnote}}
 %est
-%\edtext{\sameword{per} \sameword{causam}}{\Bfootnote{causam rei B}} 
+%\edtext{\sameword{per} \sameword{causam}}{\Bfootnote{causam rei B}}
 %cognoscere
 %\edtext{\sameword{causam}}{\Bfootnote{fnote}}
 % \end{verbatim}
 % \begin{ledgroup}
 % \beginnumbering
 % \pstart
-%\sameword{per} \sameword{causam} 
+%\sameword{per} \sameword{causam}
 %tamen scire
-%\edtext{\sameword{causam}}{\Bfootnote{fnote}} 
+%\edtext{\sameword{causam}}{\Bfootnote{fnote}}
 %est
-%\edtext{\sameword{per} \sameword{causam}}{\Bfootnote{causam rei B}} 
+%\edtext{\sameword{per} \sameword{causam}}{\Bfootnote{causam rei B}}
 %cognoscere
 %\edtext{\sameword{causam}}{\Bfootnote{fnote}}
 % \pend
@@ -1792,7 +1793,7 @@
 %\sameword{per \sameword{causam}} tamen scire
 %\edtext{\sameword{causam}}{\Bfootnote{fnote}} est
 %\edtext{\sameword[1]{per \sameword{causam}}}%
-% {\lemma{\sameword{per causam}}\Bfootnote{causam rei B}} 
+% {\lemma{\sameword{per causam}}\Bfootnote{causam rei B}}
 % cognoscere
 %\edtext{\sameword{causam}}{\Bfootnote{fnote}}
 %\pend
@@ -1806,7 +1807,7 @@
 %}
 % \end{verbatim}
 % \subsubsection{Problems with some macros}
-% \DescribeMacro{\swnoexpands}Macros inside \protect\cs{sameword} that are not fully expandable, mainly macros which manipulate font features, write on full or have optional argument, may cause problems during compilation. Custom commands inside \protect\cs{sameword} may therefore result in errors saying that \enquote{Use of \\sameword doesn't match its definition.} To solve this, include a redefinition of your custom commands in the \protect\cs{swnoexpands} macro. 
+% \DescribeMacro{\swnoexpands}Macros inside \protect\cs{sameword} that are not fully expandable, mainly macros which manipulate font features, write on full or have optional argument, may cause problems during compilation. Custom commands inside \protect\cs{sameword} may therefore result in errors saying that \enquote{Use of \\sameword doesn't match its definition.} To solve this, include a redefinition of your custom commands in the \protect\cs{swnoexpands} macro.
 % In order to not include any content of a macro during comparison, identify the command with \protect\cs{@gobble} For example:
 % \begin{verbatim}
 %\makeatletter
@@ -1815,7 +1816,7 @@
 %}
 %\makeatother
 % \end{verbatim}
-% This will drop the content of \protect\cs{somemacro} during comparison. 
+% This will drop the content of \protect\cs{somemacro} during comparison.
 %
 % To include the content of the first and only one argument of a custom command in sameword comparison, use the \protect\cs{@firstofone} command. For example, this is how \cs{emph} is handled:
 % \begin{verbatim}
@@ -1842,7 +1843,7 @@
 % for more info and documentation. The script is still at a beta stage, so
 % comments and questions as well as error reports are very welcome at
 % \url{https://github.com/stenskjaer/samewords/issues}.
-% 
+%
 % Please note that the maintainer of this script is not identical with the maintainer of \macpackage.
 %
 % \subsection{Apparatus of manuscripts}
@@ -1852,7 +1853,7 @@
 % Such lists are referred to as \enquote{apparatuses of manuscripts}.
 %
 % To produce an apparatus of manuscripts with \macpackage, you have to insert specific commands that are used to mark the sections for which only part of the manuscripts are relevant.
-% These commands will be processed, and \textbf{after the second \TeX{} run}, corresponding apparatuses of manuscripts will be inserted in the first (viz. 'A' series) level of footnotes. 
+% These commands will be processed, and \textbf{after the second \TeX{} run}, corresponding apparatuses of manuscripts will be inserted in the first (viz. 'A' series) level of footnotes.
 %
 % As the insertion of this apparatus can change the page breaks, you may have to run \TeX{} two or more times.
 % We strongly recommend to use tools like \emph{latexmk} to do that.
@@ -1870,7 +1871,7 @@
 % \DescribeMacro{\stopmsdata}
 % \cs{stopmsdata} must be inserted at the point where the section of text previously marked by \cs{msdata} ends.
 % The command must be attached right to the end of the section, with no space.
-% As \cs{stopmsdata} is a \LaTeX\ argumentless macro, it will gobble the following space. 
+% As \cs{stopmsdata} is a \LaTeX\ argumentless macro, it will gobble the following space.
 % To keep that space, you have to either append a backslash followed by a space or \verb+{}+ to \cs{stopmsdata}, like so:
 % \begin{verbatim}
 % \msdata{ABC}Lorem ipsum dolor
@@ -1912,7 +1913,7 @@
 % And restore the default behaviour using
 % \cs{msdataposition}\arg{msdata-regular}
 % \subsection{Familiar notes} \label{sec:desc:familiar}
-% 
+%
 %
 % \subsubsection{Basic use}
 % \DescribeMacro{\footnoteA}
@@ -1923,14 +1924,14 @@
 %    As well as the standard \LaTeX\ footnotes generated via \protect\cs{footnote},
 % the package also provides
 % five series of additional footnotes called \protect\cs{footnoteA} through
-% \protect\cs{footnoteE}. These have the familiar marker in the text, and 
+% \protect\cs{footnoteE}. These have the familiar marker in the text, and
 % the marked text at the foot of the page can be formated using
 % any of the styles described for the critical footnotes. Note that
 % the `regular' footnotes have the series letter at the end of the macro
 % name whereas the critical footnotes have the series letter at the start
 % of the name.
 %
-% 
+%
 % \subsubsection{Customizing mark}
 % \DescribeMacro{\thefootnoteA}
 % \DescribeMacro{\bodyfootmarkA}
@@ -1949,10 +1950,10 @@
 %
 %    There are similar command triples for the other series.
 % \subsubsection{Separator for multiple footnotes}
-%   The \protect\package{footmisc} package~\cite{FOOTMISC} by Robin 
-% Fairbairns\index{Fairbairns, Robin} has an option whereby 
+%   The \protect\package{footmisc} package~\cite{FOOTMISC} by Robin
+% Fairbairns\index{Fairbairns, Robin} has an option whereby
 % sequential footnote
-% marks in the text can be separated by 
+% marks in the text can be separated by
 % commas\textsuperscript{3,4} like so.
 % As a convenience \reledmac\ provides this automatically.
 %
@@ -1970,7 +1971,7 @@
 % For all \meta{X} command, \macpackage provides a \cs{footnote\meta{X}mark} command and a \cs{footnote\meta{X}text} command, equivalent to standard \LaTeX's command \cs{footnotemark} and \cs{footnotetext}.
 % For example, to use with \cs{uline}, do:
 % \begin{verbatim}
-%  This is \uline{a test containing\mbox{\footnoteAmark}}\footnoteAtext{A  
+%  This is \uline{a test containing\mbox{\footnoteAmark}}\footnoteAtext{A
 % simple footnote.}\uline{ a simple footnote.}
 % \end{verbatim}
 %
@@ -1982,17 +1983,17 @@
 %
 % If you need more than five series of critical footnotes, you can
 % create extra series, using \protect\cs{newseries} command. For example, to create F and G series \protect\cs{newseries}\verb+{G,H}+.
-% 
+%
 % \subsubsection{Delete series}
 % As the number of series which are defined increases, \macpackage gets slower.
 % If you do not need all of the six standard series (A--E),
-% you can load the package with the \verb+series+ option. 
+% you can load the package with the \verb+series+ option.
 % For example, if you need only series~A and~B, use:
 % \begin{verbatim}
 % \usepackage[series={A,B}]{eledmac}
 % \end{verbatim}
 % \subsubsection{Series order}
-% The default series order is the one called with the \verb+series+ option of the package, or, if this option is not used, A, B, C, D, E. 
+% The default series order is the one called with the \verb+series+ option of the package, or, if this option is not used, A, B, C, D, E.
 % Series order determines footnotes order.
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\seriesatbegin}\DescribeMacro{\seriesatend} However in some specific cases, you need to change the series order at some point inside the document.
@@ -2046,7 +2047,7 @@
 % If the optional argument is omitted or empty, the setting will apply to the entire series.
 %
 
-% When a length, noted \meta{l}, is used, it can be stretchable: \verb|a plus b minus c|. The final length |m| is calculated by \LaTeX{} to have: $a-c \leq m \leq a+b$. If you use some relative unit\footnote{Like \verb|em| which is the width of an `m' in a given font.}, it will be relative to font size of the footnote, except for commands concerning the place kept by the notes --- including blank space. 
+% When a length, noted \meta{l}, is used, it can be stretchable: \verb|a plus b minus c|. The final length |m| is calculated by \LaTeX{} to have: $a-c \leq m \leq a+b$. If you use some relative unit\footnote{Like \verb|em| which is the width of an `m' in a given font.}, it will be relative to font size of the footnote, except for commands concerning the place kept by the notes --- including blank space.
 %
 % Some commands are boolean, indicating when an option is enabled.
 % If you want to disable the option after enabling it, you must use \verb+[false+] as the second optional argument.
@@ -2054,7 +2055,7 @@
 % \begin{itemize}
 % \item \verb+\XX[A][false]+ to disable the `XX' option for the series A.
 % \item \verb+\XX[][false]+ to disable it for all series.
-% 
+%
 % \end{itemize}
 % There is also name convention:
 % \begin{itemize}
@@ -2070,22 +2071,22 @@
 % By default, all footnotes are formatted as a series of separate
 % paragraphs in one column. Three other formats are also
 % available for notes.
-% 
+%
 % Use \protect\cs{Xarrangement}\oarg{s}\marg{a} to change the arrangement of the \meta{s} series of critical footnotes and \protect\cs{arrangementX}\oarg{s}\marg{a} to change the arrangement of  the \meta{s} series of familiar footnotes.
-% 
+%
 % The value of \meta{a} can be one of the following
 % \begin{itemize}
 % \item \verb+paragraph+ formats
-% all of the footnotes of a series as a single paragraph; if you use this arrangement, you are strongly encouraged to read \reff{paragraphednotes:advanced}. 
+% all of the footnotes of a series as a single paragraph; if you use this arrangement, you are strongly encouraged to read \reff{paragraphednotes:advanced}.
 % \item \verb+twocol+ formats them as separate paragraphs,
 % but in two columns;
-% \item \verb+threecol+, in three columns. 
+% \item \verb+threecol+, in three columns.
 % \item \verb+normal+, restore normal arrangement.
 % \end{itemize}
 %
 %    You should set up the page layout parameters, and in particular the
-% \protect\cs{baselineskip} of the footnotes, before you call this  
-% macro because its action depends on these; 
+% \protect\cs{baselineskip} of the footnotes, before you call this
+% macro because its action depends on these;
 % too much or too little space will be allotted for the notes on
 % the page if these macros use the wrong
 % values.
@@ -2097,28 +2098,28 @@
 %
 % The notes arrangement must be called after having defined the document geometry setting.
 % If you must change geometry setting inside your document, do not forget to call note arrangement again.
-% 
+%
 % \protect\cs{hsize} has been set for the pages that use
 % this series of notes; otherwise \TeX\ will try to put too
 % many or too few of these notes on each page. If you need to
 % change the \protect\cs{hsize} within the document, call
 % the arrangement macro again afterwards to take account of the new
-% value.  
+% value.
 % \subsection{Control line number printing}
 % \subsubsection{Print line number only at first time}
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xnumberonlyfirstinline}\label{Xnumberonlyfirstinline}
 % \changes{v1.0.1}{2012/09/16}{Correction on \protect\cs{Xnumberonlyfirstinline} with lineation by pstart or by page.}
 % By default, the line number is printed in every note. If you want to print it only the first time for a given line number
-% (i.e., once for line 1, once for line 2, etc.), you can use \protect\cs{Xnumberonlyfirstinline}\oarg{s}. 
+% (i.e., once for line 1, once for line 2, etc.), you can use \protect\cs{Xnumberonlyfirstinline}\oarg{s}.
 %
 %
 % \changes{v1.1.0}{2012/09/25}{Add \protect\cs{Xnumberonlyfirstintwolines}}
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xnumberonlyfirstintwolines}\label{Xnumberonlyfirstintwolines}
-% Suppose you have a lemma on line~2 and a lemma between line~2 and line~3. 
+% Suppose you have a lemma on line~2 and a lemma between line~2 and line~3.
 % With \protect\cs{Xnumberonlyfirstinline}, the second lemma is considered to be on the same line as the first lemma.
 % But if  you use both \protect\cs{Xnumberonlyfirstinline}\oarg{s} and \protect\cs{Xnumberonlyfirstintwolines}\oarg{s}, a distinction is made.
-% 
-% 
+%
+%
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xsymlinenum}
 % For setting a particular symbol in place of the line number, you can use \protect\cs{Xsymlinenum}\oarg{s}\marg{symbol} in combination with \protect\cs{Xnumberonlyfirstinline}\oarg{s}. From the second lemma of the same line, the symbol will be used instead of the line number. Note that any command called in \meta{symbol} must be robust. Use \protect\cs{robustify} to robustify a non-robust command.
 %
@@ -2131,7 +2132,7 @@
 % \subsubsection{Print page number only at first time}
 % For endnotes, \reledmac\ provides a mechanism for printing the page number only the first time it is seen.
 % However, when a lemma spans over two pages, the line numbers are normally printed in the following pattern: starting page number - starting line number - ending page number - ending line number.
-% It follows that what corresponds to the actual `page number' may not be self-evident. So: 
+% It follows that what corresponds to the actual `page number' may not be self-evident. So:
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xendpagenumberonlyfirst} \cs{Xendpagenumberonlyfirst}\oarg{s} can be called to ensure that the starting page number of a lemma be not printed if it is the same as the ending page number of the preceding lemma.
 % You can use \emph{additionally} one (and only one) of the following commands:
 % \begin{itemize}
@@ -2146,7 +2147,7 @@
 %
 % \end{itemize}
 
-%  
+%
 % In any case, you can use:
 % \begin{itemize}
 % \item \DescribeMacro{\Xendsympagenum} \cs{Xendsympagenum}\oarg{series}\marg{c} to print \meta{c} when the page number is not printed.
@@ -2162,7 +2163,7 @@
 % \cs{Xendbeforepagenumber}\oarg{s}\marg{text} defines the text before the page number in endnotes. Default value is \verb+p.+ (``p'' followed by a dot).
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xendafterpagenumber}
-% \cs{Xendafterpagenumber}\oarg{s}\marg{text} defines the text after the page number in endnotes. Default value is \verb+) + (open parenthesis followed by a single space). 
+% \cs{Xendafterpagenumber}\oarg{s}\marg{text} defines the text after the page number in endnotes. Default value is \verb+) + (open parenthesis followed by a single space).
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xendlineprefixsingle}
 % \cs{Xendlineprefixsingle}\oarg{s}\marg{text} defines the text before the line number in endnotes when there is only one line. Default value is empty.
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xendlineprefixmore}
@@ -2175,15 +2176,15 @@
 % By default, the separator between the begin line and the end line in a lines' range is an endash in a normal font (\verb+\textnormal{--}+).
 % You can change it for critical footnotes with \cs{Xlinerangeseparator}\oarg{s}\marg{text}, and with \cs{Xendlinerangeseparator}\oarg{s}\marg{text} for critical endnotes.
 %
-% \subsubsection{Abbreviate line range} 
+% \subsubsection{Abbreviate line range}
 % \changes{v1.20.0}{2015/03/22}{Add \protect\cs{Xtwolines} and \protect\cs{Xmorethantwolines} hooks}
 % \label{Xtwolines}
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xtwolines}\DescribeMacro{\Xmorethantwolines}
-% If a lemma is printed on two subsequent lines, \macpackage\ will print the first and the last line numbers. 
+% If a lemma is printed on two subsequent lines, \macpackage\ will print the first and the last line numbers.
 % Instead of this, it is also possible to print an abbreviation which stands for ``line 1 and subsequent line(s)''.
 %
-% To achieve this, use \protect\cs{Xtwolines}\oarg{s}\marg{text} and \protect\cs{Xmorethantwolines}\oarg{s}\marg{text}. 
-% The \meta{text} argument of \protect\cs{Xtwolines} will be printed if the lemma is on two lines, and the \meta{text} argument of \protect\cs{Xmorethantwolines} will be printed if the lemma is on three or more lines. 
+% To achieve this, use \protect\cs{Xtwolines}\oarg{s}\marg{text} and \protect\cs{Xmorethantwolines}\oarg{s}\marg{text}.
+% The \meta{text} argument of \protect\cs{Xtwolines} will be printed if the lemma is on two lines, and the \meta{text} argument of \protect\cs{Xmorethantwolines} will be printed if the lemma is on three or more lines.
 % For example:
 % \begin{verbatim}
 % \Xtwolines{sq.}
@@ -2197,34 +2198,34 @@
 % However, if you want to use a short form (when the lemma overlaps two lines, but not more than two), use \protect\cs{Xtwolinesbutnotmore}\oarg{series}.
 %
 %
-% When you use lineation by page, the final page number, if different from the initial page number,  
+% When you use lineation by page, the final page number, if different from the initial page number,
 % will not be printed, because the final page number is included in the \protect\cs{Xendtwolines} symbol.
-% 
+%
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xtwolinesonlyinsamepage}
-% However, you can force print the final page number with\\ 
+% However, you can force print the final page number with\\
 % \protect\cs{Xtwolinesonlyinsamepage}\oarg{series}.
-% 
 %
-% You can disable \protect\cs{Xtwolines} and related for a specific note by using the `[fulllines]` argument in the note macro cf.~\reff{fulllines}. 
+%
+% You can disable \protect\cs{Xtwolines} and related for a specific note by using the `[fulllines]` argument in the note macro cf.~\reff{fulllines}.
 %
 % \label{Xendtwolines}\changes{v1.21.0}{2015/04/13}{Add \protect\cs{Xendtwolines}, \protect\cs{Xendmorethantwolines}, \protect\cs{Xendtwolinesbutnotmore} and \protect\cs{Xendtwolinesonlyinsamepage}.}
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xendtwolines}\DescribeMacro{\Xendmorethantwolines}\DescribeMacro{\Xendtwolinesbutnotmore}
-% For endnotes, use these macros: 
+% For endnotes, use these macros:
 % \protect\cs{Xendtwolines}; \protect\cs{Xendmorethantwolines}; \linebreak \protect\cs{Xendtwolinesbutnotmore};\\
 % \protect\cs{Xendtwolinesonlyinsamepage}  instead of \protect\cs{Xtwolines}; \protect\cs{Xmorethantwolines};\\
 % \protect\cs{Xtwolinesbutnotmore}; \protect\cs{Xtwolinesonlyinsamepage}.
 %
 % \subsubsection{Disable line number}
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xnonumber}
-% You can use \protect\cs{Xnonumber}\oarg{s} if you do not want to have the line number in a footnote. 
-% \DescribeMacro{\Xendnonumber} \protect\cs{Xendnonumber}\oarg{s} is the same for endnote. 
+% You can use \protect\cs{Xnonumber}\oarg{s} if you do not want to have the line number in a footnote.
+% \DescribeMacro{\Xendnonumber} \protect\cs{Xendnonumber}\oarg{s} is the same for endnote.
 %
 % \subsubsection{Printing pstart number}
 % \changes{v1.1.0}{2012/09/25}{Add \protect\cs{Xpstart} and \protect\cs{Xonlypstart}}
 % \changes{v1.18.0}{2015/02/23}{Add \protect\cs{Xpstarteverytime}}
 % \changes{v1.18.0}{2015/02/23}{Debug \protect\cs{Xonlypstart} when using \protect\cs{Xnumberonlyfirstinline} and the current line number differs from the previous.}
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xpstart}
-% You can use \protect\cs{Xpstart}\oarg{s} if you want to print the pstart number in the footnote, before the line and subline number. 
+% You can use \protect\cs{Xpstart}\oarg{s} if you want to print the pstart number in the footnote, before the line and subline number.
 % Note that when you change the lineation system, the option is automatically switched :
 % \begin{itemize}
 %    \item If you use lineation by pstart, the option is enabled.
@@ -2233,18 +2234,18 @@
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xpstarteverytime}
 % By default, the pstart number is printed only in the part of text where you have called \protect\cs{numberpstarttrue}.
-% We don't know why you would like to print the pstart number in the notes and not in the main text. 
-% However, if you want to do it, you can call  \protect\cs{Xpstarteverytime}\oarg{s}. 
+% We don't know why you would like to print the pstart number in the notes and not in the main text.
+% However, if you want to do it, you can call  \protect\cs{Xpstarteverytime}\oarg{s}.
 % In this case, the pstart number will be printed every time in footnote.
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xonlypstart}
 % In combination with \protect\cs{Xpstart}, you can use \protect\cs{Xonlypstart}\oarg{s} if you want to print only the pstart number in the footnote, and not the line and subline number.
 %
 % \subsubsection{Printing stanza number}
-% 
+%
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xstanza}\label{Xstanza}
-% You can use \cs{Xstanza}\oarg{s} if you want to print the stanza number in the footnote, before the line and subline number. 
-% 
+% You can use \cs{Xstanza}\oarg{s} if you want to print the stanza number in the footnote, before the line and subline number.
+%
 % Of course the stanza number is printed only when you use \cs{numberstanza}
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xstanzaseparator}
@@ -2254,12 +2255,12 @@
 %
 % \subsubsection{Separator between line and subline numbers}\label{Xsublinesep}
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xsublinesep}
-% \cs{Xsublinesep}\oarg{s}\marg{txt} changes the separator between line and subline in footnotes. 
+% \cs{Xsublinesep}\oarg{s}\marg{txt} changes the separator between line and subline in footnotes.
 %
 % \textbf{Employed without optional argument, it also changes the separator in side numbering}.
-% 
+%
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xendsublinesep}
-% \cs{Xendsublinesep}\oarg{s}\marg{txt} does the same thing for endnotes. 
+% \cs{Xendsublinesep}\oarg{s}\marg{txt} does the same thing for endnotes.
 %
 % \textbf{However, it does not change anything for the separator in side numbering. Use \cs{Xsublinesep} without optional argument or \cs{Xsublinesepside}\marg{txt} to do it.}
 %
@@ -2287,10 +2288,10 @@
 % With \protect\cs{Xnonbreakableafternumber}\oarg{s} it becomes nonbreakable.
 %
 % \subsubsection{Space around line symbol}
-% \DescribeMacro{\Xbeforesymlinenum} 
+% \DescribeMacro{\Xbeforesymlinenum}
 % With \protect\cs{Xbeforesymlinenum}\oarg{s}\marg{l} you can add some space before the line symbol in a footnote. The default value is value set by \protect\cs{Xbeforenumber}.
-% 
-% \DescribeMacro{\Xaftersymlinenum} 
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\Xaftersymlinenum}
 % With \protect\cs{Xaftersymlinenum}\oarg{s}\marg{l} you can add some space after the line symbol in a footnote. The default value is value set by \protect\cs{Xafternumber}.
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xendbeforesymlinenum}
@@ -2299,12 +2300,12 @@
 %
 % \subsubsection{Space in place of number}
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xinplaceofnumber}\label{Xinplaceofnumber}
-% If no number or symbolic line number is printed, you can add a space, with \cs{Xinplaceofnumber}\oarg{s}\marg{l}. The default value is 1~em. 
+% If no number or symbolic line number is printed, you can add a space, with \cs{Xinplaceofnumber}\oarg{s}\marg{l}. The default value is 1~em.
 %
-% \DescribeMacro{\Xendinplaceofnumber} \cs{Xendinplaceofnumber}\oarg{s}\marg{l} is the same, for critical endnotes. 
+% \DescribeMacro{\Xendinplaceofnumber} \cs{Xendinplaceofnumber}\oarg{s}\marg{l} is the same, for critical endnotes.
 % \subsubsection{Boxing line number and line symbol}
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xboxlinenum}
-% It could be useful to put the line number inside a fixed box: the content of the note will be printed after this box. 
+% It could be useful to put the line number inside a fixed box: the content of the note will be printed after this box.
 % You can use \protect\cs{Xboxlinenum}\oarg{s}\marg{l} to do that.
 % To subsequently disable this feature, use \protect\cs{Xboxlinenum} with length equal to 0~pt.
 % One use of this feature is to print line number in a column, and the note in an other column:
@@ -2319,7 +2320,7 @@
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xendboxsymlinenum}
 % \protect\cs{Xendboxsymlinenum}\oarg{s}\marg{l} is the same as \protect\cs{Xboxsymlinenum} but for endnotes.
-% 
+%
 % \changes{v1.23.0}{2015/05/18}{Add \protect\cs{Xboxlinenumalign} and \protect\cs{Xendboxlinenumalign}.}
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xboxlinenumalign}
 % If you put line number in box, it will be aligned left inside the box.
@@ -2329,7 +2330,7 @@
 %  \item[R] to align right;
 %  \item[C] to center.
 % \end{description}
-% 
+%
 % \changes{v1.23.0}{2015/05/18}{Add \protect\cs{Xboxstartlinenum}, \protect\cs{Xendboxstartlinenum}, \protect\cs{Xboxendlinenum}, \protect\cs{Xendboxendlinenum}.}
 % When using \protect\cs{Xboxlinenum}, \macpackage put all the line number description in the same box. That is, the same box will contain: the start line number, the dash, and either the end line number or the range symbol (like \verb+ff.+).
 % However, it is possible to box them in two different boxes.
@@ -2337,10 +2338,10 @@
 %  \item \protect\cs{Xboxstartlinenum}\oarg{s}\marg{l} will box the start line number in a box of length \meta{l}. The content will be put at the right of the box.
 %  \item \protect\cs{Xboxendlinenum}\oarg{s}\marg{l} will box the dash plus the end line number  or the range symbol in a box  of length \meta{l}. The content will be put at the left of the box.
 % \end{itemize}
-% 
+%
 % With these two commands, it is possible to horizontaly align the dash of line number when using critical notes, to obtain something like:
 % \begin{verbatim}
-%   1 
+%   1
 %  12-23
 %  24ff.
 % \end{verbatim}
@@ -2357,10 +2358,10 @@
 % \cs{Xendbhooklinenumber}\oarg{s}\marg{code} is used to execute code before line numbers in endnotes. The code is executed before the \cs{Xendbeforelinenumber} space  and before the \cs{Xendnotenumfont} font setting.
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xendahooklinenumber}
-% \cs{Xendahooklinenumber}\oarg{s}\marg{code} is used to execute code after line number in endnotes. 
+% \cs{Xendahooklinenumber}\oarg{s}\marg{code} is used to execute code after line number in endnotes.
 % The code is executed after the \cs{Xendafternumber} space.
-% 
-% 
+%
+%
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xendbhookinplaceofnumber}
 % \cs{Xendbhookinplaceofnumber}\oarg{s}\marg{code} is used to execute code before space or symbol which replace line number in endnotes. The code is executed before the \cs{Xendbeforesymlinenum} space  and before the \cs{Xendnotenumfont} font setting.
@@ -2383,13 +2384,13 @@
 % You can suppress the lemma separator, using \protect\cs{Xnolemmaseparator}\oarg{s}, which is simply a alias of \protect\cs{Xlemmaseparator}\oarg{s}\verb|{}|.
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xinplaceoflemmaseparator}\label{Xinplaceoflemmaseparator}
-% With \protect\cs{Xinplaceoflemmaseparator}\oarg{s}\marg{l} you can add a space if no lemma separator is printed. The default value is 1~em. 
+% With \protect\cs{Xinplaceoflemmaseparator}\oarg{s}\marg{l} you can add a space if no lemma separator is printed. The default value is 1~em.
+%
 %
-% 
 % \subsubsection{For endnotes}\label{Xendlemmaseparator}
 % \changes{v1.22.0}{2015/04/25}{Add option for lemma separator inside endnotes}
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xendlemmaseparator}
-% By default, there is no separator inside endnotes between the lemma and the content of the note. You can use \protect\cs{Xendlemmaseparator}\oarg{s}\marg{Xendlemmaseparator} to change this. The optional argument can be used to specify the series in which it is used. 
+% By default, there is no separator inside endnotes between the lemma and the content of the note. You can use \protect\cs{Xendlemmaseparator}\oarg{s}\marg{Xendlemmaseparator} to change this. The optional argument can be used to specify the series in which it is used.
 % A common value of \meta{Xendlemmaseparator} is \cs{rbracket}.
 %
 % Note that there is a non-breakable space between the lemma and the separator, but a \textbf{breakable} space between the separator and the following text.
@@ -2402,21 +2403,21 @@
 %
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xendinplaceoflemmaseparator}\label{Xendinplaceoflemmaseparator}
-% With \protect\cs{Xendinplaceoflemmaseparator}\oarg{s}\marg{l} you can add some space if you choose to remove the lemma separator. The default value is 0.5~em. 
+% With \protect\cs{Xendinplaceoflemmaseparator}\oarg{s}\marg{l} you can add some space if you choose to remove the lemma separator. The default value is 0.5~em.
 %
 %
 % \subsection{Font style}
 % \subsubsection{For line number}
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xnotenumfont}
-% \protect\cs{Xnotenumfont}\oarg{s}\marg{command} is used to change the font style for line numbers in critical footnotes ;  
+% \protect\cs{Xnotenumfont}\oarg{s}\marg{command} is used to change the font style for line numbers in critical footnotes ;
 % \meta{command} must be one (or more) switching command, like \protect\cs{bfseries}.
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xendnotenumfont}
-% \protect\cs{Xendnotenumfont}\oarg{s}\marg{command} is used to change the font style for line numbers in critical footnotes. 
+% \protect\cs{Xendnotenumfont}\oarg{s}\marg{command} is used to change the font style for line numbers in critical footnotes.
 % \meta{command} must be one (or more) switching command, like \protect\cs{bfseries}.
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\notenumfontX}
-% \protect\cs{notenumfontX}\oarg{s}\marg{command} is used to change the font style for note numbers in familiar footnotes.  
+% \protect\cs{notenumfontX}\oarg{s}\marg{command} is used to change the font style for note numbers in familiar footnotes.
 % \meta{command} must be one (or more) switching command, like \protect\cs{bfseries}.
 %
 
@@ -2456,10 +2457,10 @@
 % \subsubsection{Wrapping lemmas}
 % \changes{v2.10.0}{2016/05/08}{New hooks: \protect\cs{Xwraplemma} and \protect\cs{Xendwraplemma}}
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xwraplemma}\label{Xwraplemma}
-% \cs{Xwraplemma}\oarg{s}\marg{cmd} is used to wrap, in the footnote, the lemma in a \LaTeX\ command. 
+% \cs{Xwraplemma}\oarg{s}\marg{cmd} is used to wrap, in the footnote, the lemma in a \LaTeX\ command.
 % For example, with the \package{bidi} package, to ensure having a lemma written right to left, use \cs{Xwraplemma}\arg{\cs{RL}}.
 %
-% \DescribeMacro{\Xwrapendlemma} 
+% \DescribeMacro{\Xwrapendlemma}
 % \cs{Xendwraplemma}\oarg{s}\marg{cmd} is the same for endnotes.
 %
 % \subsubsection{Wrapping contents}
@@ -2469,20 +2470,20 @@
 %
 % For example, if the language of your note is not the same as the language of the lemma, use \cs{Xwrapcontent}\arg{\cs{foreignlanguage}\marg{language}} (with \package{babel}) or \cs{Xwrapcontent}\arg{\cs{text\meta{language}}} (for babel).
 %
-% \DescribeMacro{\Xendwrapcontent} 
+% \DescribeMacro{\Xendwrapcontent}
 % \cs{Xendwrapcontent}\oarg{s}\marg{cmd} is the same for endnotes.
 %
-% \DescribeMacro{\wrapcontentX} 
+% \DescribeMacro{\wrapcontentX}
 % \cs{wrapcontentX}\oarg{s}\marg{cmd} is the same for familiar footnotes.
 % \subsection{Indent of notes content}
 % \changes{v1.21.0}{2015/04/13}{Add \protect\cs{Xparindent} and \protect\cs{hangindentX}}
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xparindent}
-% By default, \macpackage does not add indentation before the paragraphs inside critical footnotes. 
+% By default, \macpackage does not add indentation before the paragraphs inside critical footnotes.
 % Use \protect\cs{Xparindent}\oarg{s} to enable indentation.
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\parindentX}
-% By default, \macpackage does not add indentation before the paragraphs inside familiar footnotes. 
-% Use \protect\cs{parindentX}\oarg{s} to enable indentation. 
+% By default, \macpackage does not add indentation before the paragraphs inside familiar footnotes.
+% Use \protect\cs{parindentX}\oarg{s} to enable indentation.
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xhangindent}
 % For critical notes NOT paragraphed you can define an indent with \protect\cs{Xhangindent}\oarg{s}\marg{l}, which will be applied in the second line of notes. It can help to make distinction between a new note and a break in a note. The default value is 0~pt.
@@ -2502,7 +2503,7 @@
 % \begin{verbatim}
 % \Xbhooknote{\renewcommand{\thepstart}{\arabic{pstart}.}}
 % \end{verbatim}
-% 
+%
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xbhooknote}
 % \protect\cs{Xbhooknote}\oarg{s}\marg{code} is to be used at the beginning of each critical footnote.
 %
@@ -2517,7 +2518,7 @@
 % \subsection{Arbitrary code before inserting note}
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xbeforeinserting}
 % \DescribeMacro{beforeinsertingX}
-% \cs{Xbeforeinserting}\oarg{s}\marg{code} 
+% \cs{Xbeforeinserting}\oarg{s}\marg{code}
 % and \cs{beforeinsertingX}\oarg{s}\marg{code}
 % are very technical commands.
 %
@@ -2542,7 +2543,7 @@
 % \verb+<code>+ must be one of the following command:
 % \begin{description}
 %  \item[\protect\cs{justifying}] to have text justified, as usual with \LaTeX. You can also let \verb+<code>+ empty.
-%  \item[\protect\cs{raggedright}] to have text left aligned, but \emph{without hyphenation}. That is the default \macpackage\ setting. 
+%  \item[\protect\cs{raggedright}] to have text left aligned, but \emph{without hyphenation}. That is the default \macpackage\ setting.
 %  \item[\protect\cs{RaggedRight}] to have text left aligned \emph{with hyphenation} (requires \package{ragged2e}).
 %  \item[\protect\cs{raggedleft}] to have text right aligned, but \emph{without hyphenation}.
 %  \item[\protect\cs{RaggedLeft}] to have text right aligned \emph{with hyphenation} (requires \package{ragged2e}).
@@ -2572,7 +2573,7 @@
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xparafootsep}\DescribeMacro{\parafootsepX}
 % For paragraphed footnotes (see below), you can choose the separator between each note by using \protect\cs{Xparafootsep}\oarg{s}\marg{text} for critical notes and \protect\cs{parafootsepX} for familiar notes.
-% A common separator is the double pipe ($\parallel$), which you can set by using \protect\cs{Xparafootsep}\verb+{$\parallel$}+. 
+% A common separator is the double pipe ($\parallel$), which you can set by using \protect\cs{Xparafootsep}\verb+{$\parallel$}+.
 %
 % Note that if the symbol defined by \protect\cs{Xsymlinenum} must be used at the beginning of a note, the \protect\cs{Xparafootsep} / \protect\cs{parafootsepX} is not used before this note.
 %
@@ -2581,7 +2582,7 @@
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xragged}
 % Text in paragraphed critical notes is justified, but you can use \protect\cs{Xragged}\oarg{s}\arg{L} if you want it to be ragged left (i.e., right justified),
 % or \protect\cs{Xragged}\oarg{s}\arg{R} if you want it to be ragged right (i.e., left justified).
-% 
+%
 % \DescribeMacro{\raggedX}
 % Text in paragraphed footnotes is justified, but you can use \protect\cs{raggedX}\oarg{s}\arg{L} if you want it to be ragged left, or \protect\cs{raggedX}\oarg{s}\arg{R} if you want it to be ragged right.
 %
@@ -2596,10 +2597,10 @@
 %
 % Note that the \cs{Xafternote} and \cs{Xparafootsep} settings are used to determine space and content between footnotes (\reff{optionparagraphed}).
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xgroupbylineseparetwolines}
-% Suppose you have two notes on line~1 which overlap lines~1 and~2. 
+% Suppose you have two notes on line~1 which overlap lines~1 and~2.
 % This last note will be printed, if you use \cs{Xgroupbyline} in the same group as the previous one.
 % In the case you want that note to be distinct, you must use both \cs{Xgroupbyline} and \cs{Xgroupbylineseparetwolines}\oarg{s}.
-% 
+%
 % In many cases, you might like to use it in combination with \cs{Xnumberonlyfirstintwolines} (\reff{Xnumberonlyfirstintwolines})
 %
 % \subsubsection{Text before notes}
@@ -2615,13 +2616,13 @@
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xtxtbeforenotesonlyonce}
 % \DescribeMacro{\txtbeforenotesonlyonceX} By default, such texts are inserted at the beginning of the groups of notes on each page.
-% You can add \cs{Xtxtbeforenotesonlyonce} (for critical footnotes) and \cs{txtbeforenotesonlyonceX} (for familiar footnotes) to insert them only the first time notes are typeset. 
+% You can add \cs{Xtxtbeforenotesonlyonce} (for critical footnotes) and \cs{txtbeforenotesonlyonceX} (for familiar footnotes) to insert them only the first time notes are typeset.
 % \subsubsection{Code before notes}
 %\DescribeMacro{\Xbhookgroup}
 %\DescribeMacro{\bhookgroupX}
-% While \cs{Xtxtbeforenotes} is for typesetting text before notes, \cs{Xbhookgroup}\oarg{s}\marg{code} and \cs{bhookgroupX}\oarg{s}\marg{code} (for critical and familiar respectively) are for executing code before a group of notes, between the rules and the printing of the notes. 
-% 
-% 
+% While \cs{Xtxtbeforenotes} is for typesetting text before notes, \cs{Xbhookgroup}\oarg{s}\marg{code} and \cs{bhookgroupX}\oarg{s}\marg{code} (for critical and familiar respectively) are for executing code before a group of notes, between the rules and the printing of the notes.
+%
+%
 % \subsubsection{Spacing}
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xbeforenotes}
 % You can change the vertical space before the rule of the critical notes with \protect\cs{Xbeforenotes}\oarg{s}\marg{l}.
@@ -2645,7 +2646,7 @@
 % You can set the space before the first printed (in a page) series of familiar notes to be different from the space before other series.
 % The default value is \verb+0pt+.
 % You can do this with \protect\cs{prenotesX}\marg{l}. You can disable this feature by setting the length to 0pt.
-% 
+%
 % \subsubsection{Rule}
 % \changes{v1.12.0}{2014/08/05}{New hooks: \protect\cs{Xafterrule} and \protect\cs{afterruleX}}
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xafterrule}
@@ -2664,8 +2665,8 @@
 %
 % \subsubsection{Maximum height}\label{Xmaxhnotes}
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xmaxhnotes}
-% By default, one series of critical notes can take up to 80\% of \cs{vsize}, before being broken to the next page. 
-% If you want to change the size use \protect\cs{Xmaxhnotes}\oarg{s}\marg{l}. 
+% By default, one series of critical notes can take up to 80\% of \cs{vsize}, before being broken to the next page.
+% If you want to change the size use \protect\cs{Xmaxhnotes}\oarg{s}\marg{l}.
 % Be careful : the length can't be flexible, and is relative to the the current font.
 % For example, if you want the note to take, at most, 33\% of the text height, do \verb|\Xmaxhnotes{.33\textheight}|.
 %
@@ -2681,9 +2682,9 @@
 % }
 % \end{verbatim}
 %
-% Be careful with the two previous commands. 
-% Actually, for technical purposes, one paragraphed note is considered as one block. 
-% Consequently, it cannot be broken between two pages, even if you used these commands. 
+% Be careful with the two previous commands.
+% Actually, for technical purposes, one paragraphed note is considered as one block.
+% Consequently, it cannot be broken between two pages, even if you used these commands.
 % The debug is in the todolist.
 % \subsubsection{Width}
 % \changes{v2.7.0}{2015/11/29}{New hooks: \protect\cs{Xhsize} and \protect\cs{hsizeX}}
@@ -2703,18 +2704,18 @@
 % Note that changes the with of the block of notes.
 % If you want to change the width of each column when typesetting notes in columns, use \cs{Xhsizetwocol}, \cs{Xhsizethreecol}, \cs{hsizetwocolX}, \cs{hsizethreecolX}, see \reff{hsizecols}.
 %
-% \subsection{Footnotes and the \parpackage columns} 
+% \subsection{Footnotes and the \parpackage columns}
 % \changes{v1.13.0}{2014/09/16}{Add \protect\cs{Xnoteswidthliketwocolumns} and \protect\cs{noteswidthliketwocolumnsX}}
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xnoteswidthliketwocolumns}\DescribeMacro{\noteswidthliketwocolumnsX}
 % If you use \parpackage\ \protect\cs{columns} macro, you can call :
 % \begin{itemize}
-%   \item \protect\cs{Xnoteswidthliketwocolumns}\oarg{s} to create critical notes with a two-column size width. 
-%   \item \protect\cs{noteswidthliketwocolumnsX}\oarg{s} to create familiar notes with a two-column size width. 
+%   \item \protect\cs{Xnoteswidthliketwocolumns}\oarg{s} to create critical notes with a two-column size width.
+%   \item \protect\cs{noteswidthliketwocolumnsX}\oarg{s} to create familiar notes with a two-column size width.
 % \end{itemize}
 % \subsection{Line number annotation}
-% The way line number annotations are typeset can be changed using hooks as described in \reff{annotationposition} and 
+% The way line number annotations are typeset can be changed using hooks as described in \reff{annotationposition} and
 % \reff{wraplinenumannotation}.
-% 
+%
 % \subsection{Endnotes in one paragraph}
 % \changes{v1.12.0}{2015/04/25}{Add \protect\cs{Xendparagraph} and related settings.}
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xendparagraph}
@@ -2794,7 +2795,7 @@
 %
 % If you need to add brackets directly after \verb?\stanza?, \verb+&+ or \verb?\&?, add \cs{norelax}. Otherwise, the brackets will be interpreted as delimitation of an optional argument (cf.~\reff{contentverse})
 %
-% 
+%
 % \subsection{Define stanza indents}
 % \DescribeMacro{\stanzaindentbase}
 % Lines within a stanza may be indented. The indents are integer multiples
@@ -2814,19 +2815,19 @@
 % commas without embedded spaces. The first entry
 % gives the hanging indentation to be used if the stanza line requires more
 % than one print line.
-%  
+%
 %  If it is known that each stanza line will fit in one print line,
 % then this first entry should be 0; \TeX\ does less
 % work in this case, but no harm ensues if the hanging indentation is not
-% 0 but is never used. 
-% 
-% If you want the hanging verse to be flush right, 
+% 0 but is never used.
+%
+% If you want the hanging verse to be flush right,
 % you can use \protect\cs{sethanginsymbol}: see p.~\reff{hfillhanging}.
 %
 % Enumeration is by stanza lines, not by print lines.
 % In the above example the lines are indented one unit, two units, one unit,
 % two units, with 3 units of hanging indentation in case a stanza line is too
-% long to fit on one print line. 
+% long to fit on one print line.
 %
 % \subsection{Repeating stanza indents}
 %\changes{v0.13.0}{2011/11/08}{New stanzaindentsrepetition counter to repeat stanza indents every \emph{n} verses.}
@@ -2846,7 +2847,7 @@
 %If you don't use the  \verb+stanzaindentsrepetition+ counter, make sure you have at least one more numerical
 % entry in \verb+\setstanzavalues+ than the number of lines in the stanza.
 %
-% If you want to disable this feature again, just put the counter to 0: 
+% If you want to disable this feature again, just put the counter to 0:
 % \begin{verbatim}
 % \setcounter{stanzaindentsrepetition}{0}
 % \end{verbatim}
@@ -2871,13 +2872,13 @@
 % desirable that page breaks should arise between certain lines in the
 % stanza, so a facility for including penalties after stanza lines is
 % provided. If you are satisfied with the page breaks, you need not set the
-% penalty values. 
+% penalty values.
 %
 % The command \\
 % \verb+\setstanzapenalties{1,5000,10100,5000,0}+ \\
 %  results in a penalty of
 % 5000  being placed after the first and third lines of the stanza, and a
-% penalty of ${-100}$ after the second. 
+% penalty of ${-100}$ after the second.
 %
 % The first entry ``1'' is a control
 % value. If it is zero, then no penalties are passed on to \TeX,
@@ -2904,7 +2905,7 @@
 % \sethangingsymbol{\protect\hfill}
 % \end{verbatim}
 % \subsection{Long verse and page break}
-% If you want to prevent page breaks inside long verses, use the option \verb+nopbinverse+ when loading package, or use \protect\cs{lednopbinversetrue}. 
+% If you want to prevent page breaks inside long verses, use the option \verb+nopbinverse+ when loading package, or use \protect\cs{lednopbinversetrue}.
 % Read \reff{lednopbinversetrue} for further details.
 % \subsection{Content before/after verses}\label{contentverse}
 % It is possible to add content, like a subtitle or a spacing, before or after verse:
@@ -2919,32 +2920,32 @@
 % \item \DescribeMacro{\AtEveryStanza} Use \cs{AtEveryStanza}\marg{arg} to automatically add content before the stanza (not in the same paragraph).
 %
 % Note that a \cs{noindent} will be inserted before the argument, and, consequently, a \cs{parskip}. You can use the starred version of \protect\cs{AtEveryStanza} to avoid this \cs{noindent}.
-%  \item \DescribeMacro{\AtStartEveryStanza} Use \cs{AtStartEveryStanza}  to automatically add content at the beginning of stanza (in the same paragraph). 
+%  \item \DescribeMacro{\AtStartEveryStanza} Use \cs{AtStartEveryStanza}  to automatically add content at the beginning of stanza (in the same paragraph).
 %   \item \verb+&+ can be replaced by \protect\cs{newverse} with two optional arguments (in brackets). The first will be printed after the current verse, the second before the next verse.
-% 
+%
 % A \cs{noindent} is automatically inserted before the contents of these optional arguments.
-% 
+%
 % Use a third and fourth optional argument to not add these \cs{noindent}s (to add content respectively after the current verse / before the next verse).
-% \item  Use \cs{AtEveryPend}\marg{arg} to automatically add content after verses (including the final one) and \cs{AtEveryPstart}\marg{arg} to automatically add content before verses (including the first one). 
+% \item  Use \cs{AtEveryPend}\marg{arg} to automatically add content after verses (including the final one) and \cs{AtEveryPstart}\marg{arg} to automatically add content before verses (including the first one).
 %   \item \verb+\&+ can take an optional argument (in brackets). Its content will be printed after the stanza.
-% 
+%
 % \item \DescribeMacro{\AtEveryStopStanza} Use \cs{AtEveryStopStanza} to automatically add content after the end of stanzas (not in the same paragraph).
 %
 % Note that a \cs{noindent} will be inserted before the argument, and, consequently, a \cs{parskip}. You can use the starred version of \protect\cs{AtEveryStopStanza}  to avoid this \cs{noindent}.
 % \end{itemize}
 %
-% 
+%
 % \subsection{Numbering stanza}\label{numbering-stanza}
 % \DescribeMacro{\numberstanzatrue}
 % \DescribeMacro{\numberstanzafalse}
 % If you want to automatically number stanzas, use \cs{numberstanzatrue}.
 % In this case, the line number will restart at each \cs{stanza}.
-% 
+%
 %
 % If you want to disable this feature again, use \cs{numberstanzafalse}.
 %
 % You can use this feature in combination with \cs{Xstanza} (\reff{Xstanza}).
-% 
+%
 % \DescribeMacro{thestanza}
 % You can redefine \cs{thestanza} to change the aspect of stanza number.
 % Default value is:
@@ -2952,9 +2953,9 @@
 % \renewcommand{\thestanza}{%
 %   \textbf{\arabic{stanza}}%
 % }
-% 
+%
 % \end{verbatim}
-% 
+%
 % You can change the value of the \verb+stanza+ counter with the usual commands of \LaTeX.
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\stanzanumwrapper}
@@ -2979,13 +2980,13 @@
 % \begin{verbatim}
 % \linenumannotation{<annotation>}
 % \end{verbatim}
-% 
+%
 % The annotation can contain any textual value (whether number, text, or other) such as the line number from the older edition.
 % Here are some characteristics of line number annotation:
 % \begin{itemize}
 %  \item An annotation is associated with a line of verse. It is reset with each new line of verse.
 %  \item It is printed alongside the line number in the margin.
-%  \item It is printed following the line number in critical footnotes and endnotes. 
+%  \item It is printed following the line number in critical footnotes and endnotes.
 %  \item And of particular interest: the annotation is printed in the critical note \emph{only} when the \cs{edtext} is issued after the \cs{linenumannotation}.
 %  \item If two or more annotations are called before an \cs{edtext}, the last one is used in associated notes.
 %  \item If an annotation is called within an \cs{edtext}, it is printed as an annotation for the end of the lemma.
@@ -2998,14 +2999,14 @@
 % \edtext{third%
 %   \linenumannotation{B}
 %  lemma}{…}
-% \edtext{fourth lemma}& 
+% \edtext{fourth lemma}&
 % \end{verbatim}
 % In the critical notes, the line number will be followed
 % \begin{itemize}
 %   \item by nothing in the first lemma, as  there is no annotation for this line;
 %   \item by \enquote{A} for the second lemma;
 %   \item by \enquote{A-B} for the third lemma, as it starts while annotation A is still in effect and it finishes after annotation B has already taken effect;
-%   \item by \enquote{B} for the fourth lemma. 
+%   \item by \enquote{B} for the fourth lemma.
 % \end{itemize}
 % \subsubsection{Modifying annotation associated with a specific note}
 %
@@ -3017,20 +3018,20 @@
 % \lineannot{|b}% to change the ending annotation
 % \lineannot{a|}% to change the beginning annotation
 % \lineannot{a|b}% to change both
-% \lineannot{\empty|}% to delete the beginning annotation 
+% \lineannot{\empty|}% to delete the beginning annotation
 % \end{verbatim}
 % \subsubsection{Changing the position of the annotation}\label{annotationposition}
 % By default, annotations are placed after line numbers in both margin and footnote.
-% 
+%
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xlinenumannotationposition}
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xendlinenumannotationposition}
 % To change this behaviour, one can use one of the following commands:
 % \begin{itemize}
 %  \item \cs{Xlinenumannotationposition}\oarg{s}\marg{v} changes the position in critical footnotes with \meta{s} for the series of footnotes to which it applies, where \meta{s} may be a comma-separated list of series. When \meta{s} is empty, the change applies also to annotations at the sides of the page, alongside the line number.
-%  \item \cs{Xlinenumannotationpositionside}\marg{v} changes the position at the sides of the page, alongside the line numbers. 
+%  \item \cs{Xlinenumannotationpositionside}\marg{v} changes the position at the sides of the page, alongside the line numbers.
 %
 % Note that \cs{Xlinenumannotationposition} without any optional argument will override this setting.
-%  \item \cs{Xendlinenumannotationposition}\oarg{s}\marg{v} changes the position in critical endnotes, 
+%  \item \cs{Xendlinenumannotationposition}\oarg{s}\marg{v} changes the position in critical endnotes,
 % \meta{s} for the series of endnotes to which it applies, where \meta{s} may once again be a comma-separated list of series.
 % \end{itemize}
 % In each of these three commands, \meta{v} can be \option{after} or \option{before} to indicate position with regards to the line number.
@@ -3049,7 +3050,7 @@
 %   \item \cs{Xendwraplinenumannotation}\oarg{s}\marg{cmd} for critical endnotes, where \meta{s} indicates the series of notes to which it applies, which may be a comma-separated list.
 % \end{itemize}
 % \meta{cmd} is a command which can take one argument; the backslash is required though.
-% 
+%
 % For example, if you do not wish to have annotations in the margins, but do want to have them in bold in the critical footnotes and endnotes, you say:\footnote{The \cs{@gobble} command takes one argument, and returns nothing.}
 % \begin{verbatim}
 % \makeatletter
@@ -3060,12 +3061,12 @@
 % \end{verbatim}
 % \subsection{Various tools}
 % \DescribeMacro{\ampersand}
-% If you need to print an \& symbol in a stanza, use the \verb?\ampersand? 
+% If you need to print an \& symbol in a stanza, use the \verb?\ampersand?
 % macro, not \verb?\&? as this will end the stanza.
-% 
+%
 % \DescribeMacro{\flagstanza}
 % Putting \protect\cs{flagstanza}\oarg{len}\marg{text} at the start of a  line
-% in a stanza (or elsewhere) will typeset \meta{text} at a 
+% in a stanza (or elsewhere) will typeset \meta{text} at a
 % distance \meta{len} before
 % the line. The default \meta{len} is \verb?\stanzaindentbase?.
 %
@@ -3078,9 +3079,9 @@
 %
 % \DescribeEnv{minipage}
 % You can put numbered text with critical footnotes in a minipage and
-% the footnotes are set at the end of the minipage. 
-% 
-% You can also put familiar footnotes (see section~\ref{sec:desc:familiar})  
+% the footnotes are set at the end of the minipage.
+%
+% You can also put familiar footnotes (see section~\ref{sec:desc:familiar})
 % in a minipage but unlike with \verb?\footnote? the numbering scheme is
 % unaltered.
 %
@@ -3107,11 +3108,11 @@
 %        normal textwidth.
 % \end{itemize}
 % Note that normal text, footnotes, and so forth are all flush left.
-% 
-% \verb?\begin{ledgroupsized}{\textwidth}? is effectively the same as 
+%
+% \verb?\begin{ledgroupsized}{\textwidth}? is effectively the same as
 % \verb?\begin{ledgroup}?
-% 
-% 
+%
+%
 %
 %
 %
@@ -3120,17 +3121,17 @@
 % \label{crossref}\relax
 % The package provides a simple cross-referencing facility that allows
 % you to mark places in the text with labels, and generate page and
-% line number references to those places elsewhere 
+% line number references to those places elsewhere
 % using those labels.
 %
 % \subsection{Basic use}
-% 
+%
 % \DescribeMacro{\edlabel}
 % First you place a label in the text using the command
 % \protect\cs{edlabel}\marg{lab}. \meta{lab} can be almost anything you like, including
 % letters, numbers, punctuation, or a combination---anything but spaces;
 % you might type \protect\cs{edlabel}\verb+{toves-3}+, for example.\footnote{More precisely,
-% you should stick to characters in the \TeX\ categories of ``letter'' 
+% you should stick to characters in the \TeX\ categories of ``letter''
 % and ``other''.}
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\edpageref}
@@ -3140,14 +3141,14 @@
 % \DescribeMacro{\annotationref}
 % Elsewhere in the text, either before or after the \protect\cs{edlabel},
 % you can refer to its location with \protect\cs{edpageref}\marg{lab},
-% \protect\cs{edlineref}\marg{lab}, \cs{edsublineref}\marg{lab}, \cs{pstartref}\marg{lab} or \cs{annotationref}\marg{lab}, 
+% \protect\cs{edlineref}\marg{lab}, \cs{edsublineref}\marg{lab}, \cs{pstartref}\marg{lab} or \cs{annotationref}\marg{lab},
 % that
 % will produce, respectively, the page, line, sub-line,  pstart, the annotation,  on which
 % the \protect\cs{edlabel}\marg{lab} command occurred.
 %
-% Note that the \cs{edlineref} command insert the side flag after the line number. 
+% Note that the \cs{edlineref} command insert the side flag after the line number.
+%
 %
-% 
 % An \protect\cs{edlabel} command may appear in the main text, or in the
 % first argument of \protect\cs{edtext}, but not in the apparatus itself.  But
 % \protect\cs{edpageref}, \protect\cs{edlineref}, \protect\cs{sublineref}, \protect\cs{pstartref} commands can also be used in
@@ -3184,9 +3185,9 @@
 % warning messages about undefined labels or the like: if you want to
 % use the reference in a context where \LaTeX{} is looking for a
 % number, such a warning will lead to a complaint that the number
-% is missing. 
+% is missing.
 % This is the case for references used within the
-% argument to \protect\cs{linenum}, for example (see \reff{linenum}). 
+% argument to \protect\cs{linenum}, for example (see \reff{linenum}).
 %
 %For this situation,
 % \macpackage\ supplies variants of the reference commands, with the \verb"x"
@@ -3211,7 +3212,7 @@
 % The \protect\cs{xxref}\marg{lab1}\marg{lab2} command generates a reference to a sequence of
 % lines, for use in the second argument of \protect\cs{edtext}.
 % It takes two arguments, both of which are
-% labels: e.g., \verb"\xxref{mouse}{elephant}". 
+% labels: e.g., \verb"\xxref{mouse}{elephant}".
 %
 % It automatically calls \protect\cs{linenum}
 % (\reff{linenum}) and \cs{lineannot} (\reff{lineannot})  and sets the beginning page,
@@ -3238,10 +3239,10 @@
 % Sometimes the \protect\cs{edlabel} command cannot be used to specify exactly
 % the page and line desired---for example, if you want to refer to a
 % page and line number in another volume of your edition.  In such
-% cases, you can use the \protect\cs{edmakelabel}\marg{lab}\marg{numbers} 
-% macro so that you can `roll your own' label. 
+% cases, you can use the \protect\cs{edmakelabel}\marg{lab}\marg{numbers}
+% macro so that you can `roll your own' label.
 %
-% For example, if you type `\verb"\edmakelabel{elephant}{10|25|0}"' 
+% For example, if you type `\verb"\edmakelabel{elephant}{10|25|0}"'
 % you will create a new label, and a later call to \verb"\edpageref{elephant}" would print
 % `10' and \verb"\lineref{elephant}" would print `25'. The sub-line
 % number here is zero.  It is usually best to collect your
@@ -3253,7 +3254,7 @@
 % \DescribeMacro{\pageref}
 % \changes{v0.2.1}{2003/08/25}{Added text about normal labeling}
 %    The normal \protect\cs{label}, \protect\cs{ref} and \protect\cs{pageref} macros may be used
-% within numbered text, and operate in the familiar fashion. 
+% within numbered text, and operate in the familiar fashion.
 % \subsection{References to start and end lines}
 % \subsubsection{Reference to main text lines}
 % \changes{v2.5.0}{2015/11/13}{New tools to easily make cross-reference to a passage defined by a start and an end line}
@@ -3265,22 +3266,22 @@
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\edlabelE}
 % Use \cs{edlabelE}\marg{label} to mark the end the end line of the passage.
-% These two commands just create to label which are named \meta{label}\verb+:start+ and \meta{label}\verb+:end+. 
+% These two commands just create to label which are named \meta{label}\verb+:start+ and \meta{label}\verb+:end+.
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\edlabelSE}
 % Use \cs{edlabelSE}\marg{label} to mark just one location in the text. Contrary to a classical \cs{edlabel}, the \meta{label} could be use with \cs{SEref} and \cs{SErefwithpage}.
 %
-% 
+%
 % The main utility is to use them with three other commands.
 % \DescribeMacro{\SEref}
 % \cs{SEref}\marg{label} will make a cross-reference printed as a reference in critical footnotes.
-% 
+%
 % \DescribeMacro{\SErefwithpage}
 % \cs{SErefwithpage} will make a cross-reference printed as a reference in critical endnotes.
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\SErefonlypage}
 % \cs{SErefonlypage} will make a cross-reference printed only with page number.
-% 
+%
 % \subsubsection{References to lines that are commented on in the apparatus}\label{appref}
 % \changes{v1.21.0}{2015/03/09}{Add \protect\cs{applabel} and related}
 % You may want to make a cross-reference to a passage that is referred to by \protect\cs{edtext}.
@@ -3290,15 +3291,15 @@
 % If you use \protect\cs{applabel}\marg{label} inside the second argument of a \protect\cs{edtext},
 % \Macpackage\ will add a \protect\cs{edlabel} at the beginning and end of the marked passage.
 % The label at the beginning of the passage will have the title \meta{label}\verb+:start+, while the label at the end will have the title \meta{label}\verb+:end+.
-% 
+%
 % If you use \protect\cs{linenum} (\reff{linenum}) to
 % refer to these labels, \macpackage\ will use your line settings to refer
 % to the passage.
 %
-% \DescribeMacro{\appref}\DescribeMacro{\apprefwithpage}  
+% \DescribeMacro{\appref}\DescribeMacro{\apprefwithpage}
 % You can also use \protect\cs{appref}\marg{label} and
 % \protect\cs{apprefwithpage}\marg{label} to refer to these lines.
-% The first one will print the lines as they are printed in the critical footnotes, 
+% The first one will print the lines as they are printed in the critical footnotes,
 % while the second will print the lines as they are printed in endnotes.
 %
 % \subsubsection{Settings}
@@ -3308,7 +3309,7 @@
 % before the line numbers of a \protect\cs{appref}-reference.
 % If you use \protect\cs{apprefprefixmore}\marg{prefix}, \meta{prefix} will be printed
 % before the line numbers, if you refer to more than one line.
-% 
+%
 % For example, you may use:
 % \begin{verbatim}
 %  \setapprefprefixsingle{line~}
@@ -3318,7 +3319,7 @@
 % Note that if you do not use \protect\cs{setapprefprefixmore}, the argument of \protect\cs{setapprefprefixsingle} will be used in any case.
 %
 %
-% \DescribeMacro{\setSErefprefixsingle}\DescribeMacro{\setSErefprefixmore} 
+% \DescribeMacro{\setSErefprefixsingle}\DescribeMacro{\setSErefprefixmore}
 % \cs{setSErefprefixsingle} and \cs{setSErefprefixmore} are similar for \cs{SEref} command.
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\setSErefonlypageprefixsingle}
@@ -3337,7 +3338,7 @@
 % So if you use \cs{Xendbeforepagenumber} without any optional argument, it will override this setting.}
 % \paragraph{Linked to setting of critical footnotes and endnotes}\label{crossrefsetting:linked}
 % Some commands which set the appearance of line numbers in critical footnotes also set the appearance of line numbers in \cs{appref} and \cs{SEref} if called \emph{without the optional series argument}.
-% 
+%
 % These commands are the following:
 % \begin{itemize}
 %   \item \cs{Xlineflag} (for \parpackage), enabled by default.
@@ -3363,7 +3364,7 @@
 %   \item\cs{Xendlineprefixsingle}
 %   \item\cs{Xendlinerangeseparator}
 %   \item\cs{Xendmorethantwolines}
-%   \item\cs{Xendsublinesep} 
+%   \item\cs{Xendsublinesep}
 %   \item\cs{Xendtwolines}
 %   \item\cs{Xendtwolinesbutnotmore}
 %   \item\cs{Xendtwolinesonlyinsamepage}
@@ -3372,9 +3373,9 @@
 % \end{itemize}
 % \paragraph{For one specific command}
 %
-% When calling \cs{appref} and \cs{SEref}, you can use as a first optional argument, in brackets (\verb+[]+), any optional argument which can be used for critical footnotes (\reff{Xfootnoteopt}).  
+% When calling \cs{appref} and \cs{SEref}, you can use as a first optional argument, in brackets (\verb+[]+), any optional argument which can be used for critical footnotes (\reff{Xfootnoteopt}).
 %
-% When calling \cs{apprefwithpage}, \cs{SErefwithpage} or \cs{SErefonlypage} you can use as a first optional argument, in brackets (\verb+[]+), any optional argument which can be used for critical endnotes (\reff{Xendnoteopt}). 
+% When calling \cs{apprefwithpage}, \cs{SErefwithpage} or \cs{SErefonlypage} you can use as a first optional argument, in brackets (\verb+[]+), any optional argument which can be used for critical endnotes (\reff{Xendnoteopt}).
 % \subsection{Compatibility with \protect\package{xr} package}
 % The \cs{externaldocument} command of the \cs{xr} package allows making cross-references from an external document, with the standard \LaTeX\ commands \cs{label} and \cs{ref} (and related).
 %
@@ -3382,12 +3383,12 @@
 % \begin{enumerate}
 % \item Load the \package{xr} package.
 % \item Load the \package{reledmac} package.
-% \item Use the \cs{externaldocument} document command. 
+% \item Use the \cs{externaldocument} document command.
 % \end{enumerate}
 % \section{Sidenotes}
 %
 % \subsection{Basics}
-% The \protect\cs{marginpar} command does not work in numbered text. Instead, 
+% The \protect\cs{marginpar} command does not work in numbered text. Instead,
 % the package provides for non-floating sidenotes in either margin.
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\ledinnernote}
@@ -3418,7 +3419,7 @@
 %    If two note commands for the same side are called in the same line, they will
 % be appended and separated by a comma.
 %
-% \textbf{The notes will appear only after the second \LaTeX\ run. If the note positions change in your \texttt{.tex} file, 
+% \textbf{The notes will appear only after the second \LaTeX\ run. If the note positions change in your \texttt{.tex} file,
 % you need two runs to get the correction position in the output file.
 % You are strongly encouraged to use tools like \emph{latexmk}, to be sure to get the correct number of runs.}
 % \subsection{Setting}
@@ -3426,16 +3427,16 @@
 % \subsubsection{Width}
 % \DescribeMacro{\ledlsnotewidth}
 % \DescribeMacro{\ledrsnotewidth}
-% The left sidenote text is put into a box of width \protect\cs{ledlsnotewidth} 
+% The left sidenote text is put into a box of width \protect\cs{ledlsnotewidth}
 % and the right text into a box of width \protect\cs{ledrsnotewidth}. These
 % are initially set to the value of \protect\cs{marginparwidth}.
 %
 % \subsubsection{Vertical position}
 % \DescribeMacro{\rightnoteupfalse}
 % \DescribeMacro{\leftnoteupfalse}
-% By default, sidenotes are placed to align with the last line of the note to which it refers. 
+% By default, sidenotes are placed to align with the last line of the note to which it refers.
 % If you want they to be placed to align with the first line of the note to which it refers, use \protect\cs{leftnoteupfalse} (for left note) and/or \protect\cs{rightnoteupfalse} (for right note).
-% 
+%
 % \subsubsection{Distance to the main text }
 % \DescribeMacro{\ledlsnotesep}
 % \DescribeMacro{\ledrsnotesep}
@@ -3458,9 +3459,9 @@
 % \DescribeMacro{\setsidenotesep}
 % If you have two or more sidenotes for the same line, they are separated by a comma.
 % But if you want to change this separator, you can use \protect\cs{setsidenotesep}\marg{sep}.
-% 
+%
 % \section{Indexing}
-% 
+%
 % \subsection{Basics}
 % \DescribeMacro{\edindex}
 % \LaTeX\ provides the |\index|\marg{item} command for specifying that \meta{item}
@@ -3497,9 +3498,9 @@
 %    unafraid}{\Afootnote{Of the mouse, that is.}}
 % \end{verbatim}
 %
-% If you add \protect\cs{edindex} inside some \protect\cs{Xfootnote} command, 
+% If you add \protect\cs{edindex} inside some \protect\cs{Xfootnote} command,
 % it will refer to that note, and a suffix \emph{n} will be appended to the reference.
-% You can redefine this suffix by redefining the command \protect\cs{ledinnotemark}. 
+% You can redefine this suffix by redefining the command \protect\cs{ledinnotemark}.
 % Its actual definition is:
 % \begin{verbatim}
 % \newcommand{\ledinnotemark}[1]{#1\emph{n}}
@@ -3511,30 +3512,30 @@
 % where the default definition is |\newcommand{\pagelinesep}{-}| so that
 % an item on page 3, line 5 will be noted as being at |3-5|. You can
 % renew |\pagelinesep| to get a different separator.
-% 
+%
 % |-| is the default
-% separator used by the \textsc{MakeIndex} program. 
-% 
+% separator used by the \textsc{MakeIndex} program.
+%
 % You can reconfigure it, this example defines a colon as separator:
 % \begin{verbatim}
 % \renewcommand{\pagelinesep}{:}
 % \end{verbatim}
-% 
+%
 % However, you also have to configure your \verb+.ist+ index style file. For example, if you use \verb+:+ as separator\footnote{For further detail, you can read \url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/32783/7712}.}.
 % \begin{verbatim}
 % page_compositor ":"
 % \end{verbatim}
 %
-% Read the \textsc{MakeIndex} program's handbook about the \verb+.ist+ file. 
+% Read the \textsc{MakeIndex} program's handbook about the \verb+.ist+ file.
 % \subsection{Using xindy}\label{xindy}
-% Should you decide to use \verb+xindy+ instead of \verb+makeindex+ 
+% Should you decide to use \verb+xindy+ instead of \verb+makeindex+
 % to transform your \verb+.idx+ files into \verb+.ind+ files,
 % you must use some specific configuration file (\verb+.xdy+) so that
 % \verb+xindy+ can understand \protect\package{eledmac} reference syntax of which the scheme is:\\
 % \verb+pagenumber-linenumber+
 %
 % An example of such a file is provided in the ``\href{examples/.}{examples}'' folder.
-% Read the xindy handbook to learn how to use it.\footnote{Or, for people 
+% Read the xindy handbook to learn how to use it.\footnote{Or, for people
 % who read French, read \url{http://geekographie.maieul.net/174}.}
 %
 % This file also provides, with an explanation, the settings that are needed to put
@@ -3551,7 +3552,7 @@
 % you must do three more things:
 % \begin{enumerate}
 %   \item Use \verb|xindy+hyperref| option when loading the \macpackage\  package.
-% When you run (Xe/Lua)\LaTeX with this option, a \verb+.xdy+ configuration file will be generated with all the settings needed to allow internal hyperlinking in each index entry which is created by \protect\cs{edindex}. 
+% When you run (Xe/Lua)\LaTeX with this option, a \verb+.xdy+ configuration file will be generated with all the settings needed to allow internal hyperlinking in each index entry which is created by \protect\cs{edindex}.
 %   \item Use \verb+hyperindex=false+ option when loading hyperref.
 %   \item Uncomment\,---\,by removing the semicolons at the beginning of the relevant lines\,---\,some lines in the <code>.xdy</code> file provided in the ``\href{examples/.}{examples}'' folder in order to restore internal links in the index to be used by the standard \verb+index+ command.\footnote{These are the recommended lines to provide the best possible compatibility between hyperref and xindy, even without using \macpackage.}.
 % \end{enumerate}
@@ -3586,8 +3587,8 @@
 % \section{Tabular material}
 %
 % \LaTeX's normal |tabular| and |array| environments cannot be used where
-% line numbering is being done; more precisely, they can be used but with 
-% odd results, so don't use them. However, \macpackage\  provides some simple 
+% line numbering is being done; more precisely, they can be used but with
+% odd results, so don't use them. However, \macpackage\  provides some simple
 % tabulation environments that can be line numbered. The environments
 % can also be used in normal unnumbered text.
 %
@@ -3623,44 +3624,44 @@
 %
 %   Entries in the environments are the same as for the normal
 % |array| and |tabular| environments but there must be no ending
-% \verb?\\? at the end of the last row. 
+% \verb?\\? at the end of the last row.
 % \emph{There must be the same number of column designators (the \&)
 % in each row.} There is no equivalent
 % to any line drawing commands (such as \protect\cs{hline}).
-% However, unlike the normal environments,  the |ed...| environments 
+% However, unlike the normal environments,  the |ed...| environments
 % can cross page breaks.
 %
 %    Macros like \protect\cs{edtext} can be used as part of an entry.
 %
 % For example:
 % \begin{verbatim}
-% \beginnumbering 
+% \beginnumbering
 % \pstart
 % \begin{edtabularl}
 % \textbf{\Large I} & wish I was a little bug\edindex{bug} &
 % \textbf{\Large I} & eat my peas with honey\edindex{honey} \\
-%  & With whiskers \edtext{round}{\Afootnote{around}} my tummy & 
+%  & With whiskers \edtext{round}{\Afootnote{around}} my tummy &
 %  & I've done it all my life. \\
-%  & I'd climb into a honey\edindex{honey} pot & 
+%  & I'd climb into a honey\edindex{honey} pot &
 %  & It makes the peas taste funny \\
-%  & And get my tummy gummy.\edindex{gummy} & 
+%  & And get my tummy gummy.\edindex{gummy} &
 %  & But it keeps them on the knife.
 % \end{edtabularr}
 % \pend
 % \endnumbering
 % \end{verbatim}
 %  produces the following parallel pair of verses.
-% 
+%
 % \begin{center}
 % \setlength{\tabcolsep}{2pt}
 % \begin{tabular}{p{4em}rlrl}
 % {\footnotesize 1} & \textbf{\Large I} & wish I was a little bug &
 % \textbf{\Large I} & eat my peas with honey \\
-% {\footnotesize 2} & & With whiskers round my tummy & 
+% {\footnotesize 2} & & With whiskers round my tummy &
 %  & I've done it all my life. \\
-% {\footnotesize 3} & & I'd climb into a honey pot & 
+% {\footnotesize 3} & & I'd climb into a honey pot &
 %  & It makes the peas taste funny \\
-% {\footnotesize 4} & & And get my tummy gummy. & 
+% {\footnotesize 4} & & And get my tummy gummy. &
 %  & But it keeps them on the knife.
 % \end{tabular}
 % \end{center}
@@ -3676,15 +3677,15 @@
 % \DescribeMacro{\spreadtext}
 % |\spreadmath|\marg{math} typesets \marg{math} but the \marg{math} has
 % no effect on the calculation of column widths.
-% |\spreadtext|\marg{text} is the analagous command for use in |edtabular| 
+% |\spreadtext|\marg{text} is the analagous command for use in |edtabular|
 % environments.
-% 
+%
 % \egstart
 % \begin{verbatim}
 % \begin{edarrayl}
 % 1 & 2  &  3  &  4 \\
 %   & \spreadmath{F+G+C} & & \\
-% a & bb & ccc & dddd 
+% a & bb & ccc & dddd
 % \end{edarrayl}
 % \end{verbatim}
 % \egmid
@@ -3692,7 +3693,7 @@
 % \begin{array}{llll}
 % 1 & 2  &  3  &  4 \\
 %   & \multicolumn{3}{l}{F+G+C} \\
-% a & bb & ccc & dddd 
+% a & bb & ccc & dddd
 % \end{array}
 % \end{displaymath}
 % \egend
@@ -3703,7 +3704,7 @@
 % \meta{fill}. The \meta{fill} argument can be any horizontal `fill'.
 % For example, |\hrulefill| or |\upbracefill|.
 %
-% Note that every row must have the same number of columns, even if 
+% Note that every row must have the same number of columns, even if
 % some would not appear to be necessary.
 %
 % The |\edrowfill| macro can be used in both tabular and array environments.
@@ -3728,7 +3729,7 @@
 % g                            & nnn  & \multicolumn{3}{c}{\upbracefill} \\
 % \multicolumn{3}{c}{\downbracefill}       & pq & dgh \\
 % k                            &      & l  & co & ghweropjklmnbvcxys \\
-% 1                            & 2    & 3  & \multicolumn{2}{c}{\hrulefill} 
+% 1                            & 2    & 3  & \multicolumn{2}{c}{\hrulefill}
 % \end{tabular}
 % \end{center}
 %
@@ -3737,7 +3738,7 @@
 % \newcommand*{\upbracketfill}{%
 %   \vrule height 4pt depth 0pt\hrulefill\vrule height 4pt depth 0pt}
 % \end{verbatim}
-% is a fill like |\upbracefill| except it has the appearance of a 
+% is a fill like |\upbracefill| except it has the appearance of a
 % (horizontal) bracket instead of a brace. It can be used like
 % this:
 %
@@ -3760,12 +3761,12 @@
 % \end{array}
 % \end{displaymath}
 %
-% 
+%
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\edatleft}
 % \DescribeMacro{\edatright}
-% \protect\cs{edatleft}\oarg{math}\marg{symbol}\marg{halfheight} typesets the math 
-% \meta{symbol} as \protect\cs{left}\marg{symbol} 
+% \protect\cs{edatleft}\oarg{math}\marg{symbol}\marg{halfheight} typesets the math
+% \meta{symbol} as \protect\cs{left}\marg{symbol}
 % with the optional \meta{math} centered before it. The \meta{symbol} is
 % twice \meta{halfheight} tall. The \protect\cs{edatright} macro is similar
 % and it typesets \protect\cs{right}\marg{symbol} with \meta{math} centered after it.
@@ -3779,7 +3780,7 @@
 % \edatright[= right]{)}{1.5\baselineskip}
 % \end{edarrayc}
 % \end{verbatim}
-% 
+%
 % \begin{displaymath}
 % left = \left\{
 % \begin{array}{ccc}
@@ -3790,7 +3791,7 @@
 % \right) = right
 % \end{displaymath}
 %
-% 
+%
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\edbeforetab}
 % \DescribeMacro{\edaftertab}
@@ -3819,7 +3820,7 @@
 % \mbox{} \hfill $D$ & 1 & 5 & $0$
 % \end{array}
 % \end{displaymath}
-% 
+%
 % \DescribeMacro{\edvertline}
 % \DescribeMacro{\edvertdots}
 % The macro \protect\cs{edvertline}\marg{height} draws a vertical line \meta{height} high
@@ -3833,7 +3834,7 @@
 %  k &   & L & cvb & \edvertline{4pc}
 % \end{edarrayr}
 % \end{verbatim}
-% 
+%
 % \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
 % \begin{displaymath}
 % \left.
@@ -3841,12 +3842,12 @@
 %  a & b & C & d   \\
 %  v & w & x & y   \\
 %  m & n & o & p   \\
-%  k &   & L & cvb 
+%  k &   & L & cvb
 % \end{array}
 % \right|
 % \end{displaymath}
 % \MakeShortVerb{\|}
-% 
+%
 % The \protect\cs{edvertdots} macro is similar to \protect\cs{edvertline} except that it
 % produces a vertical dotted instead of a solid line.
 %
@@ -3891,22 +3892,22 @@
 % \end{verbatim}
 % After the first run, you will see only the text. This is normal.
 % After the second run, you will see the formatting.
-% Finally, with the third run, you will see the table of contents. 
+% Finally, with the third run, you will see the table of contents.
 %
 % For technical reasons, the page break before \protect\cs{elechapter} cannot be added automatically.
 % You have to insert it manually via \protect\cs{beforeeledchapter}, which must be called outside of a numbered section.
 %
 % \subsection{Optimization}\label{optimize}
 % \DescribeMacro{\noeledsec}
-% If you are not going to have any \protect\cs{eledxxx} commands, then load \macpackage\  with \protect\cs{noeledsec} option. 
+% If you are not going to have any \protect\cs{eledxxx} commands, then load \macpackage\  with \protect\cs{noeledsec} option.
 % That will suppress the generation of unneeded \file{.eledsec} files, save memory, and make \macpackage\ run faster.
-% 
+%
 % \section{Quotation environments}
 % The \verb+quotation+ and \verb+quote+ environments can be used so that the same definition/note appears both inside and outside a numbered section.
 % The typographical consequences will resemble the outside numbered sections, based on the styles of the \emph{book} class.
 % However, if you use a package that redefines these environments, these redefinitions won't be available inside the numbered section.
-% You must open any quotation environments inside a \protect\cs{pstart}\,\ldots\,\protect\cs{pend} block, not outside. 
-% A quotation environment MUST NOT be opened immediately after a \protect\cs{pstart} 
+% You must open any quotation environments inside a \protect\cs{pstart}\,\ldots\,\protect\cs{pend} block, not outside.
+% A quotation environment MUST NOT be opened immediately after a \protect\cs{pstart}
 % and MUST NOT be closed immediately before a \protect\cs{pend}.
 %
 % \label{noquotation} In some cases, you do not want these environments to be redefined in numbered sections.
@@ -3916,14 +3917,14 @@
 %
 % \subsection{Control page breaking}
 % \changes{v1.7.0}{2013/11/08}{New features for managing page breaks.}
-% \Macpackage\ and \parpackage break pages automatically. However, you may sometimes want to either force page breaks, or prevent them. 
-% \DescribeMacro{\ledpb} \DescribeMacro{\lednopb} The packages provide two macros: 
+% \Macpackage\ and \parpackage break pages automatically. However, you may sometimes want to either force page breaks, or prevent them.
+% \DescribeMacro{\ledpb} \DescribeMacro{\lednopb} The packages provide two macros:
 % \begin{itemize}
 %    \item \protect\cs{ledpb} adds a page break.
 %    \item \protect\cs{lednopb} prevents a page break, by adding one line to the current page if needed.
 % \end{itemize}
 % \textbf{These commands have effect only at the second run}.
-% 
+%
 % These two commands take effect at the beginning of line in which they are called.
 % For example, if you call \protect\cs{ledpb} at l.~444, then l.~443 will be at p.~$n$, and l.~444 at p.~$n+1$.
 % \DescribeMacro{\ledpbsetting} However, you can change the behavior and decide they will have effect after  the end of the line, adding
@@ -3935,7 +3936,7 @@
 % stanzas; otherwise, the pages will be out of sync.
 %
 % \subsection{Prevent page break in a long verses}
-% \label{lednopbinversetrue}\DescribeMacro{\lednopbinversetrue} You can also decide to prevent page breaks between two lines of a long verse. To do this, use \verb+nopbinverse+ when loading package, or add \protect\cs{lednopbinversetrue} in the beginning of your file (better: in your preamble). 
+% \label{lednopbinversetrue}\DescribeMacro{\lednopbinversetrue} You can also decide to prevent page breaks between two lines of a long verse. To do this, use \verb+nopbinverse+ when loading package, or add \protect\cs{lednopbinversetrue} in the beginning of your file (better: in your preamble).
 %
 % This feature works only with verse of 2 lines and no more. It works on the third run, or on the fourth run if using \reledpar.
 % By default, when a long verse runs between two pages, a page break will be placed at the beginning of the verse. However, if you have added \cs{ledpbsetting}\arg{after}, the page break will be placed at the end of the long verse and the page containing the long verse will have one extra line.
@@ -3953,19 +3954,19 @@
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\ifledfinal}
 %    The package can take options. The option `final', which is the default
-% is for final typesetting; this sets \verb?\ifledfinal? to TRUE. The other 
-% option, `draft', may be useful during earlier stages and sets 
+% is for final typesetting; this sets \verb?\ifledfinal? to TRUE. The other
+% option, `draft', may be useful during earlier stages and sets
 % \verb?\ifledfinal? to FALSE.
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\showlemma}
 %    The lemma within the text is printed via \verb?\showlemma{lemma}?.
-% Normally, or with the `final' option, the definition of \verb?\showlemma? 
+% Normally, or with the `final' option, the definition of \verb?\showlemma?
 % is: \\
 % \verb?\newcommand*{\showlemma}[1]{#1}? \\
-% so it just produces its argument. 
+% so it just produces its argument.
 % With the `draft' option it is defined as \\
 % \verb?\newcommand*{\showlemma}[1]{\textit{#1}}? \\
-% so that its argument is typeset in an italic font, which may make it 
+% so that its argument is typeset in an italic font, which may make it
 % easier to check that all lemmas have been treated.
 %
 %    If you would prefer some other style, you could put something like this
@@ -4016,7 +4017,7 @@
 % \subsubsection{Paragraph shape}
 % \protect\cs{parshape} cannot be used within numbered text, except in a
 % very restricted way.
-% 
+%
 % \DescribeMacro{\ballast}
 % \LaTeX\ is a three-pass system, but even after a document has
 % been processed three times, there are some tricky situations in
@@ -4042,25 +4043,25 @@
 % but this area remains unsatisfactory.
 %
 % \label{nopenalties}If you use more than one series of paragraphed notes, it may happen, in some particular cases, that only the footnote rule, with no accompanying footnotes, be printed.
-% In this case use \reledmac\ package option \option{nopenalties} 
-% which should solve the problem, but also may produce widow or orphan lines. 
+% In this case use \reledmac\ package option \option{nopenalties}
+% which should solve the problem, but also may produce widow or orphan lines.
 % For the time being, we have no solution of this problem.
 %
-% 
+%
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\footfudgefiddle}
 % For paragraphed footnotes \TeX{} has to estimate the amount of space
 % required. If it underestimates this then the notes may get too long and
 % run off the bottom of the text block. \protect\cs{footfudgefiddle} can be increased
-% from its default 64 (say, to 68) to increase the estimate. You have to use 
+% from its default 64 (say, to 68) to increase the estimate. You have to use
 % \protect\cs{renewcommand} for this, like: \\
-% \verb?\renewcommand{\footfudgefiddle}{68}?\\ 
+% \verb?\renewcommand{\footfudgefiddle}{68}?\\
 % Note that you must call it \emph{before} \cs{Xarrangement}\arg{paragraph} or \cs{arrangementX}\arg{paragraph}.
 %
 % Any settings to `geometry' must be made before \cs{Xarrangement} / \cs{arrangementX}.
 %
 % Finally, in many cases you should use \cs{Xmaxhnotes} and / or \cs{maxhnotesX} (\reff{Xmaxhnotes}), in order to define the maximum height relative to \cs{textheight} and not to \cs{vsize}, because the \cs{vsize} value is not the same inside and outside of the preamble.
-% 
+%
 % \subsubsection{Use with other packages}
 %
 % Because of \macpackage's complexity, it may not play well with other
@@ -4079,11 +4080,11 @@
 % \begin{verbatim}
 % ... \edtext{\colorbox{mycolor}{lemma}}{\Afootnote{...\colorbox...}}
 % \end{verbatim}
-% If you actually try 
-% this\footnote{Reported by Dirk-Jan Dekker\index{Dekker, Dirk-Jan} 
+% If you actually try
+% this\footnote{Reported by Dirk-Jan Dekker\index{Dekker, Dirk-Jan}
 % in the CTT thread `Incompatibility
 % of ``color'' package' on 2003/08/28.}
-% you will find \LaTeX\ whinging 
+% you will find \LaTeX\ whinging
 % `\texttt{Missing \{ inserted}', and then things start to fall apart.
 % The trick in this case is to specify either:
 % \begin{verbatim}
@@ -4099,7 +4100,7 @@
 % throws away the first one.)
 % The first incantation lets color show in both the main text and footnotes
 % whereas the second one shows color in the main text but kills it
-% in the lemma and footnotes. On the other hand if you use 
+% in the lemma and footnotes. On the other hand if you use
 % \protect\cs{textcolor} instead, like
 % \begin{verbatim}
 % ... \edtext{\textcolor{mycolor}{lemma}}{\Afootnote{...\textcolor...}}
@@ -4112,15 +4113,15 @@
 % \newcommand{\morenoexpands}{\let\textcolor\@secondoftwo}
 % \makeatother
 % \end{verbatim}
-% It took Peter Wilson a little while to discover all this. If you run into this sort 
-% of problem you may have to spend some time experimenting before hitting 
+% It took Peter Wilson a little while to discover all this. If you run into this sort
+% of problem you may have to spend some time experimenting before hitting
 % on a solution.
 %
 %%
 %
-% If you want to use the option \emph{bottom} of the \protect\package{footmisc} package, 
+% If you want to use the option \emph{bottom} of the \protect\package{footmisc} package,
 % you must load this package \emph{before} the \macpackage\ package.
-% 
+%
 
 % \subsection{Parallel typesetting}\label{eledpar}
 %
@@ -4128,14 +4129,14 @@
 % Peter Wilson has developed the \ledpar package
 % as an extension to \ledmac specifically for parallel typesetting
 % of critical texts. This also cooperates with the \protect\package{babel} / \protect\package{polyglossia}
-% packages for typesetting in multiple languages. 
+% packages for typesetting in multiple languages.
 % \Parpackage is the successor of the primitive \ledpar package.
-% 
 %
-% Peter Wilson also developed 
-% the \protect\package{ledarab} package for 
+%
+% Peter Wilson also developed
+% the \protect\package{ledarab} package for
 % handling parallel Arabic text in critical editions.
-% However, this package is not maintened by Maïeul Rouquette. 
+% However, this package is not maintened by Maïeul Rouquette.
 % You should use the capabilities of a modern TeX processor, like Xe(La)TeX
 %
 %
@@ -4153,7 +4154,7 @@
 %
 % We present the \macpackage\ code in roughly the order in which it is used
 % during a run of \TeX. The order is \emph{exactly} that in which
-% it is read when you load The \Eledmac{} package, because the same file
+% it is read when you load the \macpackage{} package, because the same file
 % is used to generate this manual and to generate the \LaTeX\ package file.
 %
 % Most of what follows consists of macro definitions, but there
@@ -4209,13 +4210,13 @@
 %
 %
 % \subsection{Package declaration}
-% Announce the name and version of the package, which is 
+% Announce the name and version of the package, which is
 % targetted for LaTeX2e.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 %<*code>
 \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
-\ProvidesPackage{reledmac}[2018/09/13 v2.27.0 typesetting critical editions]%
+\ProvidesPackage{reledmac}[2018/10/12 v2.27.1 typesetting critical editions]%
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 % \subsection{Package options}
@@ -4352,9 +4353,9 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
 % \subsection{Loading packages}
-% Loading package \protect\package{xargs} to declare commands with optional arguments. 
+% Loading package \protect\package{xargs} to declare commands with optional arguments.
 % Loading package \package{xparse} to declare fully expandable commands with optional argument. Ideally, we should use only \package{xparse} and not \package{xargs}. For historical reasons, we use both.
-% \protect\package{Etoolbox} is also used to make code clearer - for example, in dynamic command names (which can replace \protect\cs{csname} etc.).  
+% \protect\package{Etoolbox} is also used to make code clearer - for example, in dynamic command names (which can replace \protect\cs{csname} etc.).
 % Use \protect\package{suffix} to declare commands with a starred version, \protect\package{xstring} to work with strings, \protect\package{ifluatex} and \protect\package{ifxetex} to test if \LuaTeX\ or \XeTeX\  is running, and \protect\package{ragged2e} to manage ragged justification for paragraphed notes.
 %  \begin{macrocode}
 \RequirePackage{xargs}
@@ -4404,7 +4405,7 @@
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newif\ifl@imakeidx
 \@ifpackageloaded{imakeidx}{\l@imakeidxtrue}{}%False is the default value
-%    \end{macrocode} 
+%    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 
 % \begin{macro}{\ifl@indextools}
@@ -4416,7 +4417,7 @@
   \l@imakeidxtrue%
   \let\imki@wrindexentry\indtl@wrindexentry%
   }{}%
-%    \end{macrocode} 
+%    \end{macrocode}
 %False is the default value. We consider \protect\package{indextools} as a variant of \protect\package{imakeidx}. That is why we set \protect\cs{ifl@imakeidx} to true. We also let \protect\cs{imki@wrindexentry} to \protect\cs{indtl@wrindexentry}.
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\ifl@footmisc}
@@ -4424,10 +4425,10 @@
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newif\ifl@footmisc
 \@ifpackageloaded{footmisc}{\l@footmisctrue}{}%False is the default value
-%    \end{macrocode} 
+%    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\if@RTL}
-% The \protect\cs{if@RTL} is defined by the bidi package, which is sometimes loaded by \emph{polyglossia}. 
+% The \protect\cs{if@RTL} is defined by the bidi package, which is sometimes loaded by \emph{polyglossia}.
 % But we define it as well if the \protect\package{bidi} package is not loaded.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \ifdef{\if@RTL}{}{\newif\if@RTL}
@@ -4447,7 +4448,7 @@
 % when the same message is repeated and also lets them be edited easily.
 % \changes{v0.7.0}{2005/02/21}{Made macros of all messages}
 % \changes{v1.12.3}{2012/08/15}{Add macros for new messages since v0.7}
-% 
+%
 % \begin{macro}{\reledmac@warning}
 % Write a warning message.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -4456,7 +4457,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\reledmac@error}
-% Write an error message. 
+% Write an error message.
 % \changes{v0.2.0}{2003/07/25}{Added \protect\cs{eledmac@error} and replaced error messages}
 % \changes{v1.12.3}{2014/08/15}{Replaced error messages}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -4590,19 +4591,19 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\led@err@NumberingWithoutPstart}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\led@err@PstartNotNumbered}{%
-  \reledmac@error{\string\pstart\space must be used within a 
+  \reledmac@error{\string\pstart\space must be used within a
                 numbered section %
                  (\string\beginnumbering\space …\space\string\endnumbering)}{\@ehc}}%
 \newcommand*{\led@err@PstartInPstart}{%
   \reledmac@error{\string\pstart\space encountered while another
                 \string\pstart\space was in effect}{\@ehc}}
 \newcommand*{\led@err@PendNotNumbered}{%
-  \reledmac@error{\string\pend\space must be used within a 
+  \reledmac@error{\string\pend\space must be used within a
                 numbered section}{\@ehc}}
 \newcommand*{\led@err@PendNoPstart}{%
   \reledmac@error{\string\pend\space must follow a \string\pstart}{\@ehc}}
 \newcommand*{\led@err@AutoparNotNumbered}{%
-  \reledmac@error{\string\autopar\space must be used within a 
+  \reledmac@error{\string\autopar\space must be used within a
                 numbered section}{\@ehc}}
 \newcommand*{\led@err@NumberingWithoutPstart}{%
   \reledmac@error{\string\beginnumbering...\string\endnumbering\space without \string\pstart}{\@ehc}}%
@@ -4817,7 +4818,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\led@warning@hsizeX@deprecated}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\led@warning@hsizeX@deprecated}{%    
+\newcommand{\led@warning@hsizeX@deprecated}{%
   \reledmac@warning{\string\hsizeX\space command deprecated, use \string\widthX\space instead.}%
 }%
 %    \end{macrocode}
@@ -4868,7 +4869,7 @@
 % That is useful for example when we need to wrap something on a \cs{textsuperscript}.
 %
 %
-% Indeed \verb+a\textsuperscript{}b+ does not produce the same typographical result as 
+% Indeed \verb+a\textsuperscript{}b+ does not produce the same typographical result as
 % \verb+ab+.\footnote{Compare the distance between letters in the first case (a\textsuperscript{}b) and in the second one (ab).}
 % The l@wrapcs@ifnotemptybox does the same, but take as argument a control sequence name, so without backslash.
 %
@@ -4933,11 +4934,11 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\ifpst@rtedL}
 % \begin{macro}{\l@dnumpstartsL}
 
-% In preparation for the \parpackage  package, these are related to 
-% the `right' text of parallel texts (when \protect\cs{ifl@dpairing} is TRUE). 
+% In preparation for the \parpackage  package, these are related to
+% the `right' text of parallel texts (when \protect\cs{ifl@dpairing} is TRUE).
 % They are explained in the \protect\parpackage
 % manual.
-% \changes{v0.7.0}{2005/02/24}{Added \protect\cs{l@dnumpstartsL}, \protect\cs{ifl@dpairing} 
+% \changes{v0.7.0}{2005/02/24}{Added \protect\cs{l@dnumpstartsL}, \protect\cs{ifl@dpairing}
 %              and \protect\cs{ifpst@rted} for/from eledpar}
 % \changes{v0.12.0}{2005/10/01}{Added \protect\cs{ifledRcol} and \protect\cs{ifnumberingR} for/from \protect\package{eledpar}}
 % \changes{v1.12.0}{2014/08/05}{Add \protect\cs{ifledRcol@} for \protect\package{eledpar}}
@@ -4959,7 +4960,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\ifledRcol}
 % \begin{macro}{\ifledRcol@}
-% \protect\cs{ifledRcol} is set to true in the \verb+Rightside+ environnement. It must be not confused with \protect\cs{ifledRcol@} which is set to true when a right line is processed, in \protect\cs{Pages} or \protect\cs{Columns}. 
+% \protect\cs{ifledRcol} is set to true in the \verb+Rightside+ environnement. It must be not confused with \protect\cs{ifledRcol@} which is set to true when a right line is processed, in \protect\cs{Pages} or \protect\cs{Columns}.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newif\ifledRcol
 \newif\ifledRcol@
@@ -5002,7 +5003,7 @@
 % and end a line-numbered section of the text; the pair of commands may
 % be used as many times as you like within one document to start
 % and end multiple, separately line-numbered sections. \LaTeX\ will
-% maintain and display 
+% maintain and display
 % a `section number' as a count named
 % \protect\cs{section@num} that counts how many
 % \protect\cs{beginnumbering} and \protect\cs{resumenumbering}
@@ -5105,7 +5106,7 @@
 %   \item Define an empty list of pstart number where sectioning commands are called.
 %   \item Input auxiliary file with the description of section titles.
 %   \item Open the same auxiliary file to write in.
-% \end{itemize} 
+% \end{itemize}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
   \else
     \begingroup
@@ -5165,7 +5166,7 @@
 % to the right place.
 % \changes{v0.7.0}{2005/02/24}{Changed \protect\cs{endnumbering} for eledpar}
 % \changes{v1.12.5}{2014/08/31}{Allow to mix parallel columns and normal text when using \protect\cs{pausenumbering}}
-% We define it using \cs{def} and not \cs{newcommand} because \LaTeX\ does not allow defining command whose name starts by \enquote{end} except if we are currently creating an environment, which is not the case here. 
+% We define it using \cs{def} and not \cs{newcommand} because \LaTeX\ does not allow defining command whose name starts by \enquote{end} except if we are currently creating an environment, which is not the case here.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\endnumbering{%
   \ifnumbering
@@ -5197,7 +5198,7 @@
   \else
     \led@err@NumberingNotStarted
   \fi
-  \autoparfalse  
+  \autoparfalse
   \if@noeled@sec\else%
     \immediate\closeout\eled@sectioning@out%
   \fi%
@@ -5218,7 +5219,7 @@
 % show that numbering continues across the gap.\footnote{Peter Wilson's thanks
 % to Wayne Sullivan,\index{Sullivan, Wayne} who suggested the idea
 % behind these macros.}
-% The \cs{pausenumbering@page@num} counter stores the \cs{this@section@next@page@num} when the \cs{pause@numbering} is called. 
+% The \cs{pausenumbering@page@num} counter stores the \cs{this@section@next@page@num} when the \cs{pause@numbering} is called.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcount\pausenumbering@page@num%
 \newcommand{\pausenumbering}{%
@@ -5235,8 +5236,8 @@
 % without resetting the various counters. Note that no check is made
 % by \protect\cs{resumenumbering} to ensure that \protect\cs{pausenumbering} was actually
 % invoked.
-% The boolean \cs{ifresumenumbering@start} is set to true. That allows us to avoid resetting the line number at the first line of \cs{resumenumbering} if the lineation is by page. 
-% This boolean is set to false after the first action. 
+% The boolean \cs{ifresumenumbering@start} is set to true. That allows us to avoid resetting the line number at the first line of \cs{resumenumbering} if the lineation is by page.
+% This boolean is set to false after the first action.
 % \changes{v0.7.0}{2005/02/24}{Changed \protect\cs{resumenumbering} for eledpar}
 % \changes{v1.12.5}{2014/08/31}{Debug \protect\cs{resumenumbering}}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -5283,7 +5284,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\set@continuousnumberingforL}
-% \cs{set@continuousnumberingforl} sets pstart counters at a \cs{beginnumbering} or a \cs{resumenumbering} in order to have continuous numbering with single column text. 
+% \cs{set@continuousnumberingforl} sets pstart counters at a \cs{beginnumbering} or a \cs{resumenumbering} in order to have continuous numbering with single column text.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\set@continuousnumberingforL}{%
  \ifcontinuousnumberingwithcolumns%
@@ -5319,10 +5320,10 @@
 % It could be nice to unify them to the \LaTeX3 list, however such migration would take quite time with some risk of error, for a gain which will be minor.
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\list@create}
-% The \protect\cs{list@create} macro creates a new list. 
+% The \protect\cs{list@create} macro creates a new list.
 % This macro does not do anything beyond initializing an empty
 % list macro.
-% 
+%
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\list@create}[1]{%
   \global\let#1=\empty%
@@ -5432,7 +5433,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\lineation}
-% \protect\cs{lineation}\marg{word} is the macro you use to select the 
+% \protect\cs{lineation}\marg{word} is the macro you use to select the
 % lineation system.
 % Its argument is a string: either \verb+page+, \verb+section+ or \verb+pstart+.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -5490,7 +5491,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\linenummargin}
 % \begin{macro}{\line@margin}
 % \begin{macro}{\l@dgetline@margin}
-% \protect\cs{linenummargin}\marg{word} specify which margin 
+% \protect\cs{linenummargin}\marg{word} specify which margin
 % line numbers are in; it takes one argument, a string, which value can be
 % \verb+left+ ;  \verb+right+;  \verb+inner+ or
 % \verb+outer+.
@@ -5552,7 +5553,7 @@
 % is the difference between successive numbered lines. The initial
 % values of these counters produce labels on lines $5$, $10$, $15$, etc.
 % \verb+linenumincrement+ must be at least $1$.
-% 
+%
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcounter{firstlinenum}
   \setcounter{firstlinenum}{5}
@@ -5591,7 +5592,7 @@
   \ifledRcol%
     \setcounter{firstlinenumR}{#1}%
     \led@warn@setting@in@rightside{\firstlinenum}%
-  \else%      
+  \else%
     \setcounter{firstlinenum}{#1}%
   \fi%
 }
@@ -5607,7 +5608,7 @@
   \ifledRcol%
     \setcounter{firstsublinenumR}{#1}%
     \led@warn@setting@in@rightside{\firstsublinenum}%
-  \else%     
+  \else%
     \setcounter{firstsublinenum}{#1}%
   \fi%
 }
@@ -5626,7 +5627,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
 %
-% \subsection{Line number locking} 
+% \subsection{Line number locking}
 % \begin{macro}{\lockdisp}
 % \begin{macro}{\lock@disp}
 % \begin{macro}{\l@dgetlock@disp}
@@ -5635,7 +5636,7 @@
 % appear---should be printed on the first printed line or on the
 % last, or by all of them.
 % Its argument is a word, either
-% \verb+first+, \verb+last+, or \verb+all+.  
+% \verb+first+, \verb+last+, or \verb+all+.
 % Initially, it is set to \verb+first+.
 %
 % \protect\cs{lock@disp} encodes the selection: $0$ for first, $1$ for last,
@@ -5740,14 +5741,14 @@
 % called to print marginal line numbers on
 % a page, for left- and right-hand margins respectively.
 % They are made easy to access and change, since you may
-% want to change the styling in some way. 
+% want to change the styling in some way.
 % These standard versions
 % illustrate the general sort of thing that will be needed; they are
 % based on the \protect\cs{leftheadline} macro in \thetexbook, p.\,416.
 %
 % Whatever these macros output gets printed in a box that will be
 % put into the appropriate margin without any space between it and the
-% line of text. 
+% line of text.
 % You will generally want a kern between a line number and
 % the text, and \protect\cs{linenumsep} is provided as a standard way of
 % storing its size. Line numbers are usually printed in a smaller
@@ -5757,8 +5758,8 @@
 % remain local.
 %
 % \protect\cs{ledlinenum} typesets the line (and subline) number.
-% 
-%   The original \protect\cs{numlabfont} specification is equivalent to 
+%
+%   The original \protect\cs{numlabfont} specification is equivalent to
 % the \LaTeX\ \protect\cs{scriptsize} for a 10pt document.
 % \changes{v0.3.0}{2004/02/14}{Added \protect\cs{linenumr@p} and \protect\cs{sublinenum@rep}
 %           to \protect\cs{leftlinenum} and \protect\cs{rightlinenum}}
@@ -5931,8 +5932,8 @@
 %
 %
 % These line numbers are all visible numbers.
-% The font specifier is a set of four codes for font encoding, 
-% family, series, and shape, separated by \verb"/" characters.  
+% The font specifier is a set of four codes for font encoding,
+% family, series, and shape, separated by \verb"/" characters.
 % Thus a lemma that
 % started on page $23$, line $35$ and
 % went on until page $24$, line $3$
@@ -6046,7 +6047,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
-% 
+%
 % \begin{macro}{\page@num}
 % \begin{macro}{\endpage@num}
 % \begin{macro}{\endline@num}
@@ -6164,7 +6165,7 @@
 % When the file is there we start a new group and make some special
 % definitions we will need to process it.
 % It is  a sequence of \TeX\
-% commands, but they require a few special settings. 
+% commands, but they require a few special settings.
 % We make [ and
 % ] become grouping characters: they are used that way in the
 % line-list file, because we need to write them out one at a time
@@ -6198,7 +6199,7 @@
     \csnumgdef{@lastabsline@forpageR@\the\page@numR}{\the\absline@numR}%
     \csnumgdef{@lastline@forpageR@\the\page@numR}{\the\line@numR}%
   \fi%
-  \endgroup  
+  \endgroup
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 % When the reading is done, we are all through with the
@@ -6300,7 +6301,7 @@
 % can be turned off easily for nested calls of \protect\cs{@ref}.
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\line@list@version}
-% The \protect\cs{line@list@version} check if the line-list file does not refers to the older commands of \macpackage. 
+% The \protect\cs{line@list@version} check if the line-list file does not refers to the older commands of \macpackage.
 % In this case, we stop reading the line-list file.
 % Consequently, \protect\cs{line@list@version} must be the first line of a line-number file.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -6327,19 +6328,19 @@
 % code at the start of the macro, to get the timing of the actions
 % correct. The problem was that his original naive implementation
 % of \protect\cs{setlinenum} had a unfortunate tendency to change the
-% number of the last line of the \emph{preceding} paragraph. 
+% number of the last line of the \emph{preceding} paragraph.
 % The new code is sort of based on the page number handling and
 % \protect\cs{setline}.
 % It seems
 % that a lot of fiddling with the line number internals is required.
 %
-% In November 2004 in order to accurately determine page numbers Peter Wilson added 
+% In November 2004 in order to accurately determine page numbers Peter Wilson added
 % these to the macro. It is now: \\
 % \protect\cs{@nl}\marg{page counter number}\marg{printed page number} \\
 % We do not (yet) use the printed number (i.e., the \protect\cs{thepage}) but
 % it may come in handy later. The macro \cs{@page} checks if a new
 % page has started.
-% 
+%
 % Exactly what \protect\cs{@nl} does depends
 % on whether right text is being processed. That's why many code is defined in \protect\cs{@nl@reg} or \protect\cs{nl@regR}.
 %
@@ -6434,7 +6435,7 @@
 
 \newcount\this@section@last@page@num%
   \this@section@last@page@num=-10000%
- 
+
 \newcommand*{\@page}[1]{%
   \ifledRcol
     \ifnum #1=\last@page@numR
@@ -6449,7 +6450,7 @@
           }%
           {}%
           {%
-            \line@numR \z@% 
+            \line@numR \z@%
             \subline@numR \z@%
             \global\csdef{reset@lineR\the\numexpr\absline@numR+1\relax @\the\section@numR}{}%
           }%
@@ -6497,11 +6498,11 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\@pendR}
 % \begin{macro}{\@lopL}
 % \begin{macro}{\@lopR}
-% These do not do anything at this point, but will have been added to the 
+% These do not do anything at this point, but will have been added to the
 % auxiliary file(s) if the  \parpackage package has been used. They
-% are just here to stop \macpackage\ from moaning if the \parpackage 
+% are just here to stop \macpackage\ from moaning if the \parpackage
 % is used for one run and then not for the following one.
-% \changes{v0.6.0}{2004/11/16}{Added \protect\cs{@pend},\protect\cs{@pendR}, \protect\cs{@lopL} and 
+% \changes{v0.6.0}{2004/11/16}{Added \protect\cs{@pend},\protect\cs{@pendR}, \protect\cs{@lopL} and
 %        \protect\cs{@lopR} in anticipation of parallel processing}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\@pend}[1]{}
@@ -6587,16 +6588,16 @@
 \newcommand*{\@set}[1]{%
   \ifledRcol
     \ifsublines@
-      \subline@numR=#1\relax 
+      \subline@numR=#1\relax
     \else
-      \line@numR=#1\relax 
+      \line@numR=#1\relax
     \fi
     \set@line@action
   \else
     \ifsublines@
-      \subline@num=#1\relax 
+      \subline@num=#1\relax
     \else
-      \line@num=#1\relax 
+      \line@num=#1\relax
     \fi
     \set@line@action
   \fi}
@@ -6727,7 +6728,7 @@
     \fi
   \fi}
 
-  
+
 \newcommand*{\do@lockonL}{%
   \xright@appenditem{\the\absline@num}\to\actionlines@list
   \ifsublines@
@@ -6749,7 +6750,7 @@
       \fi
     \fi
   \fi}
-  
+
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
@@ -6797,7 +6798,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\n@num}
-% These macros implement the \protect\cs{skipnumbering} command. 
+% These macros implement the \protect\cs{skipnumbering} command.
 % They use action code 1007.
 % \changes{v0.7.0}{2005/02/22}{Added \protect\cs{n@num}}
 % \changes{v1.21.0}{2015/04/13}{\protect\cs{n@num} defined only one time for both \Eledmac{} and \Eledpar{}}
@@ -6816,7 +6817,7 @@
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\n@num@stanza}
-% This macro implements the \protect\cs{skipnumbering} for stanza command. 
+% This macro implements the \protect\cs{skipnumbering} for stanza command.
 % It uses  action code 1008.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\n@num@stanza}{%
@@ -6834,13 +6835,13 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\hidenumbering}
 % \begin{macro}{\hidenumberingonleftpage}
 % \begin{macro}{\hidenumberingonrightpage}
-% \protect\cs{hidenumbering} hides number in margin. 
+% \protect\cs{hidenumbering} hides number in margin.
 % It uses action code 1009.
 % \cs{hidenumberingonleftpage} and \cs{hidenumberingonrightpage} ara variant, using action code only conditionnaly
 % \begin{macro}{\h@num}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newif\ifl@dhidenumber
-\newcommand*{\hidenumbering}{
+\newcommand*{\hidenumbering}{%
   \ifledRcol%
     \write\linenum@outR{\string\hide@num}%
   \else%
@@ -6937,7 +6938,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\@ref@reg}
-% The first thing \protect\cs{@ref} (i.e. \protect\cs{@ref@reg}) itself does is to add 
+% The first thing \protect\cs{@ref} (i.e. \protect\cs{@ref@reg}) itself does is to add
 % the specified number
 % of items to the \protect\cs{insertlines@list} list.
 % \changes{v0.7.0}{2005/02/22}{Added \protect\cs{@ref@reg}}
@@ -6945,7 +6946,7 @@
 \newcommand*{\@ref}[2]{%
   \ifledRcol%
     \@ref@regR{#1}{#2}%
-  \else% 
+  \else%
     \@ref@reg{#1}{#2}%
   \fi%
 }%
@@ -7000,7 +7001,7 @@
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % Decrease edtext level counter.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-  \global\advance\@edtext@level by -1% 
+  \global\advance\@edtext@level by -1%
 }
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
@@ -7041,12 +7042,12 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\ref@reg@later}
-% This macro is stored in the auxiliary file when using \cs{edtextlater}. 
+% This macro is stored in the auxiliary file when using \cs{edtextlater}.
 % It is used only to get the correct value for the \cs{sameword} tools.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\@ref@later}[1]{%
   \global\advance\@edtext@level by \@ne%
-  \ifledRcol% 
+  \ifledRcol%
     \@ref@reg@parseR{#1}%
   \else%
     \@ref@reg@parse{#1}%
@@ -7100,10 +7101,10 @@
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\this@line@list@version}
 % The commands allowed in the line-list file and their arguments
-% can change between two version of \macpackage. 
+% can change between two version of \macpackage.
 % The \protect\cs{this@line@list@version} command is upgraded when it happens.
 % It is written in the file list.
-% If we process a line-list file which used a older version, that means the commands used inside are deprecated, and we can't use them. 
+% If we process a line-list file which used a older version, that means the commands used inside are deprecated, and we can't use them.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\this@line@list@version}{7}%
 %    \end{macrocode}
@@ -7140,7 +7141,7 @@
 % Now close the current output line-list file, if any, and open a new one.
 % The first time we open a line-list file for output, we do it using
 % \protect\cs{immediate}, and clear the \protect\cs{iffirst@linenum@out@} flag.
-% \changes{v0.2.2}{2003/11/09}{Added initial write of page number in 
+% \changes{v0.2.2}{2003/11/09}{Added initial write of page number in
 %                           \protect\cs{line@list@stuff}}
 % \changes{v0.7.0}{2005/02/25}{Deleted \protect\cs{page@start} from \protect\cs{line@list@stuff}}
 % \changes{v1.15.1}{2015/01/16}{Revert modification of 1.5.2 which makes bug with numbering. Leave vertical mode to solve spurious space before minipage.}
@@ -7289,7 +7290,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\flag@start@RTL}
 % \begin{macro}{\flag@end@RTL}
 % With \XeLaTeX, there is a problem when using RTL: the writing of a command in the numbered auxiliary files (\verb+.1+, \verb+.2+ etc) is reversed when the first argument of \cs{edtext} is typset in one line, but it is \textbf{not} reversed when this first argument is typset in two lines or more.\footnote{This problem is caused by the way \XeTeX\ manages right-to-left typsetting. David Carlisle explains it on \url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/333373/7712} and provides a potential solution, using \cs{vadjust}. However in some cases this adds spurious vertical spaces in reledmac. That is why we are using the solution explained below.}
-% 
+%
 % To solve this problem, we use a crossref mechanism. At the first run, we put a label, but we do not write any \cs{@ref} command. When the value of the label can be tested, that is after three runs, we're doing:
 % \begin{itemize}
 %  \item If the first argument of \cs{edtext} is typeset on only one line, we first call \cs{flag@end}, at the point we normally call \cs{flag@start}, at the beginning of the content of the first argument, and we call \cs{flag@end} at the point we normally call \cs{flag@start}, at the end of the content of the first argument.
@@ -7407,7 +7408,7 @@
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\setline}
 % You can use \protect\cs{setline}\marg{num}
-% in running text (i.e., within \protect\cs{pstart}...\protect\cs{pend}) to set the 
+% in running text (i.e., within \protect\cs{pstart}...\protect\cs{pend}) to set the
 % current visible
 % line-number to a specified positive value.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -7417,9 +7418,9 @@
   \ifnum#1<\z@
     \led@warn@BadSetline%
   \else%
-    \ifledRcol% 
+    \ifledRcol%
       \write\linenum@outR{\string\@set[#1]}%
-    \else%      
+    \else%
       \write\linenum@out{\string\@set[#1]}%
     \fi%
   \fi%
@@ -7430,7 +7431,7 @@
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\setlinenum}
 % You can use \protect\cs{setlinenum}\marg{num}
-% before a \protect\cs{pstart} to set the visible line-number to a specified 
+% before a \protect\cs{pstart} to set the visible line-number to a specified
 % positive value. It writes a \protect\cs{l@d@set} command to the line-list file.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 
@@ -7508,7 +7509,7 @@
 % \section{Marking text for notes}
 % \label{text}\relax
 %
-% The \protect\cs{edtext} macro is used to create all 
+% The \protect\cs{edtext} macro is used to create all
 % footnotes and endnotes,
 % as well as to print the portion of the main text to which a given note
 % or notes is keyed. The idea is to have that lemma appear only once in
@@ -7526,7 +7527,7 @@
 % main text, and is also used as a lemma for notes to it.
 %
 % \item \verb"#2" is a series of subsidiary macros that generate
-% various kinds of notes. 
+% various kinds of notes.
 % \end{itemize}
 %
 % The \protect\cs{edtext} macro may be used (somewhat) recursively; that
@@ -7627,7 +7628,7 @@
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\dummy@edtext}[2]{#1}
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% 
+%
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\dummy@edtext@showlemma}
 % Some time, we want to obtain only the first argument of \protect\cs{edtext}, while also wrapping it in \protect\cs{showlemma}. For example, when printing a \protect\cs{eledsection}.
@@ -7673,7 +7674,7 @@
 % should be done only once. And we make
 % \protect\cs{edtext} itself, if it appears within its own
 % argument, do nothing but copy its first argument.
-% 
+%
 % Finally, we execute \protect\cs{morenoexpands}. The version of
 % \protect\cs{morenoexpands} defined here does nothing; but you may define
 % a version of your own when you need to add more expansion
@@ -7686,7 +7687,7 @@
 %
 %
 % The \cs{new@series} command also adds \cs{let}\cs{footnote\meta{X}}\cs{@gobble} to the end of the \cs{no@expands} macro for the series \meta{X}.
-% 
+%
 % (A related problem, not addressed by these two macros,
 % is that of characters whose category code are changed by any of
 % the macros used in the arguments to \protect\cs{edtext}. Since the
@@ -7708,7 +7709,7 @@
   \let\select@@lemmafont=0%
   \let\startsub=\relax  \let\endsub=\relax
   \let\startlock=\relax \let\endlock=\relax
-  \let\edlabel=\@gobble 
+  \let\edlabel=\@gobble
   \let\setline=\@gobble \let\advanceline=\@gobble
   \let\sameword\sameword@inedtext%
   \let\edtext=\dummy@edtext
@@ -7731,7 +7732,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\@edtext@level}
 % \changes{v1.15.0}{2015/01/12}{New boolean \protect\cs{if@edtext@}.}
 % \changes{v1.23.0}{2015/05/18}{The boolean \protect\cs{if@edtext@} becomes the counter \protect\cs{edtext@level}.}
-% This counter is increased by 1 at each level of \protect\cs{edtext}. 
+% This counter is increased by 1 at each level of \protect\cs{edtext}.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcount\@edtext@level%
 \@edtext@level=0%
@@ -7748,7 +7749,7 @@
 %
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\theedtext}
-% The \verb+edtext+ counter is increased at each \cs{edtext} command. 
+% The \verb+edtext+ counter is increased at each \cs{edtext} command.
 % It is used to add to insert hyperlinks between a notes and the lemma.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcounter{edtext}
@@ -7760,11 +7761,11 @@
 % \changes{v1.4.0}{2012/11/16}{Compatibility of \protect\cs{edtext} with the right-to-left direction (with Polyglossia).}
 % \changes{v1.17.0}{2015/02/09}{Error message when calling \protect\cs{edtext} outside of a numbered paragraph.}
 % When executed, \protect\cs{edtext} first ensures that we are in
-% horizontal mode. 
+% horizontal mode.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\edtext}[2]{\leavevmode%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% Then, check if we are in a numbered paragraph (\protect\cs{pstart}\ldots\protect\cs{pend}).. 
+% Then, check if we are in a numbered paragraph (\protect\cs{pstart}\ldots\protect\cs{pend})..
 %    \begin{macrocode}
   \ifnumberedpar@%
 %    \end{macrocode}
@@ -7777,7 +7778,7 @@
       \global\advance\@edtext@level by 1%
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % We also increase the \verb+edtext+ \LaTeX\ counter to insert a hypertarget if the \package{hyperref} package is loaded, and also works with \cs{edtext} on right-to-left typesetting with \XeLaTeX.
-% 
+%
 % We store the value for the current level in a global macro. So we have one macro by level of \cs{edtext}. That is required, because \cs{edtext} can contain \cs{edtext}.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
       \stepcounter{edtext}%
@@ -7813,7 +7814,7 @@
 % original \protect\cs{edtext} restored; within this group we have also turned
 % off the expansion of those control sequences commonly found within text
 % that can cause trouble for us.
-% 
+%
 %    \begin{macrocode}
         \global\renewcommand{\@tag}{%
           \no@expands #1%
@@ -7830,11 +7831,11 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \protect\cs{insert@count} will be altered by the note-generating macros:
 % it counts the number of deferred footnotes or other insertions
-% generated by this instance of \protect\cs{edtext}. 
-% If we are in a right column (\parpackage), we use \protect\cs{insert@countR} 
+% generated by this instance of \protect\cs{edtext}.
+% If we are in a right column (\parpackage), we use \protect\cs{insert@countR}
 % instead of \protect\cs{insert@count}.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-        \ifledRcol \global\insert@countR \z@% 
+        \ifledRcol \global\insert@countR \z@%
         \else      \global\insert@count \z@ \fi%
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % Now process the note-generating macros in argument \verb"#2"
@@ -7946,7 +7947,7 @@
     \IfSubStr{#2}{\pend}{\led@err@PendInEdtext{second}}{}%
   \endgroup%
 }%
-% 
+%
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\@beforeinsertofthisedtext}
@@ -8019,7 +8020,7 @@
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\edfont@info}
 % The macro \protect\cs{edfont@info} returns coded information about the
-% current font. 
+% current font.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\edfont@info}{\f@encoding/\f@family/\f@series/\f@shape}
@@ -8056,7 +8057,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\if@lemmacommand@}
 % \changes{v1.15.0}{2015/01/12}{New boolean \protect\cs{iflemmacommand@}.}
-% This boolean is set to TRUE inside a \protect\cs{edtext} (or \protect\cs{critext}) when a \protect\cs{lemma} command is called. 
+% This boolean is set to TRUE inside a \protect\cs{edtext} (or \protect\cs{critext}) when a \protect\cs{lemma} command is called.
 % That is useful for some commands which can have a different behavior if the lemma in the note is different from the lemma in the main text.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newif\if@lemmacommand@%
@@ -8122,7 +8123,7 @@
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\lineannot}
 % \begin{macro}{\lineannot@set}
-% Last but not least, \cs{lineannot} allows us to substitute line number annotation. It is different from \cs{linenum} for backward compatibility with older versions of \macpackage. It calls \cs{lineannot@set} to determine whether we must change only one annotation or two, or none. 
+% Last but not least, \cs{lineannot} allows us to substitute line number annotation. It is different from \cs{linenum} for backward compatibility with older versions of \macpackage. It calls \cs{lineannot@set} to determine whether we must change only one annotation or two, or none.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\lineannot}[1]{%
   \lineannot@set#1|%
@@ -8134,24 +8135,24 @@
     {\def\@tempa{#1}}%
   \IfStrEq{#2}{}%
     {\let\@tempb\annot@start}%
-    {\def\@tempb{#2}}% 
-  \xdef\l@current@annot{\@tempa|\@tempb}%  
+    {\def\@tempb{#2}}%
+  \xdef\l@current@annot{\@tempa|\@tempb}%
 }%
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
 % \subsection{Lemma disambiguation}
 % The mechanism which counts the occurrence of a same word in a same line is quite complex, because, when \LaTeX\ reads a command between a \protect\cs{pstart} and a \protect\cs{pend}, it does not know yet which are the line numbers.
-% 
+%
 % The general mechanism is the following:
 % \begin{itemize}
 %    \item \textbf{At the first run}, each \protect\cs{sameword} command increments an \protect\package{etoolbox} counter the name of which contains the argument of the \protect\cs{sameword} commands.
 %    \item Then this counter, associated with the argument of \protect\cs{sameword} is stored with the \protect\cs{@sw} command in the auxiliary file of the current \macpackage\ section (the \verb+.1+, \verb+.2+… file).
 %    \item \textbf{When this auxiliary file is read at the second run}, different operations are achieved:
-%  \begin{enumerate} 
+%  \begin{enumerate}
 %         \item  Get the rank of each \protect\cs{sameword} in a line (relative rank) from the rank of each \protect\cs{sameword} in all the numbered section (absolute rank):
 %         \begin{itemize}
-%            \item For each paired \protect\cs{sameword} argument and absolute line number, a counter is defined. Its value corresponds to the number of times \protect\cs{sameword}\marg{argument} is called from the beginning of  the lineation to the end of the current line. We also store the same data for the preceding absolute line number, if it does not have \protect\cs{sameword}\marg{argument}.    
+%            \item For each paired \protect\cs{sameword} argument and absolute line number, a counter is defined. Its value corresponds to the number of times \protect\cs{sameword}\marg{argument} is called from the beginning of  the lineation to the end of the current line. We also store the same data for the preceding absolute line number, if it does not have \protect\cs{sameword}\marg{argument}.
 %            \item  For each \protect\cs{sameword} having the same argument,  we subtract from its absolute rank the number stored for the paired \protect\cs{sameword} argument and previous absolute line number. Consequently, we obtain the relative rank.
 %             \item See the following example which explains how, for same \protect\cs{sameword}, absolute ranks are transformed to relative ranks.
 %  \begin{verbatim}
@@ -8166,7 +8167,7 @@
 %  no \sameword for this line.
 %  3 is stored for this \sameword and line 3
 %  At line 4:
-%  absolute rank 4 becomes relative rank 4-3 = 1  
+%  absolute rank 4 becomes relative rank 4-3 = 1
 %  4 is stored for this \sameword and line 4
 %  \end{verbatim}
 %        \end{itemize}
@@ -8174,14 +8175,14 @@
 % That is: create a list for \protect\cs{edtext}s of level~1, a list for \protect\cs{edtext}s of level~2, a list for \protect\cs{edtext}s of level~3 etc.
 % For each \protect\cs{edtext} in these lists, we store all of the relative ranks of \protect\cs{saweword} which are called as lemma information. That is: 1) either called in the first argument of \protect\cs{sameword}, or, 2) called in the \protect\cs{lemma} macro of the second argument of \protect\cs{sameword} AND marked by the optional argument of \protect\cs{saweword} in first argument of \protect\cs{edtext}.
 %
-% For example, suppose a line with nested \protect\cs{edtext}s which contains some 
+% For example, suppose a line with nested \protect\cs{edtext}s which contains some
 % word marked by \protect\cs{sameword} and having the following relative rank:\\
 %
-% 
+%
 %\let\up\textsuperscript
 %bar\up{1} \fbox{%
 %      \fbox{foo\up{1} foo\up{2} bar\up{2} foo\up{3}} (A)(B)
-%      foo\up{4} bar\up{3}% 
+%      foo\up{4} bar\up{3}%
 %   } (C)
 %   \fbox{%
 %      \fbox{foo\up{5}} (D)
@@ -8206,7 +8207,7 @@
 %  \end{itemize}
 %  \item At the second run, when a critical note is printed:
 %    \begin{itemize}
-%         \item The \protect\cs{sameword} command is let  \protect\cs{sameword@inedtext}. 
+%         \item The \protect\cs{sameword} command is let  \protect\cs{sameword@inedtext}.
 %          \item At each call of this \protect\cs{sameword@inedtext}, we step to the next element of the list associated to the note. Let it be $r$.
 %        \item For the word marked by \protect\cs{sameword}, we calculate how many time it is called in its line. To do it:
 %          \begin{itemize}
@@ -8215,21 +8216,21 @@
 %          \end{itemize}
 %        \item If $n >1 $, that means the current word appears more than once in its line. In this case, we call \protect\cs{showwordrank} with the word as the first argument and $r$ as the second argument. If the word is called only once, we just print it.
 %   \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize} 
+% \end{itemize}
 % After theory, implementation.
 % \begin{macro}{\get@sw@txt}
-% As the argument of \protect\cs{sameword} can contain an active character if we 
-% use \protect\package{inputenc} with \verb+utf8+ option instead of native UTF-8 engine, 
+% As the argument of \protect\cs{sameword} can contain an active character if we
+% use \protect\package{inputenc} with \verb+utf8+ option instead of native UTF-8 engine,
 % we store its detokenized content in a macro in order to allow the dynamic name of macro with \protect\cs{csname}.\footnote{See \url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/q/244538/7712}.}
 %
-% Because there is a bug with \protect\cs{detokenize} and \XeTeX\ when using non BMP characters\footnote{\url{http://sourceforge.net/p/xetex/bugs/108/}}, 
+% Because there is a bug with \protect\cs{detokenize} and \XeTeX\ when using non BMP characters\footnote{\url{http://sourceforge.net/p/xetex/bugs/108/}},
 % we detokenize only for non-\XeTeX engines. In any case, in \XeTeX a \protect\cs{csname} construction can contain UTF-8 characters without a problem, as UTF-8 characters are not managed with category codes, but instead read directly as UTF-8 characters.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\get@sw@txt}[1]{%
   \begingroup%
     \swnoexpands%
 %.   \end{macrocode}
-% Using case sensibility option. 
+% Using case sensibility option.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
     \ifsw@caseinsensitive%
       \def\@tmpa##1{\lowercase{##1}}%
@@ -8238,7 +8239,7 @@
     \fi%
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % And now, define \cs{sw@txt}.
-%   \begin{macrocode}  
+%   \begin{macrocode}
     \ifxetex%
       \@tmpa{\xdef\sw@txt{#1}}%
     \else%
@@ -8289,7 +8290,7 @@
   \unless\ifledRcol%
      \csnumgdef{sw@\sw@txt}{\csuse{sw@\sw@txt}+\@ne}%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% Then, write its value to the numbered file.  
+% Then, write its value to the numbered file.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
      \protected@write\linenum@out{}{\string\@sw{\sw@txt}{\csuse{sw@\sw@txt}}{#1}}%
 %    \end{macrocode}
@@ -8313,7 +8314,7 @@
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\@sw}
-% The command printed in the auxiliary files. 
+% The command printed in the auxiliary files.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\@sw}[3]{%
   \get@sw@txt{#1}%
@@ -8425,7 +8426,7 @@
       \else%
         \gl@p\sw@list@inedtext\to\@tmp%
         \edef\the@sw{\expandafter\@firstoftwo\@tmp}%
-        \edef\this@absline{\expandafter\@secondoftwo\@tmp}%       
+        \edef\this@absline{\expandafter\@secondoftwo\@tmp}%
       \fi%
       \ifcsdef{sw@\sw@txt @\this@absline @\the\section@numR @R}{%
         \numdef{\prev@line}{\this@absline-1}%
@@ -8500,15 +8501,15 @@
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\pstarts@typeset@L}
 % \begin{macro}{\pstarts@read@L}
-% The \cs{pstarts@typeset@L} counts the number of LEFT \cs{pstart} typeset. 
+% The \cs{pstarts@typeset@L} counts the number of LEFT \cs{pstart} typeset.
 % A left \cs{pstart} can be a \cs{pstart} typeset in normal mode, or \cs{pstart} typset in left column or page in parallel mode (with{\parpackage}).
 % In the first case, its value is increased at every \cs{pstart} command.
 % In the second case, its value is increased in \cs{Columns} or \cs{Pages} when we prepare to typeset a left \cs{pstart}.
-% The \cs{pstarts@readL} counts the number of LEFT \cs{pstart} read. 
+% The \cs{pstarts@readL} counts the number of LEFT \cs{pstart} read.
 % A left \cs{pstart} can be a  \cs{pstart} typeset in normal mode, or \cs{pstart} typset in left column or page in parallel mode (with{\parpackage}).
 % In the first case, its value is increased at every \cs{pstart} command.
 % In the second case, its value is increased at every \cs{pstarL}.
-% 
+%
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcount\pstarts@typeset@L%
 \newcount\pstarts@read@L%
@@ -8716,7 +8717,7 @@
     \ifstrempty{#2}{}{#2}%
     }%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% Restore standard \enquote{nobreak} and \enquote{autopar} settings. 
+% Restore standard \enquote{nobreak} and \enquote{autopar} settings.
 % Normally, \cs{if@nobreak} is true only immediately after a sectioning command (see latex.ltx file). As a \cs{pstart}\ …\ \cs{pend} structure can't contain any sectioning command, we set \cs{if@nobreak} to false.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
   \@nobreakfalse%
@@ -8813,7 +8814,7 @@
 % locally change \protect\cs{par} so that it will do our \protect\cs{pend} for us.
 %
 % The boolean \cs{ifautopar} is set to TRUE while \cs{autopar} is enabled, and the \cs{ifby@autopar} is set to TRUE at each \cs{pstart} automatically called by the \cs{autopar} feature. A manual \cs{pstart} will have a \cs{ifby@autopar} set to FALSE.
-% 
+%
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newif\ifautopar
 \newif\ifby@autopar%
@@ -8874,7 +8875,7 @@
 % \changes{v1.6.1}{2013/10/27}{Move the call to \protect\cs{inserthangingsymbol} to allow use \protect\cs{hfill} inside.}
 % \changes{v1.12.2}{2014/08/07}{Fix a bug with critical notes at the tops of pages (added by v12.0.0)}
 % The \cs{l@dunhbox@line} macro only \cs{unhbox}es one line, but packages like \cs{microtype} can override it as required.
-% 
+%
 %    \begin{macrocode}
  \newcommand*{\l@dunhbox@line}[1]{\unhbox #1}
  \newcommand*{\do@line}{%
@@ -8900,8 +8901,8 @@
   \fi%
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \changes{v1.12.0}{2014/08/05}{\protect\cs{do@line} is split in more little commands.}
-% Depending weither a sectioning command is called at this pstart or not 
-% we print sectioning command or normal line, 
+% Depending weither a sectioning command is called at this pstart or not
+% we print sectioning command or normal line,
 %    \begin{macrocode}
   \xifinlist{\the\pstarts@typeset@L}{\eled@sections@@}%
      {\print@eledsection}%
@@ -9007,7 +9008,7 @@
 % \subsubsection{Process for line containing \protect\cs{eledsection} command}
 % \begin{macro}{\print@eledsection}
 % \protect\cs{print@eledsection} to print sectioning command with line number.
-% It sets the correct spacing, depending whether a sectioning command was called at previous \protect\cs{pstart}, calls the sectioning command, prints the normal line outside of the paper, to be able to have critical footnotes. 
+% It sets the correct spacing, depending whether a sectioning command was called at previous \protect\cs{pstart}, calls the sectioning command, prints the normal line outside of the paper, to be able to have critical footnotes.
 % Because of how this prints, a vertical spacing correction is added.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\print@eledsection{%
@@ -9060,7 +9061,7 @@
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\dolinehook}
 % \begin{macro}{\doinsidelinehook}
-% These hight level commands just redefine the low level commands. 
+% These hight level commands just redefine the low level commands.
 % They have to be used be user, without \protect\cs{makeatletter}.
 % \changes{v1.12.5}{2014/08/31}{Added \protect\cs{dolinehook} and \protect\cs{doinsidelinehook}}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -9084,7 +9085,7 @@
   \fi%
 }%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% The auxiliary files command just store the information to be executed 
+% The auxiliary files command just store the information to be executed
 % when typesseting the specific line.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\@insidethisline}[1]{%
@@ -9122,7 +9123,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
-% 
+%
 % \begin{macro}{\l@dlsn@te}
 % \begin{macro}{\l@drsn@te}
 % Zero width boxes of the left and right sidenotes, together with their kerns, and, eventually, with additional space if we are in parallel columns typesetting.
@@ -9155,7 +9156,7 @@
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
-% 
+%
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\ledllfill}
 % \begin{macro}{\ledrlfill}
@@ -9415,7 +9416,7 @@
 % \begin{itemize}
 %  \item in marginal line numbers. This feature is implemented by associating annotations with the absolute line numbers when reading the auxiliary numbered files (\verb+.1+, \verb+.2+ etc.).
 %  \item in critical footnotes. This feature is implemented by associating start / end line number annotations with each \cs{edtext} when reading the auxiliary numbered files.
-% \item to crossref commands which refer to line numbers (to be completed when I will have resolved this issue). 
+% \item to crossref commands which refer to line numbers (to be completed when I will have resolved this issue).
 % \end{itemize}
 % \begin{macro}{\linenumannotation}
 % First, the user-level command, which only writes commands to the numbered files, storing the annotation.
@@ -9441,7 +9442,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\Xwraplinenumannotation@side}
 % The  \cs{Xwraplinenumannotation@ref} macro is applied to crossrefs made to line annotations. The \cs{Xwraplinenumannotation@side} macro is applied to line annotation in sides.
 % They must be modified by users using \cs{Xwraplinenumannotation}.
-% By default, they call \cs{textsuperscript}. 
+% By default, they call \cs{textsuperscript}.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\Xwraplinenumannotation@ref{\textsuperscript}%
 \def\Xwraplinenumannotation@side{\textsuperscript}%
@@ -9559,7 +9560,7 @@
 % check fails, then we disable the line-number display by setting the
 % counters to arbitrary but unequal values.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-           \ch@cksub@l@ck 
+           \ch@cksub@l@ck
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 % Now the line number case, which works the same way.
@@ -9567,7 +9568,7 @@
         \else
            \@l@dtempcntb=\line@num
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% Check on the \protect\cs{linenumberlist} 
+% Check on the \protect\cs{linenumberlist}
 % If it is \protect\cs{empty} use the standard
 % algorithm.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -9646,11 +9647,11 @@
                 \fi
                 \ifboolexpr{%
                   bool {l@dprintingcolumns}%
-                  and (% 
+                  and (%
                    (test {\ifdefstring{\linenum@OnlyPages@ForColumns}{left}}%
                    and test {\ifnumodd{\page@num}}%
                    )%
-                   or% 
+                   or%
                    (test {\ifdefstring{\linenum@OnlyPages@ForColumns}{right}}%
                    and not test {\ifnumodd{\page@num}}%
                    )%
@@ -9671,7 +9672,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
 %
-% Now fix the lock counters, if necessary. 
+% Now fix the lock counters, if necessary.
 % A value of $1$ is advanced to
 % $2$; $3$ advances to $0$; other values are unchanged.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -9788,7 +9789,7 @@
             \fi
         \fi
     \fi
-        
+
 }
 %
 
@@ -9797,7 +9798,7 @@
 \newcommand*{\leftpstartnum}{
     \ifpstartnum\thepstart
     \kern\linenumsep\fi
-    \global\pstartnumfalse    
+    \global\pstartnumfalse
 }
 \newcommand*{\rightpstartnum}{
     \ifpstartnum
@@ -9812,13 +9813,13 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
-% \section{Restoring footnotes and penalties} 
+% \section{Restoring footnotes and penalties}
 % Because of the paragraph decomposition process in order to number line, \macpackage\ must hack the standard way \TeX\ works in order to manage insertion of footnotes,  both critical and familiar.
 %
 % We need to call the \protect\cs{insert} commands not when the content of \protect\cs{pstart}\ldots\protect\cs{pend} is read by \TeX\, by when each individual line is typeset.
-% 
+%
 % Consequently, when reading the content of \protect\cs{pstart}\ldots\protect\cs{pend}, we store the insertion (footnotes) in an specific \macpackage's list, and we restore them to the vertical list when printing each individual line.
-% 
+%
 % \subsection{Add insertions to the vertical list}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\inserts@list}
@@ -9996,7 +9997,7 @@
 % The \protect\cs{flush@notes}
 % macro is called after the entire paragraph has been sliced up
 % and sent on to the vertical list.
-% If the number of notes to this paragraph has increased since the previous 
+% If the number of notes to this paragraph has increased since the previous
 % run of \TeX, then there can be leftover notes that have not yet been
 % printed. An appropriate error message will be printed elsewhere; but
 % it is best to go ahead and
@@ -10006,7 +10007,7 @@
 % of the paragraph. We can hope that is not
 % too far from the proper location, to which they will move on the next
 % run.
-% For the first run, we do not flush the notes, 
+% For the first run, we do not flush the notes,
 % as that means all the notes will be added at the end of numbered section,
 % and so, very far of the expected position
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -10049,7 +10050,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \subsection{Text before notes}
 % \begin{macro}{\set@Xtxtbeforenotes}
-% The \cs{set@Xtxtbeforenotes} macro resets the Xtxtbeforesnotes@\meta{series}@typeset boolean to false. Just before the first note of the \meta{series} in a page, the \cs{Xtextbeforenotes} will be inserted. 
+% The \cs{set@Xtxtbeforenotes} macro resets the Xtxtbeforesnotes@\meta{series}@typeset boolean to false. Just before the first note of the \meta{series} in a page, the \cs{Xtextbeforenotes} will be inserted.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\set@Xtxtbeforenotes}{%
   \unless\ifnocritical@%
@@ -10083,7 +10084,7 @@
 % \cs{insert@Xtxtbeforenotes}\marg{series}, called when inserting a familiar footnote, will insert the text before the note if it is not already inserted.
 % For paragraphed footnotes, it will insert it as a component of the first footnote.
 % For other types of footnotes, it will insert it as a regular footnote.
-% 
+%
 % \cs{insert@txtbeforenotesX} is the same for familiar footnotes.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\insert@Xtxtbeforenotes}[1]{%
@@ -10221,7 +10222,7 @@
         \xright@appenditem{{\csxdef{footnote@dir}{@RTLtrue}}}\to\inserts@list%Know the language used in the lemma
         \global\advance\insert@count \@ne%
     \else
-         \xright@appenditem{{\csxdef{footnote@dir}{@RTLfalse}}}\to\inserts@list%Know the language of lemma  
+         \xright@appenditem{{\csxdef{footnote@dir}{@RTLfalse}}}\to\inserts@list%Know the language of lemma
          \global\advance\insert@count \@ne%
     \fi%
     \xright@appenditem{{\csxdef{footnote@lang}{\expandonce\languagename}}}\to\inserts@list%Know the language of lemma
@@ -10232,7 +10233,7 @@
         \xright@appenditem{{\csxdef{footnote@dir}{@RTLtrue}}}\to\inserts@listR%Know the language of lemma
         \global\advance\insert@countR \@ne%
     \else
-         \xright@appenditem{{\csxdef{footnote@dir}{@RTLfalse}}}\to\inserts@listR%Know the language of lemma  
+         \xright@appenditem{{\csxdef{footnote@dir}{@RTLfalse}}}\to\inserts@listR%Know the language of lemma
          \global\advance\insert@countR \@ne%
     \fi
     \xright@appenditem{{\csxdef{footnote@lang}{\expandonce\languagename}}}\to\inserts@listR%Know the language of lemma
@@ -10263,7 +10264,7 @@
 % and parameter names. Hence, for the \texttt{A} series, the four macros
 % are called \protect\cs{vAfootnote}, \protect\cs{Afootfmt}, \protect\cs{Afootstart},
 % and \protect\cs{Afootgroup}.
-% 
+%
 % These macros are changed depending of the footnotes arrangement: ``normal'', ``paragraphed'', ``two columns'' or ``three columns''.
 % \subsection{General setup}
 % \begin{macro}{\footsplitskips}
@@ -10274,7 +10275,7 @@
 %    \item \protect\cs{splittopskip} (skip before last part of notes that flow from one page to another).
 %    \item \protect\cs{splitmaxdepth}.
 %    \item \protect\cs{floatingpenalty}, that is penalty values being added when a long note flows from one page to another.
-% Here, we let it to 0 when we are processing parallel pages in \protect\package{eledpar}, in order to allow notes to flow from left to right pages and \emph{vice-versa}. 
+% Here, we let it to 0 when we are processing parallel pages in \protect\package{eledpar}, in order to allow notes to flow from left to right pages and \emph{vice-versa}.
 % Otherwise, we let it to \protect\cs{@MM}, which is the standard \LaTeX\  \protect\cs{floatingpenalty}.
 % \end{itemize}
 % \changes{v0.7.0}{2005/02/18}{Added \protect\cs{footsplitskips} for use in many
@@ -10340,10 +10341,10 @@
 % \let\Afootnoterule=\normalfootnoterule
 % \end{verbatim}
 % (Read \thetexbook\ in order to understand what are the counter, skip and dimen  associated to an insertion.)
-% 
+%
 % Instead of repeating ourselves, we define a \protect\cs{Xarrangement@normal}
 % macro that makes all these assignments for us, for any given
-% series letter.  
+% series letter.
 % This command is called when people use \protect\cs{Xarrangement}\oarg{series}\verb+{normal}+
 
 %
@@ -10366,7 +10367,7 @@
 %  The \parpackage provides tools in order to confine notes to one side.
 % The mechanism is explained in the \parpackage's handbook.
 % For now, just retain we need to store default value of the counter associated to the notes \TeX's inserts.
- 
+
 %    \begin{macrocode}
   \csxdef{default@#1footins}{1000}%Use this to confine the  notes to one side only
 %    \end{macrocode}
@@ -10396,7 +10397,7 @@
 % in \PlainTeX{}, in which each footnote
 % is a separate paragraph.
 %
-% \protect\cs{normalvfootnote} takes the series letter as \verb"#1" 
+% \protect\cs{normalvfootnote} takes the series letter as \verb"#1"
 % and the entire text of the footnote is \verb"#2". It does the
 % \protect\cs{insert} for this note, calling on the \protect\cs{footfmt} macro for
 % this note series to format the text of the note.
@@ -10427,7 +10428,7 @@
   \fi\fi%
   \setXnotespositionliketwocolumns@{#1}%
   \spaceskip=\z@skip \xspaceskip=\z@skip%
-  \csname #1footfmt\endcsname #2{#1}%  
+  \csname #1footfmt\endcsname #2{#1}%
 }%
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
@@ -10504,7 +10505,7 @@
 % rudimentary---it uses \protect\cs{printlines}
 % to print just the range of line numbers,
 % followed by a square bracket, the lemma, and the note text.
-% 
+%
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \notbool{parapparatus@}{\newcommand*}{\newcommand}{\normalfootfmt}[4]{%
   \Xstorelineinfo{#1}{#4}%
@@ -10535,7 +10536,7 @@
 % space.
 %
 % But if the skip \protect\cs{Xprenotes@} is greater than 0~pt,
-% it is used instead of \protect\cs{skip}\protect\cs{footins} for the first printed series in one page. 
+% it is used instead of \protect\cs{skip}\protect\cs{footins} for the first printed series in one page.
 %
 % The \protect\cs{leftskip} and \protect\cs{rightskip} values
 % are both zeroed here.
@@ -10545,7 +10546,7 @@
 % this is necessary only
 % if you are using paragraphed footnotes, but we have put it here
 % and in the other \protect\cs{vfootnote} macros too so that the behavior of
-% \macpackage{} in this respect is general across all footnote types. 
+% \macpackage{} in this respect is general across all footnote types.
 % What this means is that any \protect\cs{leftskip}
 % and \protect\cs{rightskip} you specify applies to the main text, but not
 % the footnotes.  The footnotes continue to be of width \protect\cs{hsize}.
@@ -10570,7 +10571,7 @@
 %    And now, the problem of left and right skip for notes.
 % Especially when using one feature of \parpackage which allows to have the footnotes horizontal size as the size of columns printed by \protect\cs{Columns}.
 % Read \reff{width2columns} for the general description of the problem.
-%   \begin{macrocode} 
+%   \begin{macrocode}
   \leftskip0pt \rightskip0pt
   \ifl@dpairing\else%
      \hsize=\old@hsize%
@@ -10949,7 +10950,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\parafootgroup}
-% This \verb"footgroup" code is modelled on the macros in 
+% This \verb"footgroup" code is modelled on the macros in
 % \thetexbook, p.\,399.  The only difference is the \protect\cs{unpenalty}
 % in \protect\cs{makehboxofhboxes}, which is there to remove the penalty of
 % $0$ which was added to the end of each footnote by
@@ -10961,7 +10962,7 @@
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\parafootgroup}[1]{%
   \hsize=\expandafter\dimexpr\csuse{Xwidth@#1}\relax%
-  \unvbox\csname #1footins\endcsname 
+  \unvbox\csname #1footins\endcsname
   \ifcsstring{Xragged@#1}{L}{\RaggedLeft}{}%
   \ifcsstring{Xragged@#1}{R}{\RaggedRight}{}%
   \makehboxofhboxes
@@ -10998,7 +10999,7 @@
       \setXnotespositionliketwocolumns@{#1}%
       \print@Xfootnoterule{#1}%
   \fi%
-  \unvbox\csname mp#1footins\endcsname 
+  \unvbox\csname mp#1footins\endcsname
   \ifcsstring{Xragged@#1}{L}{\RaggedLeft}{}%
   \ifcsstring{Xragged@#1}{R}{\RaggedRight}{}%
   \makehboxofhboxes
@@ -11010,7 +11011,7 @@
 
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
-% 
+%
 % And finally, the two macros which are required to transform the long horizontal box stored  in the insert' box to a printable text.
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\makehboxofhboxes}
@@ -11032,8 +11033,8 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \paragraph{Insertion of the footnotes separator}
-%The command \protect\cs{Xinsertparafootsep}\marg{series} must be called at the beginning of \protect\cs{parafootftm}. 
-% \begin{macro}{\prevpage@num} 
+%The command \protect\cs{Xinsertparafootsep}\marg{series} must be called at the beginning of \protect\cs{parafootftm}.
+% \begin{macro}{\prevpage@num}
 % \changes{v1.8.0}{2013/12/13}{Correct \protect\cs{parafootsep} when using with ledgroup.}
 % \changes{v1.22.1}{2015/04/29}{Correct double symbol when using both \protect\cs{parafootsep} and \protect\cs{Xsymlinenum}.}
 % \begin{macro}{\Xinsertparafootsep}
@@ -11085,8 +11086,8 @@
 % the arguments so that they do not depend on white space.  Note also
 % the extra unboxing in \protect\cs{splitoff}, which allows the new \protect\cs{vbox} to
 % have its natural height as it goes into the alignment.
-% 
-% The \LaTeX\ \protect\cs{line} macro has no relationship to the 
+%
+% The \LaTeX\ \protect\cs{line} macro has no relationship to the
 % TeX \protect\cs{line}. The \LaTeX\ equivalent is \protect\cs{@@line}.
 % \changes{v2.7.0}{2015/11/29}{\protect\cs{rigidbalance} is split in \protect\cs{Xrigidbalance} and \protect\cs{rigidbalanceX}.}
 %
@@ -11195,7 +11196,7 @@
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\threecolvfootnote}
 % \protect\cs{threecolvfootnote}
-% This is the \protect\cs{vfootnote} command for three-column notes. 
+% This is the \protect\cs{vfootnote} command for three-column notes.
 % However, most of the code is deported on \cs{threecolvfootnote@inserted}.
 % The call to \protect\cs{Xnotefontsize@\meta{s}} ensures that the
 % \protect\cs{splittopskip} and \protect\cs{splitmaxdepth} take their values
@@ -11242,7 +11243,7 @@
 % text of the \verb"-footnote" command \verb+#4+ optional  (for backward compatibility): the series.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-\notbool{parapparatus@}{\newcommand*}{\newcommand}{\threecolfootfmt}[4]{% 
+\notbool{parapparatus@}{\newcommand*}{\newcommand}{\threecolfootfmt}[4]{%
   \Xstorelineinfo{#1}{#4}%
   \threecol@begin@insert{#4}%
   \hspace{\parindent}%
@@ -11272,7 +11273,7 @@
   \parindent=\@tempdima%
   \strut%
 }%
-%    \end{macrocode} 
+%    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\threecolfootgroup}
 % And here is the \verb"footgroup" macro that is called within the
@@ -11492,7 +11493,7 @@
 % Note that these commands are not directly called by \macpackage, but are enclosed as default value of specific hooks.
 % Consequently, people should not redefine them, but use instead the \cs{Xlinerangeseparator}, \cs{Xendlinerangeseparator}, \cs{Xsublinesep}, \cs{Xendsublinesep} and \cs{Xlemmaseparator} macros.
 %
-% With \protect\package{polyglossia}, each critical note has a \protect\cs{footnote@lang} which shows the language of the lemma, 
+% With \protect\package{polyglossia}, each critical note has a \protect\cs{footnote@lang} which shows the language of the lemma,
 % and which can be used to switch the bracket from right to left.
 % \changes{v1.4.0}{2012/11/16}{Switch the right bracket to a left bracket when the lemma is RTL (needs polyglossia or LuaTeX).}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -11533,15 +11534,15 @@
     }%
 }
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% 
+%
 % \end{macro}
 % \subsubsection{Lemma printing}
-% 
+%
 % \begin{macro}{\print@lemma}
 % \cs{print@lemma} is called inside critical footnotes to print the lemma and the lemma separator (\#1: line number and font information, \#2: lemma, \#3: series).
 % \changes{v2.10.0}{2016/05/08}{Code refactoring between \protect\cs{parafootfmt}, \protect\cs{twocolfootfmt}, \protect\cs{threecolfootfmt} and \protect\cs{normalfootfmt}.}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-% 
+%
 \newcommand{\print@lemma}[3]{%
   \bgroup%
     \nottoggle{Xlemmadisablefontselection@#3}%
@@ -11576,7 +11577,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\Xstorelineinfo}
 % The \cs{Xstorelineinfo} macro is used to store some data about line number of the current critical footnote, data which will be reused later for the \cs{Xnumberonlyfirstinline} and related setting.
 %
-% \#1 footnote specification for the current footnote ; 
+% \#1 footnote specification for the current footnote ;
 % \#2 footnote series.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\Xstorelineinfo}[2]{%
@@ -11591,15 +11592,15 @@
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\printlinefootnote}
-% The \protect\cs{printlinefootnote} macro is called in each \protect\cs{<type>footfmt} command. 
+% The \protect\cs{printlinefootnote} macro is called in each \protect\cs{<type>footfmt} command.
 % It controls whether the line number is printed or not, according to the series options. Its first argument is the information about lines; its second is the series of the footnote.
-% The printing of the line number is shared in 
+% The printing of the line number is shared in
 % \protect\cs{printlinefootnotenumbers}.
 % \changes{v1.18.0}{2015/02/23}{Code refactoring in \protect\cs{printlinefootnote}: the printing of the numbers are factorized in  \protect\cs{printlinefootnotearea}}
 %  \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\printlinefootnote}[2]{%
    \iftoggle{nonum@}{%Try if the line number must printed for this specific not (by default, yes)
-   \hspace{\csuse{Xinplaceofnumber@#2}}% 
+   \hspace{\csuse{Xinplaceofnumber@#2}}%
    }%
    {%
        {%
@@ -11712,7 +11713,7 @@
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\printXbeforenumber}
-% This macro prints a space (before the line number) in footnote. 
+% This macro prints a space (before the line number) in footnote.
 % It is called by \protect\cs{printlinefootnotearea}.
 % Its only argument is the note series (A, B, C, etc.)
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -11722,7 +11723,7 @@
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\printXafternumber}
-% This macro prints the space, adding eventually a \protect\cs{nobreak},  after the line number, in footnote. 
+% This macro prints the space, adding eventually a \protect\cs{nobreak},  after the line number, in footnote.
 % It is called by \protect\cs{printlinefootnotearea}.
 % Its only argument is the series
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -11766,8 +11767,8 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\@annot@start@print}
 % \begin{macro}{\@annot@end@print}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifl@d@pnum 
-\newif\ifl@d@ssub 
+\newif\ifl@d@pnum
+\newif\ifl@d@ssub
 \newif\ifl@d@elin
 \newif\ifl@d@esl
 \newif\ifl@d@dash
@@ -11798,13 +11799,13 @@
 % \protect\cs{l@dparsefootspec}\marg{spec}\marg{lemma}\marg{text} parses a footnote
 % specification. \meta{lemma} and \meta{text} are the lemma and text
 % respectively. \meta{spec} is the line and page number and lemma font
-% specifier in \protect\cs{l@d@nums} style format. 
-% The real work is done 
+% specifier in \protect\cs{l@d@nums} style format.
+% The real work is done
 % by \protect\cs{l@dp@rsefootspec} which defines macros holding the numeric values.
 % In many cases, this last command is called directly.
 % Just a reminder of the arguments: \\
 % \verb?\printlines    #1      |  #2  |   #3    |    #4    |  #5  |  #6     |   #7?\\
-% \verb?\printlines start-page | line | subline | end-page | line | subline | font?flag 
+% \verb?\printlines start-page | line | subline | end-page | line | subline | font?flag
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\l@dparsefootspec}[3]{\l@dp@rsefootspec#1|}
 \def\l@dp@rsefootspec#1|#2|#3|#4|#5|#6|#7|{%
@@ -11835,10 +11836,10 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
 %
-% 
+%
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\setprintlines}
-% 
+%
 % The macro \protect\cs{setprintlines} does the work of deciding what numbers should
 % be printed. Its arguments are the same as the first 6 of \protect\cs{printlines}.
 % \changes{v0.7.0}{2005/02/18}{Added \protect\cs{setprintlines} for use by \protect\cs{printlines}}
@@ -11856,7 +11857,7 @@
 %    \begin{macrocode}
   \ifbypage@
      \ifnum#4=#1 \else
-        \l@d@pnumtrue 
+        \l@d@pnumtrue
         \l@d@dashtrue
      \fi
   \fi
@@ -11948,12 +11949,12 @@
         \ifboolexpr{%
           (%
                togl {Xtwolinesbutnotmore@\@currentseries}%
-               and not% 
+               and not%
                  (%
-                  bool {istwofollowinglines@}%              
+                  bool {istwofollowinglines@}%
                  )%
           )%
-          or% 
+          or%
           (%
              (not test{\ifnumequal{#1}{#4}})%
                and togl{Xtwolinesonlyinsamepage@\@currentseries}%
@@ -11982,7 +11983,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\setistwofollowinglines}
-% The \protect\cs{ifistwofollowinglines} boolean, used by the \protect\cs{Xtwolines} and related setting, is set to true by \protect\cs{setistwofollowinglines}. 
+% The \protect\cs{ifistwofollowinglines} boolean, used by the \protect\cs{Xtwolines} and related setting, is set to true by \protect\cs{setistwofollowinglines}.
 % This command takes the following arguments:
 % \begin{itemize}
 %  \item \verb+#1+ First page number.
@@ -12023,7 +12024,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\printlines}
 % \changes{v2.5.0}{2015/11/13}{\protect\cs{printlines} takes an eighth argument: the line flag}
 % So, we have decided which part of line number sets will be printed depending of these value.
-% Now we are ready to print them. 
+% Now we are ready to print them.
 % If the lineation is by pstart, we print the pstart.
 % \changes{v0.15.0}{2012/06/11}{Line numbering can be reset at each pstart.}
 % Arguments are 1) start page number 2) start line number 3) start subline number 4) end page number 5) end line number 6) end subline number 7) font specification 8) side flag
@@ -12073,7 +12074,7 @@
   \egroup%
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % Then print the dash + end line number, or the range symbol.
-% \changes{v0.3.0}{2004/02/14}{Added \protect\cs{linenumr@p} and \protect\cs{sublinenumr@p} 
+% \changes{v0.3.0}{2004/02/14}{Added \protect\cs{linenumr@p} and \protect\cs{sublinenumr@p}
 %        to \protect\cs{printlines}}
 % \changes{v1.20.0}{2015/03/22}{Added \protect\cs{ifl@d@Xmorethantwolines} and \protect\cs{ifl@d@Xmorethantwolines} to \protect\cs{printlines}}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -12087,7 +12088,7 @@
       \csuse{Xtwolines@\@currentseries}%
     \fi%
   \else%
-    \ifl@d@dash% 
+    \ifl@d@dash%
       \ifdefined\linerangesep@%
         \linerangesep@%
       \else%
@@ -12101,7 +12102,7 @@
        \wrap@edcrossref{\@this@crossref@end}{#4}%
        \csuse{Xpagelinesep@\@currentseries}%
     \fi%
-    \ifl@d@elin% 
+    \ifl@d@elin%
       \wrap@edcrossref{\@this@crossref@end}{%
         \linenumrep{#5}%
         \iftoggle{Xlineflag@\@currentseries}{#8}{}%
@@ -12128,7 +12129,7 @@
 % \subsubsection{Footnote grouped by line}
 % \begin{macro}{\prepare@Xgroupbyline}
 % \cs{prepare@Xgroupbyline} is a macro called on the \cs{meta{XXX}vfootnote} if \cs{Xgroupbyline} is set to true, instead of calling \cs{insert} directly.
-%    \begin{macrocode}  
+%    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\prepare@Xgroupbyline}[3]{%
   \iftoggle{Xgroupbylineseparetwolines@#1}{%
     \l@dparsefootspec#2%
@@ -12184,7 +12185,7 @@
 %    The original \edmac{} provided users with five series of critical footnotes (\protect\cs{Afootnote} \protect\cs{Bfootnote}  \protect\cs{Cfootnote} \protect\cs{Dfootnote} \protect\cs{Efootnote}),
 % and \LaTeX\ provides a single numbered footnote. The \macpackage{} package
 % uses the \edmac{} mechanism to provide six series of numbered footnotes.
-% 
+%
 %    First, though, the \protect\package{footmisc} package has an option whereby
 % two or more consecutive \protect\cs{footnote}s have their marks separated
 % by commas. This seemed to Peter Wilson such a useful ability that it was provided
@@ -12197,7 +12198,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\multfootsep}
 % These macros may have been defined by the \protect\ltxclass{memoir} class,
 % are provided by the \protect\package{footmisc} package and perhaps
-% by other footnote packages. 
+% by other footnote packages.
 % That is why we use \protect\cs{providecommand} and not \protect\cs{newcommand}.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \providecommand*{\multiplefootnotemarker}{3sp}
@@ -12208,7 +12209,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\m@mmf@prepare}
-% A pair of self-cancelling kerns. This may have been defined in the 
+% A pair of self-cancelling kerns. This may have been defined in the
 % \protect\ltxclass{memoir} class.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \providecommand*{\m@mmf@prepare}{%
@@ -12367,7 +12368,7 @@
     {%
       \setcounter{footnote}{#1}%
       \def\@thefnmark{\thefootnote}%
-    }%  
+    }%
 }%
 
 \newcommand{\vl@dbfnote}[2]{%
@@ -12404,13 +12405,13 @@
 \newcommand{\postbodyfootmark}{%
   \m@mmf@prepare
   \ifhmode\spacefactor\@x@sf\fi\relax}
-    
+
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
-% 
+%
 % \subsection{Footnote arrangement}
-%  
+%
 % \subsubsection{User level macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\arrangementX}
 % \protect\cs{arrangementX}\oarg{s}\marg{arrangement}
@@ -12434,7 +12435,7 @@
 % \subsubsection{Normal footnotes}
 % \begin{macro}{\normal@footnotemarkX}
 % \protect\cs{normal@footnotemarkX}\marg{series} sets up the typesetting of the
-% marker at the point where the footnote is called for. 
+% marker at the point where the footnote is called for.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\normal@footnotemarkX}[1]{%
   \prebodyfootmark
@@ -12445,7 +12446,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\normalbodyfootmarkX}
-% The \protect\cs{normalbodyfootmarkX}\marg{series} \emph{really} typesets the 
+% The \protect\cs{normalbodyfootmarkX}\marg{series} \emph{really} typesets the
 % in-text marker. The style is the normal superscript.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\normalbodyfootmarkX}[1]{%
@@ -12483,7 +12484,7 @@
 \newcommand*{\mpnormalvfootnoteX}[2]{%
   \get@thisfootnoteX{#1}%
   \get@fnmarkX{#1}{\thisc@footnote}%
-  \edef\this@footnoteX@reading{\the\csname footnote#1@reading\endcsname}% 
+  \edef\this@footnoteX@reading{\the\csname footnote#1@reading\endcsname}%
   \global\setbox\@nameuse{mpfootins#1}\vbox{%
     \unvbox\@nameuse{mpfootins#1}
     \noindent\csuse{bhooknoteX@#1}%
@@ -12522,7 +12523,7 @@
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\normalfootfootmarkX}
 % \protect\cs{normalfootfootmarkX}\marg{series} is called by \protect\cs{normalfootfmtX}
-% to typeset the footnote marker in the footer before the footnote text. 
+% to typeset the footnote marker in the footer before the footnote text.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\normalfootfootmarkX}[1]{%
   \textsuperscript{\@nameuse{@thefnmark#1}}}
@@ -12531,14 +12532,14 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\normalfootstartX}
-% \protect\cs{normalfootstartX}\marg{series} is the \meta{series} footnote 
+% \protect\cs{normalfootstartX}\marg{series} is the \meta{series} footnote
 % starting macro used in the output routine.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\normalfootstartX}[1]{%
     \ifdimequal{0pt}{\prenotesX@}{}%
       {%
       \iftoggle{prenotesX@}{%
-           \togglefalse{prenotesX@}% 
+           \togglefalse{prenotesX@}%
            \skip\csname footins#1\endcsname=%
              \glueexpr\csuse{prenotesX@}+\csuse{afterruleX@#1}\relax%
            }%
@@ -12669,7 +12670,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\vbfnoteX}
 % This command calls the correct footnote-inserting commands.
-% 
+%
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\vbfnoteX}[3]{%
   \get@fnmarkX{#1}{#3}%
@@ -12759,7 +12760,7 @@
 %
 %    The following macros set footnotes in two columns. It is assumed
 % that the length of each footnote is less than the column width.
-% 
+%
 % \begin{macro}{\arrangementX@twocol}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\arrangementX@twocol}[1]{%
@@ -12883,7 +12884,7 @@
 %
 %    The following macros set footnotes in three columns. It is assumed
 % that the length of each footnote is less than the column width.
-% 
+%
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\arrangementX@threecol}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -13003,7 +13004,7 @@
 % \subsubsection{Paragraphed footnotes}
 %
 %    The following macros set footnotes as one paragraph.
-% 
+%
 % \begin{macro}{\arrangementX@threecol}
 % \changes{v1.15.0}{2015/01/12}{Correct bug with paragraphed familiar footnotes setting.}
 % \protect\cs{footparagraphX}\marg{series}
@@ -13205,7 +13206,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
 % \paragraph{Insertion of the footnotes separator}
-% The command \protect\cs{insertparafootsepX}\marg{series} must be called at the beginning of \protect\cs{parafootftmX}. 
+% The command \protect\cs{insertparafootsepX}\marg{series} must be called at the beginning of \protect\cs{parafootftmX}.
 % \begin{macro}{\insertparafootsepX}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\insertparafootsepX}[1]{%
@@ -13277,11 +13278,11 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\ledsetnormalparstuff@common}
 % \begin{macro}{\Xledsetnormalparstuff}
 % \begin{macro}{\ledsetnormalparstuffX}
-% 
+%
 % \changes{v1.4.0}{2012/11/16}{Direction of footnotes with polyglossia.}
 % \changes{v1.21.0}{2015/04/13}{\protect\cs{ledsetnormalparstuff} is deprecated and becomes \protect\cs{ledsetnormalparstuffX} and \protect\cs{Xledsetnormalparstuff}.}
 % \changes{v2.1.3}{2015/09/05}{Replaced \protect\cs{noindent} with \protect\cs{parindent} set to 0pt.}
-%    \begin{macrocode} 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\ledsetnormalparstuff@common}{%
   \ifluatex%
    \ifdefstring{\footnote@luatextextdir}{TLT}{}%
@@ -13353,8 +13354,8 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\setXnotespositionliketwocolumns@}
 % \begin{macro}{\setnotesXpositionliketwocolumns@}
 % These two commands set the position of the critical / familiar
-% footnotes, depending on the hooks 
-% \verb+Xnoteswidthliketwocolumns+ and \verb+noteswidthliketwocolumnsX+. 
+% footnotes, depending on the hooks
+% \verb+Xnoteswidthliketwocolumns+ and \verb+noteswidthliketwocolumnsX+.
 % They call commands which are defined only in \parpackage, because this feature has no sens without \parpackage.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\setXnotespositionliketwocolumns@}[1]{%
@@ -13389,7 +13390,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
 % \section{Footnotes' rule}
-% Because the footnotes' rules can be shifted to the right when footnotes are set like two columns, we do not print them directly, but we put them in a \protect\cs{vbox}.   
+% Because the footnotes' rules can be shifted to the right when footnotes are set like two columns, we do not print them directly, but we put them in a \protect\cs{vbox}.
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\print@Xfootnoterule}
 % \begin{macro}{\print@footnoteXrule}
@@ -13417,7 +13418,7 @@
 % \section{Specific skip for first series of footnotes}\label{skipfirstseries}
 % \subsection{Overview}
 % \protect\cs{Xbeforenotes} inserts a specific skip for the first series of notes in a page.
-% As we can't know in advance which series will be the first, we call \protect\cs{prepare@Xprenotes} before inserting any critical notes in order to prevent page number overlapping. 
+% As we can't know in advance which series will be the first, we call \protect\cs{prepare@Xprenotes} before inserting any critical notes in order to prevent page number overlapping.
 % \begin{enumerate}
 %   \item If it is the first note of the current page, it changes the footnote skip for the series to the value specified to \protect\cs{Xbeforenotes}. It also keeps the series of the note as the first one of the current page.
 %   \item If it is not the first note of the current page:
@@ -13426,11 +13427,11 @@
 %     \item If the current series is printed before the series kept as the first of the current page, then it changes the footnote skip of the current series to the value normally used by the series which was marked as the first of the page. It also keeps the current series as the new first one of the current page.
 %   \end{itemize}
 % \end{enumerate}
-% 
+%
 %
 % For example, suppose the series order is A,B. We call first a \protect\cs{Bfootnote} and a \protect\cs{Afootnote}. The only skips used are, finally, the skip specific to the first series of the page, and the skip for the B series. If we have not called \protect\cs{Afootnote}, the only skip used is the skip specific to the first series of the page.
-% 
-% That is perfect. 
+%
+% That is perfect.
 %
 %
 % The series skip and the first series of the current page are reset before the footnotes are printed. Then, the footstart macros manage the problem of the first series of the page.
@@ -13543,7 +13544,7 @@
 % line numbers for the endnotes are generated by the same mechanism
 % we use for the footnotes, so that there is no need to defer any
 % writing to catch information from the output routine.
-% The argument of these two command is the series letter. 
+% The argument of these two command is the series letter.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\l@dend@open}[1]{%
   \global\booltrue{l@dend@#1}%
@@ -13761,7 +13762,7 @@
       {\dolistloop{\@series}}%
       {\docsvlist{#1}}%
   }{\led@err@toendnotes@outsidenumbering}%
-}% 
+}%
 \WithSuffix\newcommandx\toendnotes*[2][1,usedefault]{%
   \ifboolexpr{bool{numbering} or bool{numberingR}}{%
     \def\do##1{%
@@ -13772,7 +13773,7 @@
       {\dolistloop{\@series}}%
       {\docsvlist{#1}}%
   }{\led@err@toendnotes@outsidenumbering}%
-}% 
+}%
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
@@ -13802,7 +13803,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\doendnotesbysection}
 % \protect\cs{doendnotesbysection} is a variant of the previous macro.
-% While \protect\cs{doendnotes} print endnotes for all of numbered sections 
+% While \protect\cs{doendnotes} print endnotes for all of numbered sections
 % \protect\cs{doendnotesbysection} print the endnotes for the first numbered section at its first call for a series, then for the second section at its second call for the same series, then for the third section at its third call for the same series, and so on.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\doendnotesbysection}[1]{%
@@ -13830,7 +13831,7 @@
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \begin{macro}{\setprintendlines}
 % The \protect\cs{printendlines} macro is similar to \protect\cs{printlines} but is
-% for printing endnotes rather than footnotes. 
+% for printing endnotes rather than footnotes.
 %
 %    The principal difference between foot- and endnotes is that footnotes
 % are printed on the page where they are specified but endnotes
@@ -13854,7 +13855,7 @@
 % the ending page number is different
 %    \begin{macrocode}
   \ifnum#4=#1 \else
-    \l@d@pnumtrue 
+    \l@d@pnumtrue
     \l@d@dashtrue
   \fi
 %    \end{macrocode}
@@ -13946,12 +13947,12 @@
         \ifboolexpr{%
           (%
                togl {Xendtwolinesbutnotmore@\@currentseries}%
-               and not% 
+               and not%
                  (%
-                  bool {istwofollowinglines@}%              
+                  bool {istwofollowinglines@}%
                  )%
           )%
-          or% 
+          or%
           (%
              (not test{\ifnumequal{#1}{#4}})%
                and togl{Xendtwolinesonlyinsamepage@\@currentseries}%
@@ -13980,7 +13981,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\printendlines}
-% Now we are ready to print it all. 
+% Now we are ready to print it all.
 % \changes{v0.3.0}{2004/02/14}{Added \protect\cs{linenumr@p} and \protect\cs{sublinenumr@p}
 %              to \protect\cs{printendlines}}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -14003,7 +14004,7 @@
 % Then, print the starting page number-
 %    \begin{macrocode}
   \ifboolexpr{%
-    (%  
+    (%
       test{\ifcsstring{prevpagenum@\@currentseries}{#1}}%
         and not%
       (togl{Xendpagenumberonlyfirstifsingle@\@currentseries} and bool{l@d@pnum})%
@@ -14050,7 +14051,7 @@
   }%
   \iftoggle{Xendlineflag@\@currentseries}{\ifledRcol@\@Rlineflag\fi}{}%
   \ifl@d@ssub%
-    \csuse{Xendsublinesep@\@currentseries}% 
+    \csuse{Xendsublinesep@\@currentseries}%
     \wrap@edcrossref{\@this@crossref@start}{%
       \ifledRcol@%
         \sublinenumrepR{#3}%
@@ -14121,9 +14122,9 @@
       \iftoggle{Xendlineflag@\@currentseries}{\ifledRcol@\@Rlineflag\fi}{}%
     \fi%
     \ifl@d@esl%
-      \ifl@d@elin% 
+      \ifl@d@elin%
         \csuse{Xendsublinesep@\@currentseries}%
-      \fi% 
+      \fi%
       \wrap@edcrossref{\@this@crossref@end}{%
         \ifledRcol@%
           \sublinenumrepR{#6}%
@@ -14226,10 +14227,10 @@
       \csgdef{Xnotefontsize@#1}{\footnotesize}%
       \csgdef{Xbhooknote@#1}{}%
       \csgdef{Xbhookgroup@#1}{}%
-      
+
       \csgdef{Xboxlinenum@#1}{0pt}%
       \csgdef{Xboxlinenumalign@#1}{L}%
-      
+
       \csgdef{Xboxstartlinenum@#1}{0pt}%
       \csgdef{Xboxendlinenum@#1}{0pt}%
 
@@ -14264,7 +14265,7 @@
       \csgdef{Xinplaceoflemmaseparator@#1}{1em}%
       \csgdef{Xbeforenotes@#1}{1.2em \@plus .6em \@minus .6em}
       \csgdef{Xafterrule@#1}{0pt}
-      
+
       \csgdef{Xtxtbeforenotes@#1}{}
       \newtoggle{Xtxtbeforesnotes@#1@typeset}%Not directly used by user, but internal
       \newtoggle{Xtxtbeforenotesonlyonce@#1}%
@@ -14274,7 +14275,7 @@
       \csgdef{Xparafootsep@#1}{}%
       \csgdef{Xafternote@#1}{1em plus.4em minus.4em}
       \csgdef{Xlinerangeseparator@#1}{\endashchar}%
-      
+
       \csgdef{Xlemmafont@#1}{}%
       \csgdef{Xwraplemma@#1}{}
       \csgdef{Xwidth@#1}{\hsize}%
@@ -14305,11 +14306,11 @@
             \ifnumberedpar@%
                 \ifledRcol%
                    \ifluatex%
-                       \footnotelang@lua[R]%  
+                       \footnotelang@lua[R]%
                    \fi%
                    \@ifundefined{xpg@main@language}%if polyglossia
                          {}%
-                         {\footnotelang@poly[R]}%          
+                         {\footnotelang@poly[R]}%
                     \footnoteoptions@{R}{##1}{true}%
                     \xright@appenditem{%
                       \ifbool{indtl@innote}%
@@ -14329,7 +14330,7 @@
                       \noexpand\parse@annot\l@current@annotR|%
                       \noexpand\csuse{v#1footnote}{#1}%
                        {{\l@d@nums}{\expandonce\@tag}{\expandonce\content}}%
-                      \noexpand\Xnote@false% 
+                      \noexpand\Xnote@false%
                       \unexpanded{\advance\@edindex@fornote@\m@ne}%
                       \unexpanded{\undef\@this@crossref@start}%
                       \unexpanded{\undef\@this@crossref@end}%
@@ -14462,7 +14463,7 @@
               \prepare@prenotesX{#1}%
               \newcommand{\content}{##1}%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% If we use the \cs{csquotes} package, we reset the quotation level. 
+% If we use the \cs{csquotes} package, we reset the quotation level.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
               \ifdefined\csq@qlevel%
                 \csq@qlevel=0\relax%
@@ -14528,7 +14529,7 @@
 %    \begin{macrocode}
       \expandafter\gappto\expandafter\no@expands\expandafter{\expandafter\let\csname footnote#1\endcsname\@gobble}%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-%    And now, define \cs{footnoteXmark} and \cs{footnoteXtext}, equivalent to classical\cs{footnotemark} and \cs{footnotetext}. 
+%    And now, define \cs{footnoteXmark} and \cs{footnoteXtext}, equivalent to classical\cs{footnotemark} and \cs{footnotetext}.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
       \expandafter\newcommand\csname footnote#1mark\endcsname{%
          \begingroup%
@@ -14551,7 +14552,7 @@
   \fi
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \subsection{The endnotes}
-% \changes{v2.0.0}{2015/07/19}{One endnotes file by series.}  
+% \changes{v2.0.0}{2015/07/19}{One endnotes file by series.}
 % Endnotes are commands like \protect\cs{Xendnote}, where X is a series letter.
 % First, we check for the \verb+noend+ options.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -14566,8 +14567,8 @@
 % \meta{jobname}\file{.Xend}.
 % \protect\cs{l@d@end} is the output stream number for
 % this file, and \protect\cs{ifl@dend@X} is a flag that is \verb"true" when the file is open.
-% 
-% 
+%
+%
 %    \begin{macrocode}
       \expandafter\newwrite\csname l@d@#1end\endcsname%
       \expandafter\newif\csname ifl@dend@#1\endcsname%
@@ -14639,7 +14640,7 @@
 %    \begin{macrocode}
    \global\expandafter\newcount\csname #1end@bysection\endcsname%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% 
+%
 % \subsubsection{The options}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
       \csgdef{Xendwraplemma@#1}{}
@@ -14652,15 +14653,15 @@
       \csgdef{Xendnotenumfont@#1}{\normalfont}%
       \csgdef{Xendnotefontsize@#1}{\footnotesize}%
       \csgdef{Xendbhooknote@#1}{}%
-      
+
       \csgdef{Xendsublinesep@#1}{\fullstop}%
-      
+
       \csgdef{Xendbeforenumber@#1}{0pt}
       \csgdef{Xendafternumber@#1}{0.5em}
-      
+
       \csgdef{Xendboxlinenum@#1}{0pt}%
       \csgdef{Xendboxlinenumalign@#1}{L}%
-      
+
       \csgdef{Xendboxstartlinenum@#1}{0pt}%
       \csgdef{Xendboxendlinenum@#1}{0pt}%
 
@@ -14668,18 +14669,18 @@
       \csgdef{Xendbeforelemmaseparator@#1}{0em}%
       \csgdef{Xendafterlemmaseparator@#1}{0.5em}%
       \csgdef{Xendinplaceoflemmaseparator@#1}{0.5em}%
-      
+
       \newtoggle{Xendparagraph@#1}%
       \csgdef{Xendafternote@#1}{1em plus.4em minus.4em}%
       \csgdef{Xendsep@#1}{}%
-      
+
       \csgdef{Xendinplaceofnumber@#1}{0pt}%
       \newtoggle{Xendnonumber@#1}%
-      
+
       \csgdef{Xendhangindent@#1}{0pt}%
       \newtoggle{Xendnumberonlyfirstinline@#1}%
       \newtoggle{Xendnumberonlyfirstintwolines@#1}%
- 
+
       \csgdef{Xendbeforesymlinenum@#1}{\csuse{Xendbeforenumber@#1}}%
       \csgdef{Xendaftersymlinenum@#1}{\csuse{Xendafternumber@#1}}%
       \csgdef{Xendsymlinenum@#1}{}%
@@ -14689,21 +14690,21 @@
       \csgdef{Xendehooklinenumber@#1}{}%
       \csgdef{Xendbhookinplaceofnumber@#1}{}%
       \csgdef{Xendehookinplaceofnumber@#1}{}%
-      
+
       \csgdef{Xendlinerangeseparator@#1}{\endashchar}%
-      
+
       \csgdef{Xendbeforepagenumber@#1}{p.}%
       \csgdef{Xendafterpagenumber@#1}{) }%
       \csgdef{Xendlineprefixsingle@#1}{}%
       \csgdef{Xendlineprefixmore@#1}{}%
-      
+
       \newtoggle{Xendlineflag@#1}
-     
+
       \csgdef{Xendlemmafont@#1}{}%
 
       \csgdef{Xendlinenumannotationposition@#1}{after}%
       \csgdef{Xendwraplinenumannotation@#1}{\textsuperscript}%
-      
+
       \newtoggle{Xendpagenumberonlyfirst@#1}%
       \newtoggle{Xendpagenumberonlyfirstifsingle@#1}%
       \newtoggle{Xendpagenumberonlyfirstintwo@#1}%
@@ -14711,8 +14712,8 @@
       \csgdef{Xendinplaceofpagenumber@#1}{0pt}%
 
       \csgdef{Xendtxtbeforenotes@#1}{}%
-      \newtoggle{Xendfirstnote@#1}%Not a hook, but used to apply Xendtxtbeforenotes 
-  
+      \newtoggle{Xendfirstnote@#1}%Not a hook, but used to apply Xendtxtbeforenotes
+
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % End of endnotes declaration
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -14761,7 +14762,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \subsection{Test series order}
 % \begin{macro}{\ifseriesbefore}
-% \protect\cs{ifseriesbefore}\marg{seriesA}\marg{seriesB}\marg{true}\marg{false} expands \meta{true} if \meta{seriesA} is printed before \meta{seriesB}, expands \meta{false} otherwise. 
+% \protect\cs{ifseriesbefore}\marg{seriesA}\marg{seriesB}\marg{true}\marg{false} expands \meta{true} if \meta{seriesA} is printed before \meta{seriesB}, expands \meta{false} otherwise.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\ifseriesbefore}[4]{%
  \StrPosition{\@series}{#1}[\@first]%
@@ -14801,9 +14802,9 @@
 % Some other, getting a hook name, generate the user level commands.
 %
 %
-% 
+%
 % \subsubsection{Tools to set options}
-% \begin{macro}{\settoggle@series} 
+% \begin{macro}{\settoggle@series}
 % \changes{v1.1.0}{2012/09/25}{\protect\cs{settoggle@series} switch the global value of the toggle, not only the local value.}
 % \changes{v1.13.0}{2014/09/16}{\protect\cs{settoggle@series} can take an optional arguments to reload series setup.}
 % \protect\cs{settoggle@series}\marg{series}\marg{toggle}\marg{value} is a generic command to switch toggles for some series.
@@ -14838,8 +14839,8 @@
 }
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\setcommand@series} 
-% \protect\cs{setcommand@series}\marg{series}\marg{command}\marg{value} is a generic command to store hook's value into commands specific to some  series. 
+% \begin{macro}{\setcommand@series}
+% \protect\cs{setcommand@series}\marg{series}\marg{command}\marg{value} is a generic command to store hook's value into commands specific to some  series.
 % The arguments are:
 % \begin{itemize}
 %   \item \verb+#1+ (mandatory): the series for which the hooks should be set. If empty, all the series will be affected.
@@ -14875,7 +14876,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\newhookcommand@series}
 % \protect\cs{newhookcommand@series}\protect\cs{command names} is a generic command to add new commands for hooks, like \protect\cs{Xhsizetwocol}.
 % The first argument is the name of the hook, the second a comma-separated list of pseudo-series where the hook can be used, like \verb+appref+ in the case of \protect\cs{Xtwolines}.
-% The second argument is also used to create commands named \protect\cs{<hookname><pseudoseries>}, 
+% The second argument is also used to create commands named \protect\cs{<hookname><pseudoseries>},
 % like \protect\cs{Xtwolinesappref}.
 % \changes{v1.21.0}{2015/04/13}{\protect\cs{newhookcommand@series} can take an optional argument.}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -14896,7 +14897,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\newhooktoggle@series}
 %\protect\cs{newhooktoggle@series}\protect\cs{command names} is a generic command to add new commands for a new toggle hook, like \protect\cs{Xnumberonlyfirstinline}.
-% The second argument is also used to create commands named \protect\cs{<hookname><pseudoseries>}, 
+% The second argument is also used to create commands named \protect\cs{<hookname><pseudoseries>},
 % like \protect\cs{Xtwolinesbutnotmoreappref}.
 % \changes{v1.21.0}{2015/04/13}{\protect\cs{newhooktoggle@series} can take an optional argument.}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -14917,7 +14918,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\newhooktoggle@series@reload}
 % \changes{v1.13.0}{2014/09/16}{Add \protect\cs{newhookcommand@toggle@reload}}
-% \protect\cs{newhookcommand@toggle@reload} does the same thing as \protect\cs{newhooktoggle@series} 
+% \protect\cs{newhookcommand@toggle@reload} does the same thing as \protect\cs{newhooktoggle@series}
 % but the commands created by this macro also reload the series arrangement, depending of type os notes
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\newhooktoggle@series@reload}[2]{%
@@ -14931,9 +14932,9 @@
 % \changes{v1.8.0}{2013/11/24}{Debug \protect\cs{beforenotesX} and  \protect\cs{maxhnotesX} which did not work.}
 % \changes{v1.12.0}{2014/08/05}{Debug \protect\cs{beforenotesX} and  \protect\cs{maxhnotesX} which did not work when called after \protect\cs{footparagraphX}.}
 % \changes{v1.12.0}{2014/08/05}{Debug \protect\cs{Xbeforenotes} and  \protect\cs{Xmaxhnotes} which did not work when called after \protect\cs{footparagraph}.}
-% \protect\cs{newhookcommand@series@reload} does the same thing as \protect\cs{newhookcommand@series} 
+% \protect\cs{newhookcommand@series@reload} does the same thing as \protect\cs{newhookcommand@series}
 % but the commands created by this macro also reload the series' arrangement.
-% 
+%
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\newhookcommand@series@reload}[2]{%
   \global\expandafter\newcommand\expandafter*\csname #1\endcsname[2][]{%
@@ -14981,7 +14982,7 @@
   \newhooktoggle@series{Xnonumber}
   \newhooktoggle@series{Xpstart}
   \newhooktoggle@series{Xpstarteverytime}%
-  
+
   \newhooktoggle@series{Xstanza}%
   \newhookcommand@series{Xstanzaseparator}%
 
@@ -14992,17 +14993,17 @@
   \newhookcommand@series@reload{Xbeforenotes}{critical}
   \newhooktoggle@series@reload{Xnoteswidthliketwocolumns}{critical}%
   \newhookcommand@series@reload{Xnotefontsize}{critical}
-  
+
   \newhookcommand@series{Xboxlinenum}%
   \newhookcommand@series{Xboxlinenumalign}%
 
   \newhookcommand@series{Xboxstartlinenum}%
-  \newhookcommand@series{Xboxendlinenum}% 
-  
+  \newhookcommand@series{Xboxendlinenum}%
+
   \newhookcommand@series{Xafternote}%
   \newhookcommand@series{Xparafootsep}
   \newhookcommand@series@reload{Xwidth}{critical}%
-  
+
   \ifundef{\Xhsize}%
     {%
       \newcommandx{\Xhsize}[2][1,usedefault]{%
@@ -15013,13 +15014,13 @@
     {}%
 \fi
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% Now, hooks for critical notes which also apply to crossreferencing and line numbering at the sides of the page. 
+% Now, hooks for critical notes which also apply to crossreferencing and line numbering at the sides of the page.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newhooktoggle@series{Xlineflag}[appref,SEref]
 \newhookcommand@series{Xtwolines}[appref,SEref]
 \newhookcommand@series{Xmorethantwolines}[appref,SEref]
 \newhookcommand@series{Xsublinesep}[appref,SEref,side]%
-\newhookcommand@series{Xpagelinesep}[appref,SEref,side]%   
+\newhookcommand@series{Xpagelinesep}[appref,SEref,side]%
 \newhooktoggle@series{Xtwolinesbutnotmore}[appref,SEref]
 \newhooktoggle@series{Xtwolinesonlyinsamepage}[appref,SEref]
 \newhookcommand@series{Xlinerangeseparator}[appref,SEref]
@@ -15070,12 +15071,12 @@
   \newhookcommand@series{Xendnotenumfont}
   \newhookcommand@series{Xendlemmafont}%
   \newhookcommand@series{Xendbhooknote}
-  
+
   \newhookcommand@series{Xendboxlinenum}%
   \newhookcommand@series{Xendboxlinenumalign}%
-  
+
   \newhookcommand@series{Xendboxstartlinenum}%
-  \newhookcommand@series{Xendboxendlinenum}% 
+  \newhookcommand@series{Xendboxendlinenum}%
 
   \newhookcommand@series{Xendnotefontsize}
   \newhooktoggle@series{Xendlemmadisablefontselection}
@@ -15083,25 +15084,25 @@
   \newhookcommand@series{Xendbeforelemmaseparator}
   \newhookcommand@series{Xendafterlemmaseparator}
   \newhookcommand@series{Xendinplaceoflemmaseparator}
-  
+
   \newhookcommand@series{Xendbeforenumber}%
   \newhookcommand@series{Xendafternumber}%
-  
+
   \newhooktoggle@series{Xendparagraph}
   \newhookcommand@series{Xendafternote}
   \newhookcommand@series{Xendsep}
-  
+
   \newhookcommand@series{Xendinplaceofnumber}%
   \newhooktoggle@series{Xendnonumber}%
-  
+
   \newhooktoggle@series{Xendnumberonlyfirstinline}%
   \newhooktoggle@series{Xendnumberonlyfirstintwolines}%
-  
+
   \newhookcommand@series{Xendsymlinenum}%
   \newhookcommand@series{Xendbeforesymlinenum}%
   \newhookcommand@series{Xendaftersymlinenum}%
   \newhookcommand@series{Xendboxsymlinenum}%
-  
+
   \newhookcommand@series{Xendbhooklinenumber}%
   \newhookcommand@series{Xendahooklinenumber}%
   \newhookcommand@series{Xendbhookinplaceofnumber}%
@@ -15114,13 +15115,13 @@
   \newhooktoggle@series{Xendpagenumberonlyfirstintwo}%
   \newhookcommand@series{Xendsympagenum}%
   \newhookcommand@series{Xendinplaceofpagenumber}%
-  
+
   \newhookcommand@series{Xendtxtbeforenotes}%
 
 \fi
 \newhooktoggle@series{Xendlineflag}[apprefwithpage,SErefwithpage]
 \newhookcommand@series{Xendtwolines}[apprefwithpage,SErefwithpage]
-\newhookcommand@series{Xendmorethantwolines}[apprefwithpage,SErefwithpage]   
+\newhookcommand@series{Xendmorethantwolines}[apprefwithpage,SErefwithpage]
 \newhooktoggle@series{Xendtwolinesbutnotmore}[apprefwithpage,SErefwithpage]
 \newhooktoggle@series{Xendtwolinesonlyinsamepage}[apprefwithpage,SErefwithpage]
 \newhookcommand@series{Xendlinerangeseparator}[apprefwithpage,SErefwithpage]
@@ -15165,8 +15166,8 @@
 % As we have to define it before typesetting the line and undefine it after, we use the family of \package{xkeyval} package's key.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 %    \end{macrocode}
-%     
-%  
+%
+%
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\nomk@}
 %\protect\cs{nomk@} toggle is used by \parpackage{} to remove the footnote mark in the text when using \protect\cs{footnoteXmk}. Read \parpackage handbook.
@@ -15184,7 +15185,7 @@
 %
 %
 % \section{Output routine}\label{output}
-% 
+%
 %
 % Now we begin the output routine and associated things.
 %
@@ -15194,8 +15195,8 @@
 % \subsection{Extra footnotes output}
 %
 %    With luck we might only have to change \protect\cs{@makecol} and
-% \protect\cs{@reinserts} of the \LaTeX's kernel. 
-% Since \reledmac, we use \protect\package{etoolbox}'s patching commands instead of overriding. 
+% \protect\cs{@reinserts} of the \LaTeX's kernel.
+% Since \reledmac, we use \protect\package{etoolbox}'s patching commands instead of overriding.
 % It should provides better compatibility with other package which modify these commands
 
 %
@@ -15203,7 +15204,7 @@
 % \protect\cs{l@ddoxtrafeet} is the code extending \protect\cs{@makecol} to cater for
 % the extra \macpackage\ feet. We have two categories of extra footnotes.
 % By default, we order the footnote inserts so that the regular footnotes of \LaTeX\ are first,
-% then familiar familiar footnotes and finally 
+% then familiar familiar footnotes and finally
 % the critical footnotes.
 % \changes{v0.2.1}{2003/09/13}{Renamed \protect\cs{doxtrafeet} to \protect\cs{l@ddoxtrafeet}}
 % \changes{v1.9.0}{2014/02/05}{Add \protect\cs{fnpos} to choice the order of footnotes.}
@@ -15247,7 +15248,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\do@Xfeet}
 % \protect\cs{do@Xfeet} is the code extending \protect\cs{@makecol} to cater to
-% the extra critical feet. 
+% the extra critical feet.
 % \changes{v0.4.1}{2004/03/06}{Changed \protect\cs{do@Xfeet} code for easier extensions}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\do@Xfeet}{%
@@ -15281,7 +15282,7 @@
   \csuse{#1footgroup}{#1}%%
 }%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% We print all series of notes by looping on them. 
+% We print all series of notes by looping on them.
 % We check before printing them that they are not voided.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\@opXfeet}{%
@@ -15319,9 +15320,9 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\X@doreinfeet}
-% \protect\cs{X@doreinfeet} is the code for catering for the 
+% \protect\cs{X@doreinfeet} is the code for catering for the
 %  extra critical footnotes
-% within \protect\cs{@reinserts}. 
+% within \protect\cs{@reinserts}.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\X@doreinfeet}{%
   \unless\ifnocritical@%
@@ -15341,13 +15342,13 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\do@feetX}
 % \begin{macro}{\@doreinfeetX}
 % We have to add all the new kinds of familiar footnotes to the output
-% routine. 
+% routine.
 % A macro which appends the familiar footnotes of one series onto the output routine, also adding vertical skip before notes.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\append@notesX}[1]{%
   \ifvoid\csuse{footins#1}\else%
       \global\skip\csuse{footins#1}=\csuse{beforenotesX@#1}%
-      \global\advance\skip\csuse{footins#1} by\csuse{afterruleX@#1}%          
+      \global\advance\skip\csuse{footins#1} by\csuse{afterruleX@#1}%
       \print@notesX{#1}%
   \fi%
 }%
@@ -15361,7 +15362,7 @@
   \csuse{footgroup#1}{#1}%
 }%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% We print all the series of notes by looping on them. 
+% We print all the series of notes by looping on them.
 % We check before printing them that they are not voided.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\do@feetX}{%
@@ -15377,7 +15378,7 @@
 }%
 
 \newcommand{\@doreinfeetX}{%
-  \unless\ifnofamiliar@%  
+  \unless\ifnofamiliar@%
     \def\do##1{%
       \ifvoid\csuse{footins##1}\else
         \insert%
@@ -15419,10 +15420,10 @@
   \g@addto@macro{\m@mdodoreinextrafeet}{\l@ddodoreinxtrafeet}%
   }{%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% \protect\ltxclass{memoir} has not been loaded, so patch \protect\cs{@makecol} and 
+% \protect\ltxclass{memoir} has not been loaded, so patch \protect\cs{@makecol} and
 % \protect\cs{@reinserts}.
-% If the \package{fancyhdr} package $<$ version 3.8 has been loaded, we patch the \cs{latex@makecol} command, because this package redefines the standard \cs{@makecol} in the preamble, to call \cs{latex@makecol} which have been \cs{let} to \cs{@makecol}. 
-% If this package is not loaded, we directly patch \cs{@makecol}. 
+% If the \package{fancyhdr} package $<$ version 3.8 has been loaded, we patch the \cs{latex@makecol} command, because this package redefines the standard \cs{@makecol} in the preamble, to call \cs{latex@makecol} which have been \cs{let} to \cs{@makecol}.
+% If this package is not loaded, we directly patch \cs{@makecol}.
 % If the \package{fancyhdr} package $\geq$ version 3.8, we also directly patch \cs{@makecol}, because \package{fancyhdr} does its own patch \cs{AtBeginDocument}.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
   \ifboolexpr{%
@@ -15443,7 +15444,7 @@
       {}%
       {\led@error@fail@patch@@makecol}%
     }%
-    
+
   \patchcmd%
     {\@reinserts}%
     {\ifvbox}%
@@ -15459,7 +15460,7 @@
 %   It turns out that \protect\cs{@doclearpage} also needs modifying.
 % \changes{v0.4.1}{2004/03/25}{Added code for changing \protect\cs{@doclearpage}}
 % \begin{macro}{\if@led@nofoot}
-% We have to check if there are any leftover feet. 
+% We have to check if there are any leftover feet.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newif\if@led@nofoot
 
@@ -15469,7 +15470,7 @@
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \@ifclassloaded{memoir}{%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% If the \protect\ltxclass{memoir} class is loaded we hook into its modified 
+% If the \protect\ltxclass{memoir} class is loaded we hook into its modified
 % \verb?\@doclearpage?.
 % \begin{macro}{\@mem@extranofeet}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -15502,7 +15503,7 @@
         \@led@nofootfalse%
       \fi%
     \fi%
-    \unless\ifnofamiliar@%    
+    \unless\ifnofamiliar@%
       \ifvoid\csuse{footins##1}\else%
         \@led@nofootfalse%
       \fi%
@@ -15516,7 +15517,7 @@
  {\@led@testifnofoot}%
  {}%
  {\led@error@fail@patch@@doclearpage}%
- 
+
 \patchcmd%
  {\@doclearpage}%
  {\ifvoid\footins}%
@@ -15539,7 +15540,7 @@
 %
 % We cannot implement these two options by changing the value of the \verb|page| counter, since its value is used by many \LaTeX\ features to determine whether a page is left (even numbered) or right (odd numbered).
 % Consequently, we have to do it by patching \cs{thepage}, in order to use the value of the \verb+par@page+ counter instead of the value of the \verb+page+ counter.
-% 
+%
 % This counter will be increased in a patched version of \LaTeX's \protect\cs{@outputpage} macro, as is the \verb+page+ counter in this macro. However, this increase will take account of the options.
 %
 
@@ -15547,9 +15548,9 @@
 
 % \begin{macro}{\par@patch@thepage}
 % \begin{macro}{\par@patch@pagenumbering}
-% \cs{par@patch@thepage} patches \cs{thepage} in order to use the value of \verb+par@page+ counter and not the value of \verb+page+.  
-% It must be called after any redefinition of \cs{thepage}. 
-% That is why we insert it at the end of the \LaTeX\ macro \cs{pagenumbering}, which is called by some \cs{xxxmatter} commands. 
+% \cs{par@patch@thepage} patches \cs{thepage} in order to use the value of \verb+par@page+ counter and not the value of \verb+page+.
+% It must be called after any redefinition of \cs{thepage}.
+% That is why we insert it at the end of the \LaTeX\ macro \cs{pagenumbering}, which is called by some \cs{xxxmatter} commands.
 % In cases when we are using the \ltxclass{memoir} class, we insert it at the end of  \cs{@mempnum}.
 % When using \cs{pagenumbering}, we also need to reset the \verb+par@page+ counter. Consequently, we put \cs{par@patch@thepage} and counter reset in \cs{par@patch@pagenumbering}
 % We also call \cs{par@patch@thepage} at the beginning of the document.
@@ -15591,7 +15592,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\@outputpage}
-% As its name says, \cs{@outputpage} is a \LaTeX\ macro called in the output routine. It is this macro which increases the \verb+page+ counter. 
+% As its name says, \cs{@outputpage} is a \LaTeX\ macro called in the output routine. It is this macro which increases the \verb+page+ counter.
 % We patch it in order to increase, conditionally, the \verb+par@page+ counter.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \AtBeginDocument{%
@@ -15620,12 +15621,12 @@
 \newcounter{par@page}%
 \setcounter{par@page}{1}%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro} 
+% \end{macro}
 %
 % \section{Cross referencing}
 % \label{xref}\relax
 %
-% 
+%
 %
 % You can mark a place in the text using a command of the form
 % \protect\cs{edlabel}\marg{foo}, and later refer to it using the label
@@ -15635,7 +15636,7 @@
 % \protect\cs{edlabel}\marg{foo} command occurred.
 %
 % The reference macros warn you if a reference is made to an
-% undefined label. 
+% undefined label.
 % If \marg{foo} has been used as a label before,
 % the \protect\cs{edlabel}\marg{foo} command will issue a complaint; subsequent
 % \protect\cs{edpageref} and \protect\cs{edlineref} commands will refer to the
@@ -15674,14 +15675,14 @@
 % substantially improved their efficiency and flexibility.}
 %
 % This version of the original \edmac{} \protect\cs{label} uses \protect\cs{@bsphack}
-% and \protect\cs{@esphack} to eliminate extra space problems and also use the \LaTeX\ 
+% and \protect\cs{@esphack} to eliminate extra space problems and also use the \LaTeX\
 % write methods for the \file{.aux} file.
 %
 %    Jesse Billett\footnote{(\url{jdb43@cam.ac.uk}) via the \texttt{ctt}
 % thread `ledmac cross referencing', 25 August 2003.}
 % found that the original code could be off by several pages. This version,
 % hopefully cures that, and also allows for non-arabic page numbering.
-% 
+%
 % \changes{v0.2.1}{2003/08/26}{Tweaked \protect\cs{edlabel} to get correct page numbers}
 % \changes{v0.14.0}{2012/04/04}{Tweaked \protect\cs{edlabel} to get correct line number if the command is first element of a paragraph.}
 % \changes{v1.18.0}{2015/02/23}{\protect\cs{edlabel} is now defined only one time for both \eledmac and \eledpar}
@@ -15754,8 +15755,8 @@
           {\string\l@dmake@labels\space\thepage|\label@refs|\the\c@pstart|{#1}}%
           \ifdef{\hypertarget}%
             {\Hy@raisedlink{\hypertarget{#1}{}}}%
-            {}%   
-       \fi%    
+            {}%
+       \fi%
     \fi%
   }%
 \@esphack}%
@@ -15768,9 +15769,9 @@
 %\begin{macro}{\labelrefsparseline}
 %\begin{macro}{\labelrefsparsesubline}
 % \changes{v1.4.1}{2012/11/16}{Fix a bug with \protect\cs{edlabel}.}
-%In cases where \protect\cs{edlabel} is the first element in a paragraph, we have a problem with line counts, because line counts change only at the first horizontal box of the paragraph. 
-%Hence, we need to test \protect\cs{edlabel} if it occurs at the start of a paragraph.  To do so, we use \protect\cs{ifvmode}. If the test is true, we must advance by one unit the amount of text we write into the \verb].aux] file. 
-% We do so using \protect\cs{advancelabel@refs} command.  
+%In cases where \protect\cs{edlabel} is the first element in a paragraph, we have a problem with line counts, because line counts change only at the first horizontal box of the paragraph.
+%Hence, we need to test \protect\cs{edlabel} if it occurs at the start of a paragraph.  To do so, we use \protect\cs{ifvmode}. If the test is true, we must advance by one unit the amount of text we write into the \verb].aux] file.
+% We do so using \protect\cs{advancelabel@refs} command.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcounter{line}%
 \newcounter{subline}%
@@ -15836,7 +15837,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\@lab}
 % The \protect\cs{@lab} command, which appears in the \protect\cs{linenum@out} file,
 % appends the current value of page, line, sub-line, and absolute line to the
-% \protect\cs{labelref@list}. 
+% \protect\cs{labelref@list}.
 % These values are defined by the earlier
 % \protect\cs{@page}, \protect\cs{@nl}, and the \protect\cs{sub@on} and \protect\cs{sub@off} commands
 % appearing in the \protect\cs{linenum@out} file.
@@ -15875,7 +15876,7 @@
 % \protect\cs{applabel}, if called in \protect\cs{edtext} will insert automatically both a starting and an ending label for the current edtext lines.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\applabel}[1]{%
-  \if@edtext@secondarg@% 
+  \if@edtext@secondarg@%
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % Label should not be already defined.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -15887,11 +15888,11 @@
        }%
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % Parse the \protect\cs{edtext} line numbers and annotations.
-%    \begin{macrocode}      
+%    \begin{macrocode}
      \expandafter\l@dp@rsefootspec\l@d@nums|%
      \expandafter\parse@annot\l@current@annot|%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% Use the \LaTeX\  standard hack for label. 
+% Use the \LaTeX\  standard hack for label.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
      \@bsphack%
 %    \end{macrocode}
@@ -15925,12 +15926,12 @@
          \fi%
       \fi%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% Use the \LaTeX\ standard hack for label. 
+% Use the \LaTeX\ standard hack for label.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
       \@esphack%
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % Warning if \protect\cs{applabel} is called outside of \protect\cs{edtext}.
-%    \begin{macrocode}  
+%    \begin{macrocode}
   \else%
     \led@warn@AppLabelOutSecondArgEdtext{#1}%
   \fi%
@@ -15961,7 +15962,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\wrap@edcrossref}
 % \changes{v1.12.1}{2014/08/06}{Fix spurious spaces.}
 % \changes{v1.12.7}{2014/09/07}{\protect\cs{wrap@edcrossref} is now robust}
-% \protect\cs{wrap@edcrossref} is called around all \macpackage\ crossref commands, except those which start with x. 
+% \protect\cs{wrap@edcrossref} is called around all \macpackage\ crossref commands, except those which start with x.
 % It adds the hyperlink.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newrobustcmd{\wrap@edcrossref}[2]{%
@@ -15974,7 +15975,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\edpageref}
 % \begin{macro}{\xpageref}
 % If the specified label exists, \protect\cs{edpageref} gives its page number.
-% 
+%
 % For this reference command, as for the other two, a special
 % version with prefix \verb"x" is provided for use in places where the
 % command is to be scanned as a number, as in \protect\cs{linenum}. These
@@ -15983,7 +15984,7 @@
 % the first label or reference command in the file; you must ensure
 % that a \protect\cs{edlabel} or a normal reference command appears first, or
 % these x-commands will always return zeros.
-% 
+%
 % \LaTeX\ already defines a \protect\cs{pageref}, so changing the name
 %  to \protect\cs{edpageref}.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -15996,7 +15997,7 @@
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\edlineref}
 % \begin{macro}{\xlineref}
-% \changes{v1.16.1}{2015/02/05}{\protect\cs{lineref} is not defined if defined by some other package, like lineno.  
+% \changes{v1.16.1}{2015/02/05}{\protect\cs{lineref} is not defined if defined by some other package, like lineno.
 % \Eledmac provides \protect\cs{edlineref} instead.}
 % \changes{v2.5.0}{2015/11/13}{\protect\cs{xlineref} does not include anymore the side flag. Use \protect\cs{xflagref} to get it. Not that \protect\cs{edlineref} still contains the flag.}
 % If the specified label exists, \protect\cs{lineref} gives its line number.
@@ -16085,7 +16086,7 @@
 % The \protect\cs{l@dref@undefined} macro is called when you refer to a label with
 % the normal referencing macros. Its argument is a label, and it
 % just checks that the label has been defined.
-% 
+%
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\l@dref@undefined}[1]{%
   \expandafter\ifx\csname the@label#1\endcsname\relax
@@ -16208,10 +16209,10 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\SErefwithpage}
 % \protect\cs{appref}, \cs{SEref}, \cs{apprefwithpage}, \cs{SErefwithpage} and \cs{SEonlypage}    print crossref to some start / end lines defined by specific commands.
 % It prints the lines as they should be printed in the apparatus (critical notes for not suffixed versions, endnotes for suffixed versions).
-% 
+%
 % Here we define hooks similar to some those related to critical footnotes or endnotes.
 %
-% So, first declare the default value of the hooks for the pseudo-series. 
+% So, first declare the default value of the hooks for the pseudo-series.
 % Also declare the internal toggle which are switch by \macpackage{}.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\Xtwolines@appref{}%
@@ -16347,7 +16348,7 @@
 }
 
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% And not \cs{setSErefonlypageprefixsingle} and \cs{setSErefonlypageprefixmore}. 
+% And not \cs{setSErefonlypageprefixsingle} and \cs{setSErefonlypageprefixmore}.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\setSErefonlypageprefixsingle}[1]{%
   \gdef\SErefonlypage@prefixsingle{#1}%
@@ -16394,7 +16395,7 @@
     \xdef\annot@end{\xannotationref{#2:end}}%
     \printlines\xpageref{#2:start}|\xlineref{#2:start}|\xsublineref{#2:start}|\xpageref{#2:end}|\xlineref{#2:end}|\xsublineref{#2:end}|\relax|\xflagref{#2:start}|%
     \undef\@this@crossref@end%
-    \undef\@this@crossref@start%   
+    \undef\@this@crossref@start%
    }%
   \def\do##1{%
     \setkeys[mac]{falsefootnoteoption}{##1}%
@@ -16412,7 +16413,7 @@
    test{\ifcsundef{the@label#2:start}}%
    or test{\ifcsundef{the@label#2:end}}%
   }%
-   {\led@warn@pairRefUndefined{#2}\nfss@text{\reset@font\bfseries ??}}% 
+   {\led@warn@pairRefUndefined{#2}\nfss@text{\reset@font\bfseries ??}}%
    {%
    \def\@this@crossref@start{#2:start}%
    \def\@this@crossref@end{#2:end}%
@@ -16436,7 +16437,7 @@
    test{\ifcsundef{the@label#2:start}}%
    or test{\ifcsundef{the@label#2:end}}%
   }%
-   {\led@warn@pairRefUndefined{#2}\nfss@text{\reset@font\bfseries ??}}% 
+   {\led@warn@pairRefUndefined{#2}\nfss@text{\reset@font\bfseries ??}}%
    {\ifnumequal{\xpageref{#2:end}}{\xpageref{#2:start}}%
        {%
        \ifcsvoid{#3onlypage@prefixsingle}%
@@ -16462,7 +16463,7 @@
           \csuse{Xendlinerangeseparator@\@currentseries}%
           \wrap@edcrossref{#2:end}{\xpageref{#2:end}}%
         }%
-      \fi%   
+      \fi%
      }%
    }%
   \def\do##1{%
@@ -16488,7 +16489,7 @@
 % \protect\cs{edmakelabel} takes a label, followed by a page and a line number(s)
 % as arguments.
 % \LaTeX\ defines a \protect\cs{makelabel} macro which is used in lists.
-%          Peter Wilson has changed the name to \protect\cs{edmakelabel}. 
+%          Peter Wilson has changed the name to \protect\cs{edmakelabel}.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\edmakelabel}[2]{\expandafter\xdef\csname the@label#1\endcsname{#2}}
 
@@ -16645,7 +16646,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\ledrsnotefontsetup}
 % These specify the width of the left/right boxes (initialised to
 % \protect\cs{marginparwidth}), their distance from
-% the text (initialised to \protect\cs{linenumsep}), and the fonts used. 
+% the text (initialised to \protect\cs{linenumsep}), and the fonts used.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newdimen\ledlsnotewidth \ledlsnotewidth=\marginparwidth
 \newdimen\ledrsnotewidth \ledrsnotewidth=\marginparwidth
@@ -16692,7 +16693,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\l@desnote}
 % \begin{macro}{\l@disnote}
 % \changes{v1.12.0}{2014/08/05}{\protect\cs{l@dlsnote},\protect\cs{l@drsnote} and \protect\cs{l@dcsnote} defined only one time, in \eledmac, including needs for eledpar case.}.
-% The `footnotes' for left, right, and moveable sidenotes. The whole 
+% The `footnotes' for left, right, and moveable sidenotes. The whole
 % scheme is reminiscent of the critical footnotes code.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newif\ifrightnoteup
@@ -16935,7 +16936,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\affixside@note}
 % This macro puts any moveable sidenote text into the left or right sidenote
 % box, depending on which margin it is meant to go in. It's a very much
-% stripped down version of \protect\cs{affixlin@num}.
+% stripped down version of \protect\cs{affixline@num}.
 %
 % Before do it, we concatenate all moveable sidenotes of the line, using \protect\cs{@sidenotesep} as separator.
 % It is the result that we put on the sidenote.
@@ -17000,7 +17001,7 @@
 % \section{Minipages and such}
 %
 %    We can put footnotes into minipages. The preparatory code has
-% been set up earlier, all that remains is to ensure that it is available 
+% been set up earlier, all that remains is to ensure that it is available
 % inside a minipage box. This requires some alteration to the kernel code,
 % specifically the \protect\cs{@iiiminipage} and \protect\cs{endminipage} macros.
 % We will arrange this so that additional series can be easily added.
@@ -17009,7 +17010,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\l@dfeetendmini}
 % \changes{v1.9.0}{2014/02/05}{Add \protect\cs{mpfnpos} to choice the order of footnotes in minipage / ledgroup.}
 % These will be the hooks in \protect\cs{@iiiminpage} and \protect\cs{endminipage}.
-% 
+%
 % They can be extended to handle other things if necessary.
 % \changes{v0.4.0}{2004/02/29}{Added \protect\cs{l@dfeetbeginmini}, \protect\cs{l@dfeetendmini}
 %                           and all their supporting code}
@@ -17033,7 +17034,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\l@dedendmini}
 % \begin{macro}{\mp@append@Xnotes}
 % These handle the initiation and closure of critical footnotes in a
-% minipage environment. 
+% minipage environment.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\l@dedbeginmini}{%
   \unless\ifnocritical@%
@@ -17092,7 +17093,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\l@dfamendmini}
 % \begin{macro}{\mp@append@notesX}
 % These handle the initiation and closure of familiar footnotes in a
-% minipage environment. 
+% minipage environment.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\l@dfambeginmini}{%
  \unless\ifnofamiliar@%
@@ -17133,9 +17134,9 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\@iiiminipage}
 % This is our extended form of the kernel \protect\cs{@iiiminipage} defined in
 % \file{ltboxes.dtx}.
-% \changes{v0.4.0}{2004/02/29}{Modified kernel \protect\cs{@iiiminipage} and 
+% \changes{v0.4.0}{2004/02/29}{Modified kernel \protect\cs{@iiiminipage} and
 %                          \protect\cs{endminipage} to cater for critical footnotes}
-% \changes{v2.0.0}{2015/07/19}{Patch \protect\cs{@iiiminipage} instead of redefining it.} 
+% \changes{v2.0.0}{2015/07/19}{Patch \protect\cs{@iiiminipage} instead of redefining it.}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \patchcmd%
   {\@iiiminipage}%
@@ -17149,7 +17150,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\endminipage}
 % This is our extended form of the kernel \protect\cs{endminipage} defined in
 % \file{ltboxes.dtx}.
-% \changes{v2.0.0}{2015/07/19}{Patch \protect\cs{endminipage} instead of redefining it.} 
+% \changes{v2.0.0}{2015/07/19}{Patch \protect\cs{endminipage} instead of redefining it.}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \patchcmd%
   {\endminipage}%
@@ -17157,7 +17158,7 @@
   {\footnoterule\l@advance@parledgroup@beforenormalnotes}%
   {}%
   {\led@error@fail@patch@endminipage}
-  
+
 \patchcmd%
   {\endminipage}%
   {\@minipagefalse}%
@@ -17180,7 +17181,7 @@
     \footnoterule
     \l@advance@parledgroup@beforenormalnotes
     \unvbox\@mpfootins%
-} 
+}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % When using parallel ledgroup, we need to store the vertical space added before footnote, in order to compensate them between left and right pages.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -17232,7 +17233,7 @@
 % of unboxed, variable \meta{width} minipage. The optional \meta{pos}
 % controls the sideways position of numbered text.
 % \changes{v0.4.0}{2004/02/29}{Added ledgroupsized environment}
-% \changes{v0.5.1}{2004/04/10}{Only change \protect\cs{hsize} in ledgroupsized 
+% \changes{v0.5.1}{2004/04/10}{Only change \protect\cs{hsize} in ledgroupsized
 %        environment otherwise page number can be in wrong place}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newenvironment{ledgroupsized}[2][l]{%
@@ -17284,10 +17285,10 @@
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \begin{macro}{\ifledgroupnotesL@}
 % \begin{macro}{\ifledgroupnotesR@}
-% These boolean tests check if we are in the notes of a ledgroup.  
+% These boolean tests check if we are in the notes of a ledgroup.
 % If we are, we do not number the lines.
 % It could be useful for parallel ledgroup of \parpackage.
-% 
+%
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newif\ifledgroupnotesL@
 \newif\ifledgroupnotesR@
@@ -17356,7 +17357,7 @@
 }
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
-% 
+%
 % \begin{macro}{\thestartpageline}
 % \begin{macro}{\theendpageline}
 % These macros make up the page/line start/end number when the \protect\cs{edindex} command is called in critical notes.
@@ -17385,7 +17386,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\prepare@edindex@fornote}
 % This macro is called at the beginning of each critical note.
-% It switches some parameters, 
+% It switches some parameters,
 % to allow index referring to this note, with reference to page and line number.
 % It also defines \protect\cs{@ledinnote@command} which will be printed as an encapsulating command after the \verb+|+.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -17653,7 +17654,7 @@
 % If we use both xindy and hyperref, first get the \protect\cs{index@command} command.
 % Then define \protect\cs{@edindex@hyperref} in the form \verb+eledmacXXX+
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-    {\ifxindyhyperref@%     
+    {\ifxindyhyperref@%
       \IfSubStr{\temp@}{|}%
         {\get@index@command#1+}%
         {\get@index@command#1|+}%
@@ -17669,7 +17670,7 @@
         }%
         {}%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% This \protect\cs{thelabidx} will be called back at the closing parenthesis, to have the same number in  
+% This \protect\cs{thelabidx} will be called back at the closing parenthesis, to have the same number in
 % \protect\cs{@edindex@hyperref} command that we had at the opening parenthesis.
 % \protect\cs{@edindex@hyperref} start by a closing parenthesis, then followed by \verb+eledmacXXX+ where \verb+XXX+ is the \protect\cs{thelabidx} of the opening \protect\cs{edindex}.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -17679,7 +17680,7 @@
         \global\csundef{xindyparenthesis@\@index@txt}%
         }%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% Write in the .xdy file the attributes of the location. 
+% Write in the .xdy file the attributes of the location.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
         {%
         \immediate\write\eledmac@xindy@out{%
@@ -17843,7 +17844,7 @@
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \section{Verse}
 %
-% The original code is principally Wayne Sullivan's\index{Sullivan, Wayne} 
+% The original code is principally Wayne Sullivan's\index{Sullivan, Wayne}
 % code from \edstanza.
 % However, the code has been many time modified by Maïeul Rouquette in order to obtain new features and improved compatibility with \parpackage.
 %
@@ -17898,7 +17899,7 @@
 
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
-% 
+%
 % \subsection{Code category setting}
 % \begin{macro}{\stanza@count}
 % \begin{macro}{\stanzaindentbase}
@@ -17954,7 +17955,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\setstanzapenalties}
 % In the original \edmac, \protect\cs{setstanzavalues}\verb+{sza}+\marg{...} had to be called to
 % set the indents, and similarly \protect\cs{setstanzavalues}\verb+{szp}+\marg{...}.
-% to set the penalties. 
+% to set the penalties.
 % \protect\cs{setstanzaindents} and \protect\cs{setstanzapenalties} macros are a convenience to give
 % the user one less thing to worry about (misspelling the first argument).
 %
@@ -18025,7 +18026,7 @@
 \newcommand{\@insertstanzanumber}[0]{%
   \ifnumberstanza%
     \ifl@dpairing%
-      \ifledRcol% 
+      \ifledRcol%
       \stanzanumwrapper{\thestanzaR}%
       \else%
       \stanzanumwrapper{\thestanzaL}%
@@ -18044,7 +18045,7 @@
 \newcommand{\@advancestanzanumber}[0]{%
   \ifnumberstanza%
     \ifl@dpairing%
-      \ifledRcol% 
+      \ifledRcol%
         \addtocounter{stanzaR}{1}%
       \else%
         \addtocounter{stanzaL}{1}%
@@ -18087,12 +18088,12 @@
 % indentation for the line and starts a numbered paragraph---each
 % line is treated as a paragraph. \protect\cs{stanza@hang} sets the
 % hanging indentation to be used if the stanza line requires
-% more than one print line. 
+% more than one print line.
 
 %If it is known that each stanza line
 % will fit on one print line, it is advisable to set the
 % hanging indentation to zero. \protect\cs{sza@penalty} places the
-% specified penalty following each stanza line. 
+% specified penalty following each stanza line.
 % By default, this
 % facility is turned off so that no penalty is included. However,
 % the user may initiate these penalties to indicate good and bad
@@ -18120,7 +18121,7 @@
 \xdef\stanza@hang{\noexpand\leavevmode\noexpand\startlock
             \hangindent\expandafter
             \noexpand\csname sza@0@\endcsname\stanzaindentbase
-            \hangafter\@ne}        
+            \hangafter\@ne}
 \def\sza@penalty{\count@\csname szp@\number\stanza@count @\endcsname
          \ifnum\count@>\@M\advance\count@-\@M\penalty-\else
          \penalty\fi\count@}
@@ -18152,9 +18153,9 @@
 % \protect\cs{endlock}. Here and above we have used \protect\cs{xdef} to
 % make the stored macros take up a bit less space, but it also
 % makes them more obscure to the reader. Lines of the stanza are
-% delimited by ampersands \&. 
+% delimited by ampersands \&.
 % The last line of the stanza must
-% end with \verb+\&+. 
+% end with \verb+\&+.
 %
 %
 %
@@ -18256,7 +18257,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\flagstanza}
-% Use \verb?\flagstanza[len]{text}? at the start of a line to put \texttt{text} 
+% Use \verb?\flagstanza[len]{text}? at the start of a line to put \texttt{text}
 % a distance \texttt{len} before the start of the line. The default for
 % \texttt{len} is \verb?\stanzaindentbase?.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -18265,7 +18266,7 @@
 
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
-% 
+%
 % \subsection{Restore catcode and penalties}
 % The ampersand \& is used to mark the end of each stanza line, except the
 % last, which is marked with \verb+\&+. This means that \verb+\halign+ may
@@ -18356,7 +18357,7 @@
 % \subsection{Setting macro}
 % Setting macros for the manuscripts apparatus tools is very easy: they just save their argument in an internal macro.
 % \begin{macro}{\setmsdataseries}
-% In which series of notes will be printed the apparatus of manuscripts? 
+% In which series of notes will be printed the apparatus of manuscripts?
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\setmsdataseries}[1]{%
   \gdef\@msdata@series{#1}%
@@ -18384,7 +18385,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \subsection{Counters and lists}
 % \begin{macro}{\@msd@c}
-% \cs{@msd@c} is a counter incremented at each \cs{@msd} read in auxiliary file. 
+% \cs{@msd@c} is a counter incremented at each \cs{@msd} read in auxiliary file.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \numdef{\@msd@c}{0}
 \numdef{\@msd@cR}{0}
@@ -18407,7 +18408,7 @@
 % \subsection{Auxiliary file macros}
 % \begin{macro}{\@msd}
 % The \cs{@msd} macro is written in the auxiliary file.
-% It just defines three macros by \cs{msdata} macro, which allow us to know the manuscripts data, the line number and the absolute line number where it was called 
+% It just defines three macros by \cs{msdata} macro, which allow us to know the manuscripts data, the line number and the absolute line number where it was called
 %
 % It also stores the action code $1010$ in the list of actions by line.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -18434,12 +18435,12 @@
 % Inserted in the auxiliary file by \cs{stopmsd}, the \cs{@stopmsd} macro will store in two commands the line number and the absolute line number on which it is called.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\@stopmsd}[0]{%
-  \unless\ifledRcol% 
+  \unless\ifledRcol%
      \ifcsundef{@msdata@\@msd@c @stoplinenumber}{%
        \csxdef{@msdata@\@msd@c @stopabslinenumber}{\the\absline@num}%
        \csxdef{@msdata@\@msd@c @stoplinenumber}{\the\line@num}%
      }{}%
-  \else% 
+  \else%
      \ifcsundef{@msdata@\@msd@cR @stoplinenumberR}{%
        \csxdef{@msdata@\@msd@cR @stopabslinenumberR}{\the\absline@numR}%
        \csxdef{@msdata@\@msd@cR @stoplinenumberR}{\the\line@numR}%
@@ -18473,9 +18474,9 @@
           |%
           000|% End sub line number, for now, not used
           \edfont@info%Font
-          }% 
+          }%
           \@msd@options@fullpagefalse%
-          \if@firstlineofpage%Try if the data are for the full page. If yes, will add options to the list. 
+          \if@firstlineofpage%Try if the data are for the full page. If yes, will add options to the list.
             \unless\if@msdata@insertedfrompreviouspage%
               \ifnumless{\csuse{@lastabsline@forpage@\the\page@num}}{\csuse{@msdata@\add@msd@c @stopabslinenumber}+\@ne}%
               {%
@@ -18553,7 +18554,7 @@
 }%
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
-% 
+%
 % \begin{macro}{\if@msdata@insertedfrompreviouspage}
 % The \cs{if@msdata@insertedfrompreviouspage} boolean is set to TRUE if \macpackage\ automatically inserts data from previous page in the first line of a page.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -18561,11 +18562,11 @@
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\add@msdata@firstlineofpage}
-% \cs{add@msdata@firstlineofpage} is called at the first line of every page. It inserts manuscript data which start on one of the previous pages and continue on this page. 
+% \cs{add@msdata@firstlineofpage} is called at the first line of every page. It inserts manuscript data which start on one of the previous pages and continue on this page.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\add@msdata@firstlineofpage}{%
   \bgroup%
-  \normalfont%  
+  \normalfont%
   \unless\ifledRcol@%
     \ifcsdef{@msdata@\add@msd@c @data}{%
     \ifnumless{\the\absline@num-\@ne}{\csuse{@msdata@\add@msd@c @stopabslinenumber}}%
@@ -18583,7 +18584,7 @@
           |%
           000|% End sub line number, for now, not used
           \edfont@info%Font
-          }% 
+          }%
           \@msd@options@fullpagefalse%
           \ifnumless{\csuse{@lastabsline@forpage@\the\page@num}}{\csuse{@msdata@\add@msd@c @stopabslinenumber}+\@ne}%We will test if the ms data is for the full page
           {%
@@ -18673,7 +18674,7 @@
 % \subsection{Other}
 % \begin{macro}{\@msd@options@iffullpage}
 % \begin{macro}{\reset@msd@options@iffullpage}
-% \cs{@msd@options@iffullpage} sets some options if the manuscripts data are for all the page. 
+% \cs{@msd@options@iffullpage} sets some options if the manuscripts data are for all the page.
 % \cs{reset@msd@options@iffullpage} resets them after the footnote.
 % \cs{if@msd@options@fullpage} is switch to true in \protect{add@msdata@firstlineofpage} if these option must be inserted.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -18702,7 +18703,7 @@
 % by Keith Reckdahl and ended definitively by David M. Jones.
 %
 %
-% Several of the [math] macros scan their body twice. This means we must 
+% Several of the [math] macros scan their body twice. This means we must
 % collect all text in the body of an environment form before calling
 % the macro.
 %
@@ -18739,7 +18740,7 @@
 % is supposed to take the whole body of the environment as its argument.
 % For example, given |cenv#1{...}| as a macro that processes |#1|, then
 % the environment form, |\begin{env}| would call |\l@dcollect@body\cenv|.
-% 
+%
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\l@dcollect@body}[1]{%
   \l@denvbody{\expandafter#1\expandafter{\the\l@denvbody}}%
@@ -18768,14 +18769,14 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\l@dcollect@@body}
 % \protect\cs{l@dcollect@@body} takes two arguments: the first will consist of all text
 % up to the next |\end| command, and the second will be the \protect\cs{end} command's
-% argument. If there are any extra \protect\cs{begin} commands in the body text, 
-% a marker is pushed onto a stack by the \protect\cs{l@dpush@begins} function. 
-% Empty state for this stack means we have reached the \protect\cs{end} that matches 
-% our original \protect\cs{begin}. Otherwise we need to include the \protect\cs{end} and its 
+% argument. If there are any extra \protect\cs{begin} commands in the body text,
+% a marker is pushed onto a stack by the \protect\cs{l@dpush@begins} function.
+% Empty state for this stack means we have reached the \protect\cs{end} that matches
+% our original \protect\cs{begin}. Otherwise we need to include the \protect\cs{end} and its
 % argument in the material we are adding to the environment body accumulator.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\l@dcollect@@body#1\end#2{%
-  \edef\l@dbegin@stack{\l@dpush@begins#1\begin\end 
+  \edef\l@dbegin@stack{\l@dpush@begins#1\begin\end
                        \expandafter\@gobble\l@dbegin@stack}%
   \ifx\@empty\l@dbegin@stack
     \endgroup
@@ -18786,7 +18787,7 @@
   \fi
   \processl@denvbody % A little tricky! Note the grouping
 }
-    
+
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 %
@@ -18797,45 +18798,45 @@
 % Newsgroups: comp.text.tex
 % Subject: Re: Using \collect@body with commands that take >1 argument
 % Date: Fri, 08 Aug 2003 09:03:20 +0200
-% 
+%
 % eed132@psu.edu (Evan) wrote:
 % > I'm trying to make a new Latex environment that acts like the>
 %  \colorbox command that is part of the color package. I looked through
 % > the FAQ and ran across this bit about using the \collect@body command
 % > that is part of AMSLaTeX:
 % > http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=cmdasenv
-% > 
+% >
 % > It almost works. If I do something like the following:
 % >   \newcommand{\redbox}[1]{\colorbox{red}{#1}}
-% > 
+% >
 % >   \makeatletter
 % >   \newenvironment{redbox}{\collect@body \redbox}{}
-% 
+%
 % You will get an error message: Command \redbox already defined.
 % Thus you must rename either the command \redbox or the environment
 % name.
-% 
+%
 % >   \begin{coloredbox}{blue}
 % >     Yadda yadda yadda... this is on a blue background...
 % >   \end{coloredbox}
-% > and can't figure out how to make the \collect@body take this. 
-% 
+% > and can't figure out how to make the \collect@body take this.
+%
 % >   \collect@body \colorbox{red}
 % >   \collect@body {\colorbox{red}}
-% 
+%
 % The argument of \collect@body has to be one token exactly.
-% 
+%
 % \documentclass{article}
 % \usepackage{color}
 % \usepackage{amsmath}
-% 
+%
 % \newcommand{\redbox}[1]{\colorbox{red}{#1}}
 % \makeatletter
 % \newenvironment{coloredbox}[1]{%
 %   \def\next@{\colorbox{#1}}%
 %   \collect@body\next@
 % }{}
-% 
+%
 % % ignore spaces at begin and end of environment
 % \newenvironment{coloredboxII}[1]{%
 %   \def\next@{\mycoloredbox{#1}}%
@@ -18844,7 +18845,7 @@
 % \newcommand{\mycoloredbox}[2]{%
 %   \colorbox{#1}{\ignorespaces#2\unskip}%
 % }
-% 
+%
 % % support of optional color model argument
 % \newcommand\coloredboxIII\endcsname{}
 % \def\coloredboxIII#1#{%
@@ -18857,30 +18858,30 @@
 % \newcommand{\mycoloredboxIII}[3]{%
 %   \colorbox#1{#2}{\ignorespaces#3\unskip}%
 % }
-% 
+%
 % \makeatother
-% 
+%
 % \begin{document}
 %   Black text before
 %   \begin{coloredbox}{blue}
 %    Hello World
 %   \end{coloredbox}
 %   Black text after
-% 
+%
 %   Black text before
 %   \begin{coloredboxII}{blue}
 %    Hello World
 %   \end{coloredboxII}
 %   Black text after
-% 
+%
 %   Black text before
 %   \begin{coloredboxIII}[rgb]{0,0,1}
 %    Hello World
 %   \end{coloredboxIII}
 %   Black text after
-% 
+%
 % \end{document}
-% 
+%
 % Yours sincerely
 %   Heiko <oberdiek@uni-freiburg.de>
 % \end{verbatim}
@@ -18888,7 +18889,7 @@
 %
 % \subsection{Tabular environments}
 % This is based on the work by Herbert Breger\index{Breger, Herbert}
-%  in developing \file{tabmac.tex}. 
+%  in developing \file{tabmac.tex}.
 %
 % The original \file{tabmac.tex} file was void of comments or any explanatory
 % text other than the above notice. The algorithm is Breger's. Peter Wilson have made
@@ -18922,7 +18923,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\disable@familiarnotes}
 % \begin{macro}{\restore@familiarnotes}
-% Macros to disable and restore familiar notes, to prevent them from printing multiple times in edtabularx and edarrayx environments. 
+% Macros to disable and restore familiar notes, to prevent them from printing multiple times in edtabularx and edarrayx environments.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\disable@familiarnotes}{%
   \unless\ifnofamiliar@%
@@ -19140,7 +19141,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\l@dampcount}
 % \begin{macro}{\l@dcolcount}
 % \protect\cs{l@dampcount} is a counter for the \& column dividers and
-% \protect\cs{l@dcolcount} is a counter for the columns. 
+% \protect\cs{l@dcolcount} is a counter for the columns.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcount\l@dampcount
   \l@dampcount=1\relax
@@ -19167,7 +19168,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
-% 
+%
 % 30 columns should be adequate (compared to the original 60).
 % These are the column widths. (Originally these were German spelled numbers
 % e.g., |\eins|, |\zwei|, etc).
@@ -19207,7 +19208,7 @@
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\l@dcolwidth}
-%  This is a cunning way of storing the columnwidths indexed by 
+%  This is a cunning way of storing the columnwidths indexed by
 % the column number \protect\cs{l@dcolcount}, like an array. (was |\Dimenzuordnung|)
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\l@dcolwidth}{\ifcase \the\l@dcolcount \dcoli %???
@@ -19238,7 +19239,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\l@dsetmaxcolwidth}
-% Sets the column width to the maximum value seen so far. 
+% Sets the column width to the maximum value seen so far.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\l@dsetmaxcolwidth}{%
   \ifdim\l@dcolwidth < \wd\hilfsbox
@@ -19250,46 +19251,46 @@
 %
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\measuremcell}
-% Measure (recursively) the width required for a math cell. 
+% Measure (recursively) the width required for a math cell.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\measuremcell #1&{%
-    \ifx #1\\ \ifnum\l@dcolcount=0\let\NEXT\relax%  
+    \ifx #1\\ \ifnum\l@dcolcount=0\let\NEXT\relax%
               \else\l@dcheckcols%
-                    \l@dcolcount=0%    
+                    \l@dcolcount=0%
                     \let\NEXT\measuremcell%
               \fi%
     \else\setbox\hilfsbox=\hbox{$\displaystyle{#1}$}%
       \stepl@dcolcount%
       \l@dsetmaxcolwidth%
-      \let\NEXT\measuremcell% 
+      \let\NEXT\measuremcell%
     \fi\NEXT}
 
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\measuretcell}
-% Measure (recursively) the width required for a text cell. 
+% Measure (recursively) the width required for a text cell.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\measuretcell #1&{%
-    \ifx #1\\ \ifnum\l@dcolcount=0\let\NEXT\relax%  
+    \ifx #1\\ \ifnum\l@dcolcount=0\let\NEXT\relax%
               \else\l@dcheckcols%
-                    \l@dcolcount=0%    
+                    \l@dcolcount=0%
                     \let\NEXT\measuretcell%
               \fi%
     \else\setbox\hilfsbox=\hbox{#1}%
       \stepl@dcolcount%
       \l@dsetmaxcolwidth%
-      \let\NEXT\measuretcell% 
+      \let\NEXT\measuretcell%
     \fi\NEXT}
 
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\measuremrow}
-% Measure (recursively) the width required for a math row. 
+% Measure (recursively) the width required for a math row.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\measuremrow #1\\{%
-   \ifx #1&\let\NEXT\relax% 
+   \ifx #1&\let\NEXT\relax%
    \else\measuremcell #1&\\&\\&%
       \let\NEXT\measuremrow%
    \fi\NEXT}
@@ -19297,10 +19298,10 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\measuretrow}
-% Measure (recursively) the width required for a text row. 
+% Measure (recursively) the width required for a text row.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\measuretrow #1\\{%
-   \ifx #1&\let\NEXT\relax% 
+   \ifx #1&\let\NEXT\relax%
    \else\measuretcell #1&\\&\\&%
      \let\NEXT\measuretrow%
    \fi\NEXT}
@@ -19312,7 +19313,7 @@
 % The length \protect\cs{edtabcolsep} controls the distance between columns.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newskip\edtabcolsep
-\global\edtabcolsep=10pt 
+\global\edtabcolsep=10pt
 
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
@@ -19326,7 +19327,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\l@dcheckcols}
-% Check that the number of columns is consistent. 
+% Check that the number of columns is consistent.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\l@dcheckcols}{%
   \ifnum\l@dcolcount=1\relax
@@ -19347,7 +19348,7 @@
 %
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\edfilldimen}
-% A length. 
+% A length.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newdimen\edfilldimen
 \edfilldimen=0pt
@@ -19368,16 +19369,16 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \subsubsection{Tabular typesetting}
 % \begin{macro}{\setmcellright}
-% Typeset (recursively) cells of display math right justified. 
+% Typeset (recursively) cells of display math right justified.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\setmcellright #1&{\def\edlabel##1{}%
        \let\edindex\nulledindex
        \ifx #1\\ \ifnum\l@dcolcount=0%\removelastskip
-                     \let\Next\relax% 
-                \else\l@dcolcount=0% 
-                      \let\Next=\setmcellright% 
+                     \let\Next\relax%
+                \else\l@dcolcount=0%
+                      \let\Next=\setmcellright%
                 \fi%
-       \else% 
+       \else%
            \disablel@dtabfeet%
            \stepl@dcolcount%
            \disable@notes%
@@ -19386,23 +19387,23 @@
            \letsforverteilen%
            \hskip\hilfsskip$\displaystyle{#1}$%
            \hskip\edtabcolsep%
-           \let\Next=\setmcellright% 
+           \let\Next=\setmcellright%
        \fi\Next}
 
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\settcellright}
-% Typeset (recursively) cells of text right justified. 
+% Typeset (recursively) cells of text right justified.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\settcellright #1&{\def\edlabel##1{}%
        \let\edindex\nulledindex
        \ifx #1\\ \ifnum\l@dcolcount=0%\removelastskip
-                    \let\Next\relax% 
-                \else\l@dcolcount=0% 
-                      \let\Next=\settcellright% 
+                    \let\Next\relax%
+                \else\l@dcolcount=0%
+                      \let\Next=\settcellright%
                 \fi%
-       \else% 
+       \else%
            \disablel@dtabfeet%
            \stepl@dcolcount%
            \disable@notes%
@@ -19411,21 +19412,21 @@
            \letsforverteilen%
            \hskip\hilfsskip#1%
            \hskip\edtabcolsep%
-           \let\Next=\settcellright% 
+           \let\Next=\settcellright%
        \fi\Next}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\setmcellleft}
-% Typeset (recursively) cells of display math left justified. 
+% Typeset (recursively) cells of display math left justified.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\setmcellleft #1&{\def\edlabel##1{}%
     \let\edindex\nulledindex
     \ifx #1\\ \ifnum\l@dcolcount=0 \let\Next\relax%
               \else\l@dcolcount=0%
-                    \let\Next=\setmcellleft% 
+                    \let\Next=\setmcellleft%
               \fi%
-     \else   \disablel@dtabfeet%   
+     \else   \disablel@dtabfeet%
               \stepl@dcolcount%
               \disable@notes%
               \setbox\hilfsbox=\hbox{$\displaystyle{#1}$}%
@@ -19439,15 +19440,15 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\settcellleft}
-% Typeset (recursively) cells of text left justified. 
+% Typeset (recursively) cells of text left justified.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\settcellleft #1&{\def\edlabel##1{}%
     \let\edindex\nulledindex
     \ifx #1\\ \ifnum\l@dcolcount=0 \let\Next\relax%
               \else\l@dcolcount=0%
-                    \let\Next=\settcellleft% 
+                    \let\Next=\settcellleft%
               \fi%
-     \else   \disablel@dtabfeet%   
+     \else   \disablel@dtabfeet%
               \stepl@dcolcount%
               \disable@notes%
               \setbox\hilfsbox=\hbox{#1}%
@@ -19460,7 +19461,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\setmcellcenter}
-% Typeset (recursively) cells of display math centered. 
+% Typeset (recursively) cells of display math centered.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\setmcellcenter #1&{\def\edlabel##1{}%
     \let\edindex\nulledindex
@@ -19483,15 +19484,15 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\settcellcenter}
-% Typeset (recursively) cells of text centered. 
+% Typeset (recursively) cells of text centered.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\settcellcenter #1&{\def\edlabel##1{}%
     \let\edindex\nulledindex
     \ifx #1\\ \ifnum\l@dcolcount=0 \let\Next\relax%
               \else\l@dcolcount=0%
-                    \let\Next=\settcellcenter% 
+                    \let\Next=\settcellcenter%
               \fi%
-     \else   \disablel@dtabfeet%   
+     \else   \disablel@dtabfeet%
               \stepl@dcolcount%
               \disable@notes%
               \setbox\hilfsbox=\hbox{#1}%
@@ -19513,7 +19514,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\setmrowright}
-% Typeset (recursively) rows of right justified math. 
+% Typeset (recursively) rows of right justified math.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\setmrowright #1\\{%
     \ifx #1& \let\NEXT\relax
@@ -19524,7 +19525,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\settrowright}
-% Typeset (recursively) rows of right justified text. 
+% Typeset (recursively) rows of right justified text.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\settrowright #1\\{%
     \ifx #1& \let\NEXT\relax
@@ -19536,7 +19537,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\setmrowleft}
-% Typeset (recursively) rows of left justified math. 
+% Typeset (recursively) rows of left justified math.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\setmrowleft #1\\{%
     \ifx #1&\let\NEXT\relax
@@ -19547,7 +19548,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\settrowleft}
-% Typeset (recursively) rows of left justified text. 
+% Typeset (recursively) rows of left justified text.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\settrowleft #1\\{%
     \ifx #1& \let\NEXT\relax
@@ -19559,7 +19560,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\setmrowcenter}
-% Typeset (recursively) rows of centered math. 
+% Typeset (recursively) rows of centered math.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\setmrowcenter #1\\{%
     \ifx #1& \let\NEXT\relax%
@@ -19570,7 +19571,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\settrowcenter}
-% Typeset (recursively) rows of centered text. 
+% Typeset (recursively) rows of centered text.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\settrowcenter #1\\{%
     \ifx #1& \let\NEXT\relax
@@ -19582,7 +19583,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\nullsetzen}
-% 
+%
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\nullsetzen}{%
     \stepl@dcolcount%
@@ -19601,10 +19602,10 @@
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\edatleft}[3][\@empty]{%
   \ifx#1\@empty
-    \vbox to 10pt{\vss\hbox{$\left#2\vrule width0pt height #3 
+    \vbox to 10pt{\vss\hbox{$\left#2\vrule width0pt height #3
                            depth 0pt \right. $\hss}\vfil}
-  \else 
-    \vbox to 4pt{\vss\hbox{$#1\left#2\vrule width0pt height #3 
+  \else
+    \vbox to 4pt{\vss\hbox{$#1\left#2\vrule width0pt height #3
                 depth 0pt \right. $}\vfil}
   \fi}
 %    \end{macrocode}
@@ -19620,7 +19621,7 @@
     \vbox to 10pt{\vss\hbox{$\left.\vrule width0pt height #3
                 depth 0pt \right#2 $\hss}\vfil}
   \else
-    \vbox to 4pt{\vss\hbox{$\left.\vrule width0pt height #3 
+    \vbox to 4pt{\vss\hbox{$\left.\vrule width0pt height #3
                 depth 0pt \right#2 #1 $}\vfil}
   \fi}
 
@@ -19629,7 +19630,7 @@
 %
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\edvertline}
-% \protect\cs{edvertline}\marg{len} vertical line \meta{len} high. 
+% \protect\cs{edvertline}\marg{len} vertical line \meta{len} high.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\edvertline}[1]{\vbox to 8pt{\vss\hbox{\vrule height #1}\vfil}}
 
@@ -19637,7 +19638,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\edvertdots}
-% \protect\cs{edvertdots}\marg{len} vertical dotted line \meta{len} high. 
+% \protect\cs{edvertdots}\marg{len} vertical dotted line \meta{len} high.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\edvertdots}[1]{\vbox to 1pt{\vss\vbox to #1%
          {\cleaders\hbox{$\m@th\hbox{.}\vbox to 0.5em{ }$}\vfil}}}
@@ -19650,7 +19651,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\l@dtabaddcols}
 %  \protect\cs{l@dtabaddcols}\marg{startcol}\marg{endcol} adds the widths of
 % the columns \meta{startcol} through \meta{endcol} to \protect\cs{edfilldimen}.
-% It is a \LaTeX\ style 
+% It is a \LaTeX\ style
 % reimplementation of the original \protect\cs{@add@}.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\l@dtabaddcols}[2]{%
@@ -19670,7 +19671,7 @@
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\ifl@dstartendok}
 % \begin{macro}{\l@dcheckstartend}
-% \protect\cs{l@dcheckstartend}\marg{startcol}\marg{endcol} checks that the values 
+% \protect\cs{l@dcheckstartend}\marg{startcol}\marg{endcol} checks that the values
 % of \meta{startcol} and \meta{endcol} are sensible. If they are then
 % \protect\cs{ifl@dstartendok} is set TRUE, otherwise it is set FALSE.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -19705,7 +19706,7 @@
 % original \protect\cs{waklam}, \protect\cs{Waklam}, \protect\cs{waklamec}, \protect\cs{wastricht}
 % and \protect\cs{wapunktel} macros.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\edrowfill}[3]{% 
+\newcommand*{\edrowfill}[3]{%
   \l@dtabaddcols{#1}{#2}%
   \hb@xt@ \the\l@dcolwidth{\hb@xt@ \the\edfilldimen{#3}\hss}}
 \let\@edrowfill@=\edrowfill
@@ -19715,7 +19716,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
-% 
+%
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\edbeforetab}
 % \DescribeMacro{\edaftertab}
@@ -19728,9 +19729,9 @@
 % The following macros support these.
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\leftltab}
-% \protect\cs{leftltab}\marg{text} for \protect\cs{edbeforetab} in \protect\cs{ltab}. 
+% \protect\cs{leftltab}\marg{text} for \protect\cs{edbeforetab} in \protect\cs{ltab}.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\leftltab}[1]{%   
+\newcommand{\leftltab}[1]{%
   \hb@xt@\z@{\vbox{\edtabindent%
   \moveleft\Hilfsskip\hbox{\ #1}}\hss}}
 
@@ -19738,9 +19739,9 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\leftrtab}
-% \protect\cs{leftrtab}\marg{text}\marg{math} for \protect\cs{edbeforetab} in \protect\cs{rtab}. 
+% \protect\cs{leftrtab}\marg{text}\marg{math} for \protect\cs{edbeforetab} in \protect\cs{rtab}.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\leftrtab}[2]{%  
+\newcommand{\leftrtab}[2]{%
   #2\hb@xt@\z@{\vbox{\edtabindent%
     \advance\Hilfsskip by\dcoli%
     \moveleft\Hilfsskip\hbox{\ #1}}\hss}}
@@ -19749,9 +19750,9 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\leftctab}
-% \protect\cs{leftctab}\marg{text}\marg{math} for \protect\cs{edbeforetab} in \protect\cs{ctab}. 
+% \protect\cs{leftctab}\marg{text}\marg{math} for \protect\cs{edbeforetab} in \protect\cs{ctab}.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\leftctab}[2]{%   
+\newcommand{\leftctab}[2]{%
         \hb@xt@\z@{\vbox{\edtabindent\l@dcolcount=\l@dampcount%
         \advance\Hilfsskip by 0.5\dcoli%
         \setbox\hilfsbox=\hbox{\def\edlabel##1{}%
@@ -19764,13 +19765,13 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\rightctab}
-% \protect\cs{rightctab}\marg{math}\marg{text} for \protect\cs{edaftertab} in \protect\cs{ctab}. 
+% \protect\cs{rightctab}\marg{math}\marg{text} for \protect\cs{edaftertab} in \protect\cs{ctab}.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\rightctab}[2]{% 
+\newcommand{\rightctab}[2]{%
         \setbox\hilfsbox=\hbox{\def\edlabel##1{}%
         \disablel@dtabfeet#2}\l@dampcount=\l@dcolcount%
         #1\hb@xt@\z@{\vbox{\edtabindent\l@dcolcount=\l@dampcount%
-        \advance\Hilfsskip by 0.5\l@dcolwidth%  
+        \advance\Hilfsskip by 0.5\l@dcolwidth%
         \advance\Hilfsskip by -\wd\hilfsbox%
         \setbox\hilfsbox=\hbox{\def\edlabel##1{}%
         \disablel@dtabfeet$\displaystyle{#1}$}%
@@ -19783,9 +19784,9 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\rightltab}
-% \protect\cs{rightltab}\marg{math}\marg{text} for \protect\cs{edaftertab} in \protect\cs{ltab}. 
+% \protect\cs{rightltab}\marg{math}\marg{text} for \protect\cs{edaftertab} in \protect\cs{ltab}.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\rightltab}[2]{%  
+\newcommand{\rightltab}[2]{%
         \setbox\hilfsbox=\hbox{\def\edlabel##1{}%
         \disablel@dtabfeet#2}\l@dampcount=\l@dcolcount%
         #1\hb@xt@\z@{\vbox{\edtabindent\l@dcolcount=\l@dampcount%
@@ -19802,9 +19803,9 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\rightrtab}
-% \protect\cs{rightrtab}\marg{math}\marg{text} for \protect\cs{edaftertab} in \protect\cs{rtab}. 
+% \protect\cs{rightrtab}\marg{math}\marg{text} for \protect\cs{edaftertab} in \protect\cs{rtab}.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\rightrtab}[2]{%  
+\newcommand{\rightrtab}[2]{%
         \setbox\hilfsbox=\hbox{\def\edlabel##1{}%
         \disablel@dtabfeet#2}%
         #1\hb@xt@\z@{\vbox{\edtabindent%
@@ -19820,8 +19821,8 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\edbeforetab}
 % \begin{macro}{\edaftertab}
 % \protect\cs{rtab}\marg{body} typesets \meta{body} as an array with the
-% entries right justified. 
-% 
+% entries right justified.
+%
 %
 %    The process is first to measure the \meta{body} to get the column
 % widths, and then in a second pass to typeset the body.
@@ -19857,7 +19858,7 @@
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\rtabtext}
 % \protect\cs{rtabtext}\marg{body} typesets \meta{body} as a tabular with the
-% entries right justified. 
+% entries right justified.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\rtabtext}[1]{%
  \l@dnullfills
@@ -19889,7 +19890,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\ltab}
 % \begin{macro}{\edbeforetab}
 % \begin{macro}{\edaftertab}
-% Array with entries left justified. 
+% Array with entries left justified.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\ltab}[1]{%
  \l@dnullfills
@@ -19907,7 +19908,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\ltabtext}
-% Tabular with entries left justified. 
+% Tabular with entries left justified.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\ltabtext}[1]{%
   \l@dnullfills
@@ -19923,7 +19924,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\ctab}
 % \begin{macro}{\edbeforetab}
 % \begin{macro}{\edaftertab}
-% Array with centered entries. 
+% Array with centered entries.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\ctab}[1]{%
   \l@dnullfills
@@ -19941,7 +19942,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\ctabtext}
-% Tabular with entries centered. 
+% Tabular with entries centered.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\ctabtext}[1]{%
   \l@dnullfills
@@ -19955,7 +19956,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\spreadtext}
-% 
+%
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\spreadtext}[1]{%\l@dcolcount=\l@dampcount%
    \hb@xt@ \the\l@dcolwidth{\hbox{#1}\hss}}
@@ -19963,7 +19964,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\spreadmath}
-% 
+%
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\spreadmath}[1]{%
   \hb@xt@ \the\l@dcolwidth{\hbox{$\displaystyle{#1}$}\hss}}
@@ -19986,15 +19987,15 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\EDTABINDENT}
-% 
+%
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\EDTABINDENT}{%  
+\newcommand{\EDTABINDENT}{%
     \ifnum\l@dcolcount=30\let\NEXT\relax\l@dcolcount=0%
     \else\stepl@dcolcount%
-         \advance\Hilfsskip by\l@dcolwidth% 
+         \advance\Hilfsskip by\l@dcolwidth%
          \ifdim\l@dcolwidth=0pt\advance\hilfscount\@ne
-         \else\advance\Hilfsskip by \the\hilfscount\edtabcolsep%  
-         \hilfscount=1\fi%                                  
+         \else\advance\Hilfsskip by \the\hilfscount\edtabcolsep%
+         \hilfscount=1\fi%
          \let\NEXT=\EDTABINDENT%
     \fi\NEXT}%
 %    \end{macrocode}
@@ -20003,14 +20004,14 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\edtabindent}
 % (was |\tabindent|)
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\edtabindent}{% 
+\newcommand{\edtabindent}{%
     \l@dcolcount=0\relax
     \Hilfsskip=0pt%
     \hilfscount=1\relax
     \EDTABINDENT%
-    \hilfsskip=\hsize% 
-    \advance\hilfsskip -\Hilfsskip% 
-    \Hilfsskip=0.5\hilfsskip% 
+    \hilfsskip=\hsize%
+    \advance\hilfsskip -\Hilfsskip%
+    \Hilfsskip=0.5\hilfsskip%
     }%
 
 %    \end{macrocode}
@@ -20098,7 +20099,7 @@
 % \changes{v1.4.7}{2012/06/07}{Compatibility of sectioning commands with \protect\cs{autopar}.}
 % \changes{v1.8.0}{2013/12/13}{Correction of sectioning commands in parallel texts.}
 % \changes{v1.10.0}{2014/02/27}{Correction of sectioning commands in parallel texts.}
-% \protect\cs{initnumbering@quote} defines  quotation environment. 
+% \protect\cs{initnumbering@quote} defines  quotation environment.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\initnumbering@quote}{
     \ifnoquotation@\else
@@ -20191,10 +20192,10 @@
 %    \end{itemize}
 %   \item This last command is called when the pstart is effectively printed.
 % \end{enumerate}
-% \subsection{\protect\cs{beforeeledchapter} command} 
+% \subsection{\protect\cs{beforeeledchapter} command}
 % We do not define commands for \protect\cs{eledsection} and related if the \verb+noeledsec+ option is loaded.
 % We use \protect\package{etoolbox} tests and not the \protect\cs{ifxxx}\ldots\protect\cs{else}\ldots\protect\cs{fi} structure to prevent problem of expansions with command after the \protect\cs{ifxxx} which contains \protect\cs{fi}.
-% As we patch command inside this test, we need to change the category code of \# character \emph{before} \protect\cs{notbool} statement, because the second argument is read with the standard catcode (read \thetexbook to understand when the catcode's change has effect). 
+% As we patch command inside this test, we need to change the category code of \# character \emph{before} \protect\cs{notbool} statement, because the second argument is read with the standard catcode (read \thetexbook to understand when the catcode's change has effect).
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \catcode`\#=12
 \notbool{@noeled@sec}{%
@@ -20221,12 +20222,12 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\print@leftmargin@eledsection}
 % \begin{macro}{\print@rightmargin@eledsection}
 % \protect\cs{print@leftmargin@eledsection} and \protect\cs{print@rightmargin@eledsection} are added by \macpackage\ inside the code of sectioning command, in order to affix lines numbers.
-% They include tests for RTL languages. 
+% They include tests for RTL languages.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\print@rightmargin@eledsection{%
   \if@eled@sectioning%
     \begingroup%
-    \if@RTL%  
+    \if@RTL%
         \let\llap\rlap%
         \let\leftlinenum\rightlinenum%
         \let\leftlinenumR\rightlinenumR%
@@ -20271,11 +20272,11 @@
 % \begin{itemize}
 %  \item Disable \protect\cs{edtext} inside.
 %  \item Disable page breaking (for \protect\cs{chapter}).
-%  \item Add line numbers and sidenotes. 
+%  \item Add line numbers and sidenotes.
 % \end{itemize}
 % Unfortunately, Maïeul Rouquette was not able to try if \protect\ltxclass{memoir} is loaded. That is why \protect\package{eledmac} tries to define for both standard class and \protect\ltxclass{memoir} class.
 %
-%   
+%
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \AtBeginDocument{%
 
@@ -20386,7 +20387,7 @@
   {\let\edtext=\old@edtext}
   {}
   {}
-  
+
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \changes{v1.14.1}{2014/12/15}{Debug sectioning commands when using both \protect\package{handout} and \protect\package{hyperref} package.}
 % \protect\package{hyperref} also redefines  \protect\cs{@sect}. That is why, when manipulating arguments, we patch \protect\cs{@sect} and the same only if \protect\package{hyperref} is not used. If it is, we patch the \protect\cs{NR} commands.
@@ -20400,7 +20401,7 @@
     }
     {}
     {}
-  
+
   \patchcmd{\NR@sect}
     {\hskip #3\relax}
     {\hskip #3\relax%
@@ -20408,7 +20409,7 @@
     }
     {}
     {}
-  
+
   \patchcmd{\NR@ssect}
     {#5}
     {#5%
@@ -20416,7 +20417,7 @@
     }
     {}
     {}
-  
+
   \patchcmd{\NR@ssect}
     {\hskip #1}
     {\hskip #1%
@@ -20433,7 +20434,7 @@
     }
     {}
     {}
-  
+
   \patchcmd{\@sect}
     {\hskip #3\relax}
     {\hskip #3\relax%
@@ -20441,7 +20442,7 @@
     }
     {}
     {}
-  
+
   \patchcmd{\@ssect}
     {#5}
     {#5%
@@ -20449,7 +20450,7 @@
     }
     {}
     {}
-  
+
   \patchcmd{\@ssect}
     {\hskip #1}
     {\hskip #1%
@@ -20511,7 +20512,7 @@
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \notbool{@noeled@sec}{%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% \subsection{Main code of \protect\cs{eledxxx} commands} 
+% \subsection{Main code of \protect\cs{eledxxx} commands}
 % \begin{macro}{\eled@sectioning@out}
 % \protect\cs{eled@sectioning@out} is the output file, to dump the pstarts where a sectioning command is used.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -20586,7 +20587,7 @@
       }%
   \fi%
 }
- 
+
 
 \WithSuffix\newcommand\eledchapter*[2][]{%
   \disable@familiarnotes%
@@ -20602,7 +20603,7 @@
       }%
   \fi%
 }
- 
+
 \WithSuffix\newcommand\eledsection*[2][]{%
   \disable@familiarnotes%
   #2%
@@ -20617,7 +20618,7 @@
       }%
   \fi%
 }
-  
+
 \WithSuffix\newcommand\eledsubsection*[2][]{%
   \disable@familiarnotes%
   #2%
@@ -20632,7 +20633,7 @@
       }%
   \fi%
 }
-  
+
 \WithSuffix\newcommand\eledsubsubsection*[2][]{%
   \disable@familiarnotes%
   #2%
@@ -20699,7 +20700,7 @@
         }%
         {%
         \csgdef{eled@sectioning@#3#5}{\section[#1]{#2}}%
-        \csgdef{eled@sectmark@#3#5}{\let\edtext=\dummy@edtext{}\sectionmark{#1}}%Need for \pairs, because of using parbox.        
+        \csgdef{eled@sectmark@#3#5}{\let\edtext=\dummy@edtext{}\sectionmark{#1}}%Need for \pairs, because of using parbox.
         }%
       }%
       {\ifstrempty{#1}%
@@ -20713,11 +20714,11 @@
       {\ifstrempty{#1}%
         {%
         \csgdef{eled@sectioning@#3#5}{\subsection{#2}}%
-        \csgdef{eled@sectmark@#3#5}{\let\edtext=\dummy@edtext{}\csuse{subsectionmark}{#2}}%Need for \pairs, because of using parbox. \csuse in case of \subsectionmark is not defined (book)    
+        \csgdef{eled@sectmark@#3#5}{\let\edtext=\dummy@edtext{}\csuse{subsectionmark}{#2}}%Need for \pairs, because of using parbox. \csuse in case of \subsectionmark is not defined (book)
         }%
         {%
         \csgdef{eled@sectioning@#3#5}{\subsection[#1]{#2}}%
-        \csgdef{eled@sectmark@#3#5}{\let\edtext=\dummy@edtext{}\csuse{subsectionmark}{#1}}%Need for \pairs, because of using parbox. \csuse in case of \subsectionmark is not defined (book)    
+        \csgdef{eled@sectmark@#3#5}{\let\edtext=\dummy@edtext{}\csuse{subsectionmark}{#1}}%Need for \pairs, because of using parbox. \csuse in case of \subsectionmark is not defined (book)
         }%
       }%
       {\ifstrempty{#1}%
@@ -20815,7 +20816,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\led@check@pb}
 % \begin{macro}{\led@check@nopb}
-% The \protect\cs{led@check@pb} and \protect\cs{led@check@nopb} are called before or after each line. 
+% The \protect\cs{led@check@pb} and \protect\cs{led@check@nopb} are called before or after each line.
 % They check if a page break must occur, depending on the current line and on the content of \protect\cs{l@pb}.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\led@check@pb}{\xifinlist{\the\absline@num}{\l@prev@pb}{\pagebreak[4]}{}}
@@ -20849,7 +20850,7 @@
 % The declaration is made at the beginning of the file, because it is used as a package option.
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\check@pb@in@verse}
-% The \protect\cs{check@pb@in@verse} checks if a verse is broken in two page. 
+% The \protect\cs{check@pb@in@verse} checks if a verse is broken in two page.
 % If true, it adds:
 % \begin{itemize}
 %  \item The absolute line number of the first line of the verse -1  in the \protect\cs{led@pb} list, if the page break must occur before the verse.
@@ -20879,15 +20880,15 @@
 % However, this command disrupts the line breaking mechanism when it is called before any word.
 % This is why \macpackage\ defines \cs{Hy@raisedlink@left} that is called to the left of words, at the beginning of \cs{edtext} or inside the \cs{edlabel} commands.\footnote{The code is inspired by an answer given by @unbonpetit.
 % Thanks to him.
-% \url{http://texnique.fr:80/osqa/questions/781/hyraisedlink-perturbe-la-maniere-dont-se-fait-la-coupure-de-ligne/801}.} 
-% 
+% \url{http://texnique.fr:80/osqa/questions/781/hyraisedlink-perturbe-la-maniere-dont-se-fait-la-coupure-de-ligne/801}.}
+%
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\Hy@raisedlink@left#1{%
     \ifvmode
         #1%
     \else
         \Hy@SaveSpaceFactor
-        \llap{\smash{% 
+        \llap{\smash{%
         \begingroup
             \let\HyperRaiseLinkLength\@tempdima
             \setlength\HyperRaiseLinkLength\HyperRaiseLinkDefault
@@ -20898,7 +20899,7 @@
             #1%
             \Hy@SaveSpaceFactor
         }%
-        }}% 
+        }}%
         \Hy@RestoreSpaceFactor
         \penalty\@M\hskip\z@\relax
     \fi
@@ -20908,7 +20909,7 @@
 % \section{Compatibility with \eledmac}
 %
 % Here, we define some commands for the \verb+eledmac-compat+ option.
-% 
+%
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \ifeledmaccompat@%
 
@@ -20916,7 +20917,7 @@
   \newcommand{\footparagraphX}[1]{\arrangementX[#1]{paragraph}}%
   \newcommand{\foottwocolX}[1]{\arrangementX[#1]{twocol}}%
   \newcommand{\footthreecolX}[1]{\XarrangementX[#1]{threecol}}%
-  
+
   \unless\ifnocritical@
     \newcommand{\footnormal}[1]{\Xarrangement[#1]{normal}}%
     \newcommand{\footparagraph}[1]{\Xarrangement[#1]{paragraph}}%
@@ -20957,7 +20958,7 @@
     \let\twolinesbutnotmore\Xtwolinesbutnotmore
     \let\twolinesonlyinsamepage\Xtwolinesonlyinsamepage
   \fi
-  
+
   \unless\ifnofamiliar@
     \let\notesXwidthliketwocolumns\noteswidthliketwocolumnsX
   \fi
@@ -20965,12 +20966,12 @@
       \Xparafootsep[#1]{#2}%
       \parafootsepX[#1]{#2}
   }%
-  
+
   \newcommandx{\afternote}[2][1,usedefault]{%
       \Xafternote[#1]{#2}%
       \afternoteX[#1]{#2}%
   }%
-  
+
   \unless\ifnoend@
     \let\XendXtwolines\Xendtwolines
     \let\XendXmorethantwolines\Xendmorethantwolines
@@ -20978,13 +20979,13 @@
     \let\boxXendlinenum\Xendboxlinenum%
     \let\boxXendlinenumalign\Xendboxlinenumalign%
     \let\boxXendstartlinenum\Xendboxstartlinenum%
-    \let\boxXendendlinenum\Xendboxendlinenum% 
+    \let\boxXendendlinenum\Xendboxendlinenum%
     \let\XendXlemmaseparator\Xendlemmaseparator
     \let\XendXbeforelemmaseparator\Xendbeforelemmaseparator
     \let\XendXafterlemmaseparator\Xendafterlemmaseparator
     \let\XendXinplaceoflemmaseparator\Xendinplaceoflemmaseparator
   \fi
-  
+
   \AtBeginDocument{%
     \ifdef\lineref{}{\let\lineref\edlineref}%
   }%
@@ -20992,12 +20993,13 @@
 
 \fi%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% 
+%
 %</code>
 % \newpage
 % \appendix
 % \let\oldthesection\thesection
 % \renewcommand{\thesection}{Appendix \oldthesection}
+% \renewcommand{\thesubsection}{\oldthesection.\arabic{subsection}}
 % \section{Things to do when changing versions}
 % \input{doc-include/migrate-mac.dtx}
 % \clearpage
@@ -21029,7 +21031,7 @@
 %
 % \bibitem[Fai03]{FOOTMISC}
 % Robin Fairbairns.
-% \newblock \emph{\protect\package{footmisc}\,---\,a portmanteau package for 
+% \newblock \emph{\protect\package{footmisc}\,---\,a portmanteau package for
 %          customising footnotes in \LaTeX}.
 % \newblock February 2003.
 % \newblock (Available from CTAN in
@@ -21067,7 +21069,7 @@
 %
 % \bibitem[Wil04]{ELEDPAR}
 % Peter Wilson and Maïeul Rouquette.
-% \newblock \emph{Parallel typesetting for critical editions: 
+% \newblock \emph{Parallel typesetting for critical editions:
 %               the \protect\package{eledpar} package}.
 % \newblock December 2004.
 % \newblock (Available from CTAN in
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/reledmac/reledpar.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/reledmac/reledpar.dtx
index 51dc236a986..90c8adf1c4d 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/reledmac/reledpar.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/reledmac/reledpar.dtx
@@ -1,13 +1,13 @@
 % \iffalse meta-comment
 %
 % reledpar.dtx
-% Author: Peter Wilson (Herries Press) herries dot press at earthlink dot net 
+% Author: Peter Wilson (Herries Press) herries dot press at earthlink dot net
 % Maintainer:Maïeul Rouquette maieul at maieul dot net
 % Copyright 2004, 2005 Peter R. Wilson / 2011-.. Maïeul Rouquette
 %
 % This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
 % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
-% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any 
+% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any
 % later version.
 % The latest version of the license is in
 %    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@
  \let\parpackage\reledpar
  \let\Macpackage\reledmac
  \let\Parpackage\reledpar
- 
+
   \newcommand{\texbook}{\textit{TeXbook}\xspace}
   \newcommand{\thetexbook}{\textit{The TeXbook}\xspace}
 \pagestyle{headings}
@@ -162,7 +162,7 @@
 %
 % \newcommand{\dtxfilename}{\texttt{reledpar.dtx}}
 % \GetFileInfo{reledpar.sty}
-% ^^A Put changes in the right order : see http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/74113/7712 
+% ^^A Put changes in the right order : see http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/74113/7712
 %  \let\org@changes@\changes@
 %    \def\my@changes v#1.#2.#3\@nil{%
 %      \org@changes@{v#1.\six@digits{#2}.#3=v#1.#2.#3}%
@@ -233,15 +233,15 @@
 % \changes{v1.16.2}{2015/05/29}{Fix a bug when adding empty lines before a \protect\cs{pend} in combination with some specific penalties setting.}
 % \changes{v1.17.0}{2015/06/02}{Add compatibility of optional argument of \protect\cs{pstart}/\protect\cs{pend} and \protect\cs{AtEveryPstart}/\protect\cs{AtEveryPend} with two columns mode.}
 % \changes{v2.0.0}{2015/07/19}{Many code refactored and moved to \reledmac.}
-% \changes{v2.0.0}{2015/07/19}{Package's name becomes \reledpar.} 
-% \changes{v2.0.0}{2015/07/19}{Fix some bugs with `sameparallelpagenumber' option.} 
-% \changes{v2.0.0}{2015/07/19}{Totally new implementation of `sameparallelpagenumber' option.} 
-% \changes{v2.1.0}{2015/07/27}{Fix a bug with \protect\cs{setparledgroupnotespacing} with the shiftedpstarts option.} 
+% \changes{v2.0.0}{2015/07/19}{Package's name becomes \reledpar.}
+% \changes{v2.0.0}{2015/07/19}{Fix some bugs with `sameparallelpagenumber' option.}
+% \changes{v2.0.0}{2015/07/19}{Totally new implementation of `sameparallelpagenumber' option.}
+% \changes{v2.1.0}{2015/07/27}{Fix a bug with \protect\cs{setparledgroupnotespacing} with the shiftedpstarts option.}
 % \changes{v2.1.0}{2015/07/27}{Fix incompatibility between optional argument of \protect\cs{pstart} and \protect\cs{numberpstarttrue}}
-% \changes{v2.1.0}{2015/07/27}{Options to custom empty right page before \protect\cs{Pages}.} 
-% \changes{v2.1.0}{2015/07/27}{Fix a bug when using \protect\cs{pagenumbering} with memoir (bug added in v2.0.0).} 
-% \changes{v2.1.0}{2015/07/27}{Fix a bug when using \protect\cs{eledsection} and related on right pages when page width is short.} 
-% \changes{v2.2.0}{2015/08/08}{\protect\env{astanza} environment can take an optional argument, which will be the optional argument of \protect\cs{pstart} started by this environment.} 
+% \changes{v2.1.0}{2015/07/27}{Options to custom empty right page before \protect\cs{Pages}.}
+% \changes{v2.1.0}{2015/07/27}{Fix a bug when using \protect\cs{pagenumbering} with memoir (bug added in v2.0.0).}
+% \changes{v2.1.0}{2015/07/27}{Fix a bug when using \protect\cs{eledsection} and related on right pages when page width is short.}
+% \changes{v2.2.0}{2015/08/08}{\protect\env{astanza} environment can take an optional argument, which will be the optional argument of \protect\cs{pstart} started by this environment.}
 % \changes{v2.2.0}{2015/08/08}{New tools to number stanza}
 % \changes{v2.2.1}{2015/08/13}{Fix a bug with optional argument of last left \protect\cs{pend}}
 % \changes{v2.3.0}{2015/09/05}{Fix a bug with title number in parallel columns}
@@ -364,9 +364,9 @@
 %
 %
 % \begin{abstract}
-% The \macpackage package  has been used for some time for typesetting critical 
-% editions. The \parpackage package is an extension to \macpackage 
-% which enables texts and their critical apparatus to be typeset in 
+% The \macpackage package  has been used for some time for typesetting critical
+% editions. The \parpackage package is an extension to \macpackage
+% which enables texts and their critical apparatus to be typeset in
 % parallel, either in two columns or on pairs of facing pages.
 %
 %
@@ -380,13 +380,13 @@
 % \end{abstract}
 % \renewcommand{\numberline}[1]{#1~}
 % \tableofcontents
-% 
+%
 %
 %
 % \section{Introduction}
 %
-% 
-% \subsection{Aim of this package} 
+%
+% \subsection{Aim of this package}
 %
 %    Some critical editions contain texts in more than one form, such as
 % a set of verses in one language and their translations in another. In
@@ -397,31 +397,31 @@
 % facing pages.
 %
 %    The package has to try and coerce \TeX{} into paths it was not designed
-% for. Use of the package, therefore, may produce some surprising results. 
+% for. Use of the package, therefore, may produce some surprising results.
 % In this case, please reports them to the author via github's issues: \url{https://github.com/maieul/ledmac/issues/}.
 
-% This manual contains a general description of how to use 
+% This manual contains a general description of how to use
 % \parpackage starting in section~\ref{howto};
 % the complete source code for the package,
 % with extensive documentation (in sections~\ref{overview}
-% through \ref{end}); 
-% and an Index to the source code. As \parpackage is an adjunct to \macpackage 
+% through \ref{end});
+% and an Index to the source code. As \parpackage is an adjunct to \macpackage
 % we assume that you have read the \macpackage manual. Also \parpackage requires
 % \macpackage to be used, in the version distributed with version.
 %
-% You do not need to  read the source code for this package in order to 
+% You do not need to  read the source code for this package in order to
 % use it but doing so may help to answer any questions you might have. The documentation's sections are numbered in roman numeral.
 %
 % On a first reading,
 % We suggest that you should skip anything after the general documentation in
-% first sections  until~\ref{overview}, 
+% first sections  until~\ref{overview},
 % unless you are particularly interested in the innards of \parpackage.
 %
 % \subsection{Historical overview}
 % Many of the code of this package is based on the \eledpar package, which was based on the \ledpar, created as an extension of the \ledmac package.
 %
 % Names of the package related to parallel typesetting have moved in parallel of names of the package related to critical edition.
-% 
+%
 % Please read \macpackage's handbook in order to understand this evolution.
 %
 % \section{Options}
@@ -435,7 +435,7 @@
 %       the page instead.
 %    \item [advancedshiftedpstarts] does the same as \option{shiftedpstarts}, but
 %       the pstart shift are not counted to determine when cutting the page. That
-%       could help to avoid page with blank lines at the bottom. 
+%       could help to avoid page with blank lines at the bottom.
 %    \item [nomaxlines] allows facing pages to have different numbers of lines.
 %    \item [nosyncpstarts] disables syncing on facing pages. In that case the pages
 %       are filled as two streams normal.
@@ -448,7 +448,7 @@
 %       columns with \parpackage. This is useful when alternating between normal and
 %       parallel typesetting.\footnote{This option can either be used on \macpackage or \parpackage.}
 %   \item [continuousnumberingwithcolumns] allow you to alternate between normal typesetting and parallel column typesetting without resetting the line number (see \reff{continuousnumberingwithcolumns}).
-%    \item [sidenotesmarginpage] makes the sidenotes be placed on the margin of the page and not on the margin of the columns.  
+%    \item [sidenotesmarginpage] makes the sidenotes be placed on the margin of the page and not on the margin of the columns.
 %    \item [sameparallelpagenumber] sets page numbers on facing pages to the same value.
 %    \item [prevpgnotnumbered] enables that the page before facing pages (the one
 %       automatically inserted to start parallel pages on a left page) is not
@@ -456,7 +456,7 @@
 %    \item[movecolumnspositiononrightpage] make the left column on the right page become the right column, and the left column become the right column.
 % It allows to have a text running on the inner column, and an other one on the outer column.
 % \end{description}
-% 
+%
 %
 % \section{General}\label{howto}
 %
@@ -477,27 +477,27 @@
 % on which they are called out --- that is, footnotes belonging to the left
 % are set at the foot of a left (even numbered) page, and those for right
 % texts are at the bottom of the relevant right (odd numbered) page. However,
-% in the columnar case, all footnotes are set at the bottom left of the 
-% page on which they are called out --- they are not set below the 
-% relevant column. 
-% 
+% in the columnar case, all footnotes are set at the bottom left of the
+% page on which they are called out --- they are not set below the
+% relevant column.
 %
 %
-% \Macpackage essentially puts each chunk of numbered text 
-% (the text within a \protect\cs{pstart} \ldots \protect\cs{pend}) into a box and then 
-% following the \protect\cs{pend} extracts the text line by line from the box 
+%
+% \Macpackage essentially puts each chunk of numbered text
+% (the text within a \protect\cs{pstart} \ldots \protect\cs{pend}) into a box and then
+% following the \protect\cs{pend} extracts the text line by line from the box
 % to number and print it. More precisely, the text is first put into the
 % the box as though it was being typeset as normal onto a page and
-% any notes are stored without being typeset. Then each typeset line 
+% any notes are stored without being typeset. Then each typeset line
 % is extracted from the box and any notes for that line are recalled.
 % The line, with any notes, is then output for printing, possibly with
 % a line number attached. Effectively, all the text is typeset and then
 % afterwards all the notes are typeset.
-% 
 %
-% \Parpackage similarly puts the left and right chunks into boxes but can't 
+%
+% \Parpackage similarly puts the left and right chunks into boxes but can't
 % immediately output the text after a \protect\cs{pend} --- it has to wait until
-% after both the left and right texts have been collected before it can 
+% after both the left and right texts have been collected before it can
 % start processing. This means that several boxes are required and possibly
 % \TeX\  has to store a lot of text in its memory; both the number of potential
 % boxes and memory are limited. If \TeX's memory is overfilled the recourse is
@@ -508,22 +508,22 @@
 % printing them. The macro \protect\cs{maxchunks}\marg{num} specifies the maximum
 % number of chunks within the left or right texts. This is initially set as: \\
 % \verb?\maxchunks{5120}? \\
-% meaning that there can be up to 5120 chunks in the left text and up to 
-% 5120 chunks in 
+% meaning that there can be up to 5120 chunks in the left text and up to
+% 5120 chunks in
 % the right text, requiring a total of 10240 boxes. If you need more chunks
 % then you can increase \protect\cs{maxchunks}. The \protect\cs{maxchunks} must be called in the preamble.
 %
 % If you \protect\cs{maxchunks} is too little
 %you can get a \parpackage{} error message along the
-% lines: ``Too many \protect\cs{pstart} without printing. Some text will be lost.'' 
+% lines: ``Too many \protect\cs{pstart} without printing. Some text will be lost.''
 % then you will have to either increase \protect\cs{maxchunks} or use the
 % parallel printing commands (\protect\cs{Columns} or \protect\cs{Pages}) more frequently.
 %
 % When typesetting verse using \protect\cs{stanza}, each line is treated as a chunk,
-% so be warned that if you are setting parallel verses you might have to 
+% so be warned that if you are setting parallel verses you might have to
 % increase \protect\cs{maxchunks} much more than it appears at first sight.
 %
-%    In general, \macpackage is a \TeX\  resource hog, and \parpackage{} only 
+%    In general, \macpackage is a \TeX\  resource hog, and \parpackage{} only
 % makes things worse in this respect.
 %
 % \section{Parallel columns}\label{columns}
@@ -531,13 +531,13 @@
 % \DescribeEnv{pairs}
 % Numbered text that is to be set in columns must be within a \verb?pairs?
 % environment. Within the environment the text for the lefthand and righthand
-% columns is placed within the \verb?Leftside? and \verb?Rightside? 
+% columns is placed within the \verb?Leftside? and \verb?Rightside?
 % environments, respectively; these are described in more detail below
 % in section~\ref{leftright}.
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\Columns}
 % The command \protect\cs{Columns} typesets the texts in the previous pair of
-% \verb?Leftside? and \verb?Rightside? environments. 
+% \verb?Leftside? and \verb?Rightside? environments.
 % The general scheme for parallel columns looks like this:
 % \begin{verbatim}
 % \begin{pairs}
@@ -563,7 +563,7 @@
 % \end{verbatim}
 % There is no required pagebreak before or after the columns.
 % \subsection{Setting}
-% \subsubsection{Column's width} 
+% \subsubsection{Column's width}
 % \DescribeMacro{\Lcolwidth}
 % \DescribeMacro{\Rcolwidth}
 % The lengths \protect\cs{Lcolwidth} and \protect\cs{Rcolwidth} are the widths of the left
@@ -575,7 +575,7 @@
 % \DescribeMacro{\columnrulewidth}
 % \DescribeMacro{\columnseparator}
 % The macro \protect\cs{columnseparator} is called between each left/right pair
-% of lines. By default it inserts a vertical rule of width 
+% of lines. By default it inserts a vertical rule of width
 % \protect\cs{columnrulewidth}. As this is initially defined to be 0pt the rule
 % is invisible. For a visible rule between the columns you could try: \\
 % \verb?\setlength{\columnrulewidth}{0.4pt}? \\
@@ -598,72 +598,72 @@
 %  \item On the right of columns, if columns are aligned left.
 %  \item On both the left and right columns, if columns are centered.
 % \end{itemize}
-% You can redefine \protect\cs{beforecolumnseparator} and \protect\cs{aftercolumnseparator} length to define spaces before or after the column separator, instead of letting \parpackage calculate them automatically. 
+% You can redefine \protect\cs{beforecolumnseparator} and \protect\cs{aftercolumnseparator} length to define spaces before or after the column separator, instead of letting \parpackage calculate them automatically.
 % \begin{verbatim}
 % \setlength{\beforecolumnseparator}{length}
 % \setlength{\aftercolumnseparator}{length}
 % \end{verbatim}
-% If you want to revert to the previous behavior, just set with a negative value. 
+% If you want to revert to the previous behavior, just set with a negative value.
 % \subsubsection{Mixing two columns and one column texts}
 % \DescribeMacro{\widthliketwocolumns}
 % If you want to mix two-column with single-column text, you can align horizontally single-column text to two-column text with \protect\cs{widthliketwocolumnstrue}. To reset this feature, use \protect\cs{widthliketwocolumnsfalse}.
 % You can also use \option{widthliketwocolumns} as a global option when loading \macpackage or \parpackage.
 
-% 
+%
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xnoteswidthliketwocolumns}
 % \DescribeMacro{\notesXwidthliketwocolumns}
-% In most cases, you should use \protect\cs{widthliketwocolumns} in combination with \protect\cs{Xnoteswidthliketwocolumns} and \protect\cs{notesXwidthliketwocolumns} to align the critical/familiar footnotes with the two colums. 
+% In most cases, you should use \protect\cs{widthliketwocolumns} in combination with \protect\cs{Xnoteswidthliketwocolumns} and \protect\cs{notesXwidthliketwocolumns} to align the critical/familiar footnotes with the two colums.
 % See \macpackage's handbook for more details.
 %
 % \subsubsection{Schemas of column typesetting}
 % Domenico Cufalo wrote a schema of the parallel column typesetting parameters, with explanations.
 % You can read the file \href{run:doc-more/page-typesetting-columns.pdf}{doc-more/page-typesetting-columns.pdf}.
-% 
+%
 % \subsubsection{Continuous numbering between single and double column texts}
-% \label{continuousnumberingwithcolumns}If you want to have continuous line 
-% numbers between multiple columns and single columns, use the 
-% \option{continuousnumberingwithcolumns} option when loading \macpackage 
+% \label{continuousnumberingwithcolumns}If you want to have continuous line
+% numbers between multiple columns and single columns, use the
+% \option{continuousnumberingwithcolumns} option when loading \macpackage
 % or \parpackage.
-% You will need to use \cs{pausenumbering}~…\ 
-% \cs{resumenumbering} in addition to \cs{beginnumbering}~…\ 
+% You will need to use \cs{pausenumbering}~…\
+% \cs{resumenumbering} in addition to \cs{beginnumbering}~…\
 % \cs{endnumbering} (see \reff{reledmac-pause}).
 %
-% The best way to understand the behaviour of \cs{pausenumbering} and 
-% \cs{resumenumbering} is to think of the left-column text as a continuation of 
-% single-column text (or, vice versa, to think of single-column text as 
-% left-column text), and of the right-column as independent text, which needs to be 
-% synchronised with the left one manually. The numbering commands in a 
-% right column are interconnected with each other, and not with the respective 
+% The best way to understand the behaviour of \cs{pausenumbering} and
+% \cs{resumenumbering} is to think of the left-column text as a continuation of
+% single-column text (or, vice versa, to think of single-column text as
+% left-column text), and of the right-column as independent text, which needs to be
+% synchronised with the left one manually. The numbering commands in a
+% right column are interconnected with each other, and not with the respective
 % left-column commands.
 %
-% This means that you must switch between single-column and left-column 
-% text using \cs{beginnumbering}~…\ \cs{pausenumbering}~…\ 
-% \cs{resumenumbering}~…\ \cs{pausenumbering}~…\ 
-% \cs{resumenumbering}~…\ \cs{endnumbering}. 
-%
-% On the other side, the first right column must always begin with 
-% \cs{beginnumbering}, no matter if the corresponding left-column started 
-% with \cs{resumenumbering} or not; this is because numbering in the right 
-% column has not been started yet. Then, for consecutive chunks of 
-% right-column text you should use \cs{pausenumbering}~…\ 
-% \cs{resumenumbering}. 
-% 
+% This means that you must switch between single-column and left-column
+% text using \cs{beginnumbering}~…\ \cs{pausenumbering}~…\
+% \cs{resumenumbering}~…\ \cs{pausenumbering}~…\
+% \cs{resumenumbering}~…\ \cs{endnumbering}.
+%
+% On the other side, the first right column must always begin with
+% \cs{beginnumbering}, no matter if the corresponding left-column started
+% with \cs{resumenumbering} or not; this is because numbering in the right
+% column has not been started yet. Then, for consecutive chunks of
+% right-column text you should use \cs{pausenumbering}~…\
+% \cs{resumenumbering}.
+%
 % You must use \cs{endnumbering} in a right column in the following cases:
 % \begin{itemize}
 %  \item there is also a \cs{endnumbering} in the left column, because the line numbering ends with a two columns mode (e.g. at the end of a document);
 %  \item there will be a \cs{endnumbering} in a text after the columns, in a single column mode, because the ligne numbering finishes with single column mode text.
 % \end{itemize}
-% Without this, you will 
+% Without this, you will
 % get wrong numbering when a right column reappears next time.
 %
-% The file 
-% \file{examples/4-reledpar_column_mix_with_not_column-continuous-numbering.tex} 
+% The file
+% \file{examples/4-reledpar_column_mix_with_not_column-continuous-numbering.tex}
 % covers all these cases.
 % \subsection{Note about \cs{AtEveryPstart*} and \cs{AtEveryPend*}}
 % The content of \cs{AtEveryPstart} / \cs{AtEveryPend} (without star) is added before every \cs{pstart} / after every \cs{pend}, respecting the left / right side.
 %
 % The content of \cs{AtEveryPstart*} / \cs{AtEveryPend*} (with star) is added before every \cs{pstart} / after every \cs{pend}, but there is no distinction between left and right sides.
-% 
+%
 % However, as this content is also added when we typeset pages in parallel, \reledmac must add it once for left  \cs{pstart} and once for right \cs{pstart}.
 % So if you use it to add vertical spacing, it will be problematic in parallel columns, as you will have the vertical spacing two times (vertical spacing will be twice as large as expected).
 % A solution is to add a test inside to distinguish between parallel typesetting in columns or on pages.
@@ -682,18 +682,18 @@
 % In this case, use the \option{movecolumnspositiononrightpage} at loading time of the package.
 %
 % The \env{Leftside} environment will correspond to the inner column, and the \env{Rightside} environment will correspond to the outer column.
-% 
+%
 % \section{Facing pages}\label{pages}
 % \subsection{Basic usage}
 % \DescribeEnv{pages}
 % Numbered text that is to be set on facing pages must be within a \verb?pages?
 % environment. Within the environment the text for the lefthand and righthand
-% pages is placed within the \verb?Leftside? and \verb?Rightside? 
+% pages is placed within the \verb?Leftside? and \verb?Rightside?
 % environments, respectively.
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\Pages}
 % The command \protect\cs{Pages} typesets the texts in the previous pair of
-% \verb?Leftside? and \verb?Rightside? environments. 
+% \verb?Leftside? and \verb?Rightside? environments.
 % The general scheme for parallel pages looks like this:
 % \begin{verbatim}
 % \begin{pages}
@@ -713,7 +713,7 @@
 % \subsubsection{Text width}
 % \DescribeMacro{\Lcolwidth}
 % \DescribeMacro{\Rcolwidth}
-% Within the \verb?pages? environment the lengths \protect\cs{Lcolwidth} and 
+% Within the \verb?pages? environment the lengths \protect\cs{Lcolwidth} and
 % \protect\cs{Rcolwidth} are the widths of the left
 % and right pages, respectively. By default, these are set to the normal
 % textwidth for the document, but can be changed within the environment if
@@ -811,36 +811,36 @@
 % \changes{v1.15.0}{2015/05/18}{Add sameparallelpagenumber option.}
 % By default, \protect\cs{Pages} use the standard \LaTeX\ page number scheme.
 % This means that pages are numbered continuously following printed-book conventions: from left-hand to right-hand side, left-hand pages having even numbers, right-hand pages having odd numbers.
-% 
+%
 % However, you can use the package option \verb+sameparallelpagenumber+ to have the same page number for both left and right side.
 % In this case, this setting will apply only for pages typeset by \protect\cs{Pages}, not for ``normal'' pages.
 %
 % Please also read advising in \reff{par@page}.
 %
 %
-% \subsubsection{Page breaking} 
+% \subsubsection{Page breaking}
 % \DescribeMacro{\setgoalfraction}
-% When doing parallel pages \parpackage{} has to guess where \TeX\ is going to 
+% When doing parallel pages \parpackage{} has to guess where \TeX\ is going to
 % put pagebreaks and hopefully get there first in order to put the pair of
-% texts on their proper pages. When it thinks that the fraction 
-% \protect\cs{@goalfraction} of a page has been filled, it finishes that page and 
+% texts on their proper pages. When it thinks that the fraction
+% \protect\cs{@goalfraction} of a page has been filled, it finishes that page and
 % starts on the other side's text. The standard value is 0.9.
 %
-% 
+%
 % If you think you can get more on a page, increase this. On the other hand,
 % if some left text overflows onto an odd numbered page or some right text
 % onto an even page, try reducing it.
 % You can change it using \cs{setgoalfraction}\marg{newvalue}.
 %  \subsubsection{Right page before \cs{Pages}}
 % When \cs{Pages} are called, it starts at a new left page, in order to have parallel pages.
-% Consequently, if it is called on a left page, it clears the current page and then lets 
+% Consequently, if it is called on a left page, it clears the current page and then lets
 % a right void page.
 %
 % \Parpackage  provides two options to customize this (eventual) right page.
 % \label{prevpgnotnumbered}
 % \begin{description}
 % \item[prevpgstyle=\meta{style}] in order to set the style of this page. A common value of \meta{style} is \verb+empty+.
-% Use \verb+prevpgstyle=empty+ will suppress header and footer in this page. 
+% Use \verb+prevpgstyle=empty+ will suppress header and footer in this page.
 % Please also read advising in \reff{par@page}.
 % \item[prevpgnotnumbered] will make this page won't be counted in the page counter.
 %
@@ -850,7 +850,7 @@
 %
 % Use instead \cs{pages} with the optional argument \verb+[mainmatter]+.
 % In this case, the content of \cs{Pages} will start on a left side, without any spurious empty page, and the left pages will be odd (and not event like in normal way), the first one being \verb+1+.
-% 
+%
 %  \subsection{Critical and familiar footnotes}
 % Of course, in ``Facing pages'',  the \macpackage's  both critical and familiar footnotes can be used.
 % However, some specific points must  be taken into consideration.
@@ -859,9 +859,9 @@
 %
 % However, the \macpackage default setting for the maximum alloted size to notes is  greater than \protect\cs{textheight}. That makes impossible for long notes to flow across pages.%
 % \footnote{The same applies to \LaTeX\ normal notes. Read \url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/228283/7712} for technical informations.}
-% We have not changed this default setting, because we do not want to break compatibility with older version of \macpackage and we want to be as close as possible to default \LaTeX's feature. 
+% We have not changed this default setting, because we do not want to break compatibility with older version of \macpackage and we want to be as close as possible to default \LaTeX's feature.
 %
-% So, you MUST change the default setting via \protect\cs{Xmaxhnotes} (for critical notes) and \protect\cs{maxhnotesX} (for familiar notes). 
+% So, you MUST change the default setting via \protect\cs{Xmaxhnotes} (for critical notes) and \protect\cs{maxhnotesX} (for familiar notes).
 % Both commands are explained in \macpackage handbook (\reff{reledmac-Xmaxhnotes}).
 % As an advisable setting:
 % \begin{verbatim}
@@ -899,8 +899,8 @@
 % You may want to typeset notes on one side only (either left or right).
 % Use \protect\cs{Xonlyside}\oarg{s}\marg{p} to set critical notes, and \protect\cs{onlysideX}\oarg{s}\marg{p} to set familiar notes.
 % \meta{p} must be set to \verb+L+ for notes to be confined only on the left side and to \verb+R+ for  notes to be confined only on the right side.
-% 
-% Notice that these options just tell you \LaTeX\ to not continue long notes on the other side. 
+%
+% Notice that these options just tell you \LaTeX\ to not continue long notes on the other side.
 % It is not designed to allow you to call footnotes on one side but print them on the other side.
 % \subsubsection{Familiar notes called on the right side, but to be printed on the left side}\label{reledpar-nomk}
 % \DescribeMacro{\footnoteXnomk}
@@ -915,14 +915,14 @@
 % \begin{verbatim}
 %   \begin{Leftside}
 %    \beginnumbering
-%     \pstart 
+%     \pstart
 %      A little cat\footnoteAnomk{A note.}. And so one ...
 %     \pend
 %    \endnumbering
 %   \end{Leftside}
 %   \begin{Rightside}
 %    \beginnumbering
-%     \pstart 
+%     \pstart
 %      Un petit chat\footnoteAmk. And so one ...
 %     \pend
 %    \endnumbering
@@ -943,7 +943,7 @@
 %
 % \cs{edtextnow} is a parameterless macro, so it gobbles the following space.
 % If you want to keep it, add \verb+{}+ or backslash followed by a space.
-% 
+%
 % \subsection{Using line flag}
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xlineflag}
 % \DescribeMacro{\Xendlineflag}
@@ -951,13 +951,13 @@
 % \section{Left and right texts}\label{leftright}
 % \subsection{Environments}
 % Parallel texts are divided into Leftside and Rightside. The form of the
-% contents of these two are independent of whether they will be set 
+% contents of these two are independent of whether they will be set
 % in columns or pages.
 %
 % \DescribeEnv{Leftside}
 % \DescribeEnv{Rightside}
-% The left text is put within the \verb?Leftside? environment and the 
-% right text likewise in the \verb?Rightside? environment. The number of 
+% The left text is put within the \verb?Leftside? environment and the
+% right text likewise in the \verb?Rightside? environment. The number of
 % \verb?Leftside? and \verb?Rightside? environments must be the same.
 % \subsection{Numbering text lines and paragraphs}
 %
@@ -976,7 +976,7 @@
 % \meta{jobname} is the name of the main input file for this job,
 % and \file{nn} is 1 for the first numbered section, 2 for
 % the second section, and so on), and then creates a new version of
-% this auxiliary file to collect information during this run. 
+% this auxiliary file to collect information during this run.
 % Separate auxiliary files are maintained for right hand texts and
 % these are named \meta{jobname}.\file{nnR}, using the `R' to distinguish
 % them from the left hand and serial (non-parallel) texts.
@@ -1014,21 +1014,21 @@
 %
 %
 %\changes{v0.9.0}{2011/10/01}{Possibility to number \protect\cs{pstart}.}
-% It is possible to insert a number at every \protect\cs{pstart} command. 
+% It is possible to insert a number at every \protect\cs{pstart} command.
 % You must use the \DescribeMacro{\numberpstarttrue}\protect\cs{numberpstarttrue} command to have it.
-% You can stop the numbering with \DescribeMacro{\numberpstartfalse}\protect\cs{numberpstartfalse}. 
-% 
+% You can stop the numbering with \DescribeMacro{\numberpstartfalse}\protect\cs{numberpstartfalse}.
+%
 % You can modify the number by changing the values of the \verb+pstartL+ and \verb+pstartR+ counters (for left and right side, respectively). For example:
 % \begin{verbatim}
-% \setcounter{pstartL}{0}% To reset the counter of pstart for the left side. 
+% \setcounter{pstartL}{0}% To reset the counter of pstart for the left side.
 % \end{verbatim}
-% You can redefine the commands \DescribeMacro{\thepstartL}\protect\cs{thepstartL} and \DescribeMacro{\thepstartR}\protect\cs{thepstartR} to change style. 
+% You can redefine the commands \DescribeMacro{\thepstartL}\protect\cs{thepstartL} and \DescribeMacro{\thepstartR}\protect\cs{thepstartR} to change style.
 % The numbering restarts on each \protect\cs{beginnumbering}.
-% 
+%
 % \DescribeMacro{\skipnumbering}
 % The command \protect\cs{skipnumbering} when inserted in a line of parallel text
 % causes the numbering of that particular line to be skipped. This can
-% useful if you are putting some kind of marker (even if it is only a 
+% useful if you are putting some kind of marker (even if it is only a
 % blank line) between stanzas. Remember, parallel texts must be numbered
 % and this provides a way to slip in an ``unnumbered''  line.
 % \DescribeMacro{\hidenumbering}
@@ -1041,12 +1041,12 @@
 % \DescribeMacro{\linenumincrement}
 % \DescribeMacro{\firstsublinenum}
 % \DescribeMacro{\sublinenumincrement}
-% Following 
+% Following
 % \protect\cs{firstlinenum}\marg{num} the first line number will be \meta{num}, and
 % following \protect\cs{linenumincrement}\marg{num} only every \meta{num}th
-% line will have a printed number. 
+% line will have a printed number.
+%
 %
-% 
 % The lineation commands which finish by a \verb+R+ apply for right text.
 % The lineation commands which are starred apply for both left and right texts.
 % The lineation command which does not finish by a \verb+R+ and who are not starred apply for the left side.
@@ -1068,7 +1068,7 @@
 % \subsection{Lineation system}
 % \DescribeMacro{\lineationR}
 % \protect\cs{lineationR} macro is the equivalent of \macpackage \protect\cs{lineation} macro for the right side.
-% \DescribeMacro{\lineation*} 
+% \DescribeMacro{\lineation*}
 
 % \protect\cs{lineation*} macro is the equivalent of \macpackage \protect\cs{lineation} macro for both sides.
 %
@@ -1080,7 +1080,7 @@
 % \DescribeMacro{\sublinenumberstyleR}
 % \DescribeMacro{\linenumberstyle*}
 % \DescribeMacro{\sublinenumberstyle*}
-% \cs{linenumberstyleR} is the equivalent of \macpackage \cs{linenumberstyle} for right text. 
+% \cs{linenumberstyleR} is the equivalent of \macpackage \cs{linenumberstyle} for right text.
 % \cs{sublinenumberstyleR} is the equivalent of \macpackage \cs{sublinenumberstyle} right text.
 % The starred version are for both side.
 % \subsection{Line number margin}
@@ -1089,25 +1089,25 @@
 % \cs{linenummarginR}\marg{margin} sets the line margin for right side.
 % \cs{linenummargin*}\marg{margin} sets for both side.
 % \meta{margin} can be, as for \macpackage's \cs{linenummargin} one of these values: \verb+left+, \verb+right+, \verb+inner+, \verb+outer+.
-% 
+%
 % \DescribeMacro{\linenummarginColumns}
 % \DescribeMacro{\linenummarginColumnsR}
 % \DescribeMacro{\linenummarginColumns*}
-% Suppose you typeset texts both in parallel pages (or in normal typesetting) and in parallel columns. 
-% In this case, your setting of line margin in parallel pages (or in normal typesetting) could be different from your setting of line margin in parallel columns. 
+% Suppose you typeset texts both in parallel pages (or in normal typesetting) and in parallel columns.
+% In this case, your setting of line margin in parallel pages (or in normal typesetting) could be different from your setting of line margin in parallel columns.
 % For example, you could want to have line numbers on the right when your are in parallel pages (or in normal typesetting), but when you are in parallel columns, to have them on the left for the left column and on the right for the right column.
-% 
+%
 % In this case, you can use \cs{linenummarginColumns}, which overrides the default setting for the left column, \cs{linenummarginColumnsR} which overrides the default setting for the right column, and \cs{linenummarginColumns*}, which overrides the default for both left and right columns.
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\linenumOnlyPagesForColumns}
 % \DescribeMacro{\linenumOnlyPagesForColumnsR}
-% Another usual case is when you have text in parallel columns and want to get line numbers only on the outer margin. 
+% Another usual case is when you have text in parallel columns and want to get line numbers only on the outer margin.
 % In this case, you need to get line numbers on the left side of the left column on left pages and on the right side of the right column on the right pages.
-% 
-% Reciprocally, if you want to get line numbers only on the inner margin, you need to get line number on the right side of the right column on left pages and on the left side of the left column on the right pages. 
 %
-% In the two cases, you need, for one column, to have line numbers only on one page of a double pages. 
-% 
+% Reciprocally, if you want to get line numbers only on the inner margin, you need to get line number on the right side of the right column on left pages and on the left side of the left column on the right pages.
+%
+% In the two cases, you need, for one column, to have line numbers only on one page of a double pages.
+%
 % You can use \cs{linenumOnlyPagesForColumns} and \cs{linenumOnlyPagesForColumnsR} to get this result:
 % \begin{verbatim}
 % \linenummargin{left}
@@ -1122,7 +1122,7 @@
 % \linenumOnlyPagesForColumns{}
 % \linenumOnlyPagesForColumnsR{}
 % \end{verbatim}
-% Note that these settings only apply when we are typesetting columns (as, if we are not typesetting columns, the \enquote{inner} and \enquote{outer} setting of \cs{linenummargin} and \cs{linenummarginR} are enough). 
+% Note that these settings only apply when we are typesetting columns (as, if we are not typesetting columns, the \enquote{inner} and \enquote{outer} setting of \cs{linenummargin} and \cs{linenummarginR} are enough).
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\linenumberLevenifblanktrue}
 % \DescribeMacro{\linenumberRevenifblanktrue}
@@ -1133,7 +1133,7 @@
 % \subsection{Line flag}
 % \DescribeMacro{\setRlineflag}\label{Rlineflag}
 % A ``R''  is appended to the line numbers of the
-% right texts. 
+% right texts.
 % This may be useful for parallel columns but for parallel pages it might
 % be more appropriate to redefine it using \protect\cs{setRlineflag}\marg{flag}.
 % Use \verb?\setRlineflag{}? to empty it.
@@ -1141,7 +1141,7 @@
 % \subsection{Chunks}
 % \DescribeMacro{\pstart}
 % \DescribeMacro{\pend}
-% In a serial (non-parallel) mode, each numbered paragraph, or chunk, 
+% In a serial (non-parallel) mode, each numbered paragraph, or chunk,
 % is contained
 % between the \protect\cs{pstart} and \protect\cs{pend} macros, and the paragraph is output
 % when the \protect\cs{pend} macro occurs. The situation is somewhat different
@@ -1151,7 +1151,7 @@
 % and \protect\cs{pend} groups within the corresponding \verb?Rightside? environment)
 % the \protect\cs{pend} macros cannot immediately initiate any typesetting ---
 % this has to be controlled by the \protect\cs{Columns} or \protect\cs{Pages} macros.
-% Several chunks may be specified within a \verb?Leftside? or 
+% Several chunks may be specified within a \verb?Leftside? or
 % \verb?Rightside? environment.
 % A multi-chunk text then looks like:
 % \begin{verbatim}
@@ -1165,27 +1165,27 @@
 % \end{...side}
 % \end{verbatim}
 % Numbering, via \protect\cs{beginnumbering} and \protect\cs{endnumbering}, may extend
-% across several \verb?Leftside? or \verb?Rightside? environments. 
+% across several \verb?Leftside? or \verb?Rightside? environments.
 % Remember, though,
 % that the left/right sides are effectively independent of each other.
 %
 % \DescribeMacro{\autopar}
 % The \protect\cs{autopar} macro can be used, instead of manually inserting \protect\cs{pstart}\ldots\protect\cs{pends}. Please read \macpackage's  handbook (\reff{reledmac-autopar}).
- 
- 
+
+
 % \subsection{\protect\cs{AtEveryPstart} and \protect\cs{AtEveryPstartCall}}
-% In general, remember that the moment where a \protect\cs{pstart} is called is different 
+% In general, remember that the moment where a \protect\cs{pstart} is called is different
 % from the moment when  the \protect\cs{pstart}\ldots\protect\cs{pend} content is printed, which is when \protect\cs{Pages} or \protect\cs{Columns} is processed.
-% 
+%
 % Consequently:
 % \begin{itemize}
 %  \item The argument of \protect\cs{AtEveryPstart} (see \reff{reledmac-AtEveryPstart}) is called before every chunk is printed, except if you used an optional argument for the \protect\cs{pstart}.
 %  \item The argument of \protect\cs{AtEveryPstartCall} is called before every \protect\cs{pstart}.
 % \end{itemize}
 % \subsection{Language setting}
-% If you are using the 
-% \protect\package{babel} package or the \protect\package{polyglossia} package ,with different languages 
-% (via, say, \protect\cs{selectlanguage}) for the left and right texts it is 
+% If you are using the
+% \protect\package{babel} package or the \protect\package{polyglossia} package ,with different languages
+% (via, say, \protect\cs{selectlanguage}) for the left and right texts it is
 % particularly important to select the appropriate language within the
 % \verb?Leftside? and \verb?Rightside? environments. The initial language
 % selected for the right text is the \protect\package{babel} package's default. Also,
@@ -1204,7 +1204,7 @@
 % \DescribeMacro{\doinsidelineLhook}
 % \DescribeMacro{\doinsidelineRhook}
 % \cs{doinsidelineLhook} and \cs{doinsidelineRhook} are the equivalent to the \macpackage \cs{doinsidelinehook}, for the left and the right sides respectively.
-% 
+%
 % About these two hooks, read \macpackage's handbook (\reff{reledmac-linehook}).
 %
 % \section{Verse}
@@ -1220,9 +1220,9 @@
 % \DescribeEnv{astanza}
 % \Parpackage provides an \env{astanza} environment which you can use instead
 % of \cs{stanza}. A \env{astanza} environment is a chunk. Consequently left and right \emph{verse} are matched, and not, as with standard \cs{stanza}, left and right \emph{verse lines}.
-% 
-% Within the 
-% \env{astanza} environment each verse line is treated as an individual paragraph, 
+%
+% Within the
+% \env{astanza} environment each verse line is treated as an individual paragraph,
 % so there must be no blank lines in the environment otherwise there will
 % be some extraneous vertical spacing.
 % To use \env{astanza}, simply replace \cs{stanza} by \cs{begin}\arg{astanza} and
@@ -1231,7 +1231,7 @@
 % The difference between \env{astanza} and \cs{stanza} is, that the latter syncs
 % verse by verse, while the environment syncs stanza by stanza.
 %
-%    If you get an error message along the lines of `Missing number, 
+%    If you get an error message along the lines of `Missing number,
 % treated as zero \protect\cs{sza@0@}' it is because you have forgotten to use
 % \protect\cs{setstanzaindents} to set the stanza indents.
 %
@@ -1262,15 +1262,15 @@
 %
 % \section{Side notes}
 % As in \macpackage, you must use one of the following commands to add side notes: \protect\cs{ledsidenote}, \protect\cs{ledleftnote}, \protect\cs{ledrightnote}, \protect\cs{ledouternote}, \protect\cs{ledinnernote}.
-% 
+%
 % The \protect\cs{sidenotemargin} defines the margin of the sidenote for either left or right side, depending on the current environment.
-% 
+%
 % The \cs{sidenotemarginR} defines the margin of the sidenote for the right side.
 %
 % You can use \protect\cs{sidenotemargin*} to define it for both sides.
 %
-% When typesetting parallel columns, the margin where a sidenote is placed is one of the margins of the column the sidenote is called. 
-% However, you can load \parpackage with the \option{sidenotesmarginpage} to use the margin of the page, and not of the column. 
+% When typesetting parallel columns, the margin where a sidenote is placed is one of the margins of the column the sidenote is called.
+% However, you can load \parpackage with the \option{sidenotesmarginpage} to use the margin of the page, and not of the column.
 % \section{Parallel ledgroups}
 % \subsection{General}
 % \changes{v1.6.0}{2013/12/13}{Add tool and documentation for parallel ledgroups}
@@ -1278,8 +1278,8 @@
 % To do it you have:
 % \begin{itemize}
 %   \item To load \parpackage package with the \verb+parledgroup+ option, or to add \protect\cs{parledgrouptrue}.
-%   \item To push each ledgroup between \protect\cs{pstart}\ldots\protect\cs{pend} command. 
-% \end{itemize} 
+%   \item To push each ledgroup between \protect\cs{pstart}\ldots\protect\cs{pend} command.
+% \end{itemize}
 % See the following example:
 % \begin{verbatim}
 %   \begin{pages}
@@ -1338,7 +1338,7 @@
 % Consequently, if you use at least one of these options:
 % \begin{enumerate}
 % \item If you modify \cs{thepage} command, use the value of \verb+par@page+ counter inside and not the value of \verb+page+ counter.
-% \item If you want to modify a page number, modify the value of \verb+page+ counter AND the value \verb+par@page+ counter. 
+% \item If you want to modify a page number, modify the value of \verb+page+ counter AND the value \verb+par@page+ counter.
 % \end{enumerate}
 % Notes that \parpackage automatically do it when you use \protect\cs{frontmatter} and \protect\cs{mainmatter} commands.
 %
@@ -1359,15 +1359,15 @@
 % start or end of the lines.
 %
 %    \Macpackage solves the problem of line numbering by putting the paragraph
-% in typeset form into a box, and then extracting the lines one by one 
+% in typeset form into a box, and then extracting the lines one by one
 % from the box for \TeX\  to put them onto the page with the appropriate page
 % breaks. Most of the \macpackage code is concerned with handling this box
 % and its contents.
 %
 %    \Parpackage's solution to the problem of parallel texts is to put the two
 % texts into separate boxes, and then appropriately extract the pairs of
-% lines from the boxes. This involves duplicating 
-% much of the original box code for an extra right text box. The other, 
+% lines from the boxes. This involves duplicating
+% much of the original box code for an extra right text box. The other,
 % smaller,
 % part of the code is concerned with coordinating the line extractions from
 % the boxes.
@@ -1376,9 +1376,9 @@
 % \section{Preliminaries}
 % \label{preliminaries}\relax
 % \subsection{Package's  meta-data}
-% Announce the name and version of the package, which is 
+% Announce the name and version of the package, which is
 % targeted for \LaTeX 2e. The package also requires the \macpackage
-% package, however we do not load it automatically, because we prefer users to know it. 
+% package, however we do not load it automatically, because we prefer users to know it.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 %<*code>
@@ -1401,7 +1401,7 @@
 % \subsubsection{Synchronization's options}
 % \begin{macro}{\@par@this@sync@option}
 % The \cs{par@sync@option} stores the options of synchronization.
-% It use to ensure these options do not change between two run. 
+% It use to ensure these options do not change between two run.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\@par@this@sync@option{}%
 %    \end{macrocode}
@@ -1416,7 +1416,7 @@
 }%
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
-%  With the option `advancedshiftedpstarts' a long pstart on the left side (or on the right side) does not make a blank on the corresponding pstart, but the blank is put on the bottom of the page. Consequently, the pstarts on the parallel pages are shifted, but the shift stops at every end of pages. 
+%  With the option `advancedshiftedpstarts' a long pstart on the left side (or on the right side) does not make a blank on the corresponding pstart, but the blank is put on the bottom of the page. Consequently, the pstarts on the parallel pages are shifted, but the shift stops at every end of pages.
 % Differing to \option{shiftedpstarts}, the pstart shift are not counted to determine when cutting the page. That could help to avoid page with blank lines at the bottom.
 % \begin{macro}{\ifshiftedpstarts}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1452,7 +1452,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \subsubsection{Position options}
 % \begin{macro}{\ifmovecolumnspositiononrightpage}
-% The \cs{ifmovecolumnspositiononrightpage} boolean is set to true if, for a right page, we want the left column become a right column and the right column become a left column. 
+% The \cs{ifmovecolumnspositiononrightpage} boolean is set to true if, for a right page, we want the left column become a right column and the right column become a left column.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newif\ifmovecolumnspositiononrightpage%
 \DeclareOptionX{movecolumnspositiononrightpage}{%
@@ -1489,7 +1489,7 @@
 \DeclareOptionX{prevpgnotnumbered}{\prevpgnotnumberedtrue}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \begin{macro}{\prevpgstyle}
-% We store on \protect\cs{prevpgstyle} the argument of the option \verb+prevpgstyle+. 
+% We store on \protect\cs{prevpgstyle} the argument of the option \verb+prevpgstyle+.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \DeclareOptionX{prevpgstyle}{\gdef\prevpgstyle{#1}}%
 %    \end{macrocode}
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \ProcessOptionsX%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% \subsection{Determining side and category of parallel processing} 
+% \subsection{Determining side and category of parallel processing}
 %  As noted above, much of the code is a duplication of the original
 % \macpackage{} code to handle the extra box(es) for the right hand side text,
 % and sometimes for the left hand side as well. In order to distinguish
@@ -1520,11 +1520,11 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
-% \subsection{Text's width} 
+% \subsection{Text's width}
 % \begin{macro}{\Lcolwidth}
 % \begin{macro}{\Rcolwidth}
 % The widths of the left and right parallel columns (or pages).
-% The suffixed versions are not manipulated directly by user, but we use them to be certain to have the same coldwitdh in the \env{pages} environment and in the \cs{Pages} command. 
+% The suffixed versions are not manipulated directly by user, but we use them to be certain to have the same coldwitdh in the \env{pages} environment and in the \cs{Pages} command.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newdimen\Lcolwidth
   \Lcolwidth=0.45\textwidth
@@ -1716,7 +1716,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\unhnamebox}
 % \begin{macro}{\unvnamebox}
 % \begin{macro}{\namebox}
-% A set of macros for creating and using `named' boxes; the macros are called 
+% A set of macros for creating and using `named' boxes; the macros are called
 % after the regular box macros, but including the string `name'.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \providecommand*{\newnamebox}[1]{%
@@ -1737,7 +1737,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\ifcsboxvoid}
-% The \cs{ifcsboxvoid} command comes on top of the \package{etoolbox} package. 
+% The \cs{ifcsboxvoid} command comes on top of the \package{etoolbox} package.
 % The first argument is a box name, the second is the \meta{true} value, the third the \meta{false} value.
 % If the first argument refers to a non-existing box, or if it refers to a box that is void, the \meta{true} value is returned. otherwise, \meta{false} is returned.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1774,7 +1774,7 @@
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\section@numR}
 % This is the right side equivalent of \protect\cs{section@num}.
-% 
+%
 % Each section will read and write an associated `line-list
 % file', containing information used to do the numbering. Normally
 % the file will be called \meta{jobname}\file{.nn}, where \file{nn} is the
@@ -1791,7 +1791,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\ifpst@rtedL}
 % \begin{macro}{\ifpst@rtedR}
 % \protect\cs{ifpst@rtedL} is set FALSE at the start of left side numbering, and
-% similarly for \protect\cs{ifpst@rtedR}. 
+% similarly for \protect\cs{ifpst@rtedR}.
 % \protect\cs{ifpst@rtedL} is defined in \macpackage.
 % \changes{v0.3.0}{2005/02/24}{Moved \protect\cs{ifpst@rtedL} to eledmac}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1805,7 +1805,7 @@
 % \changes{v1.8.0}{2014/07/24}{\protect\cs{beginnumbering} is defined only on \protect\package{eledmac}, not on \protect\package{eledpar}.}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\beginnumberingR}
-% This is the right text equivalent of \protect\cs{beginnumbering}, and begins 
+% This is the right text equivalent of \protect\cs{beginnumbering}, and begins
 % a section of numbered text.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\beginnumberingR}{%
@@ -1836,7 +1836,7 @@
   \ifcontinuousnumberingwithcolumns%
     \ifnumbering%
       \global\resumenumberingR@starttrue%
-    \fi%    
+    \fi%
     \ifnumberpstart%
       \addtocounter{pstartR}{1}%
     \fi%
@@ -1863,13 +1863,13 @@
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\endnumbering}
-% This is the left text version of the regular \protect\cs{endnumbering} and must 
-% follow the last text for a left text numbered section. 
+% This is the left text version of the regular \protect\cs{endnumbering} and must
+% follow the last text for a left text numbered section.
 % It sets \protect\cs{ifpst@rtedL} to FALSE. It is fully defined in \macpackage.
 % \end{macro}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\endnumberingR}
-% This is the right text equivalent of \protect\cs{endnumbering} and must follow the 
+% This is the right text equivalent of \protect\cs{endnumbering} and must follow the
 % last text for a right text numbered section.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\endnumberingR{%
@@ -1911,10 +1911,10 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\save@section@number}
 % \begin{macro}{\set@sectcountR}
 % \changes{v1.2.1}{2012/11/01}{For the right section, the counter is defined only once.}
-% We do not want the right side section commands to be numbered after the left side ones, 
+% We do not want the right side section commands to be numbered after the left side ones,
 % instead we want them numbered after which is typeset before the \env{pages} or \env{columns} environments.
 % we switch the \LaTeX\ counter in \protect\cs{numberingR}.
-% 
+%
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcounter{chapterR}
 \newcounter{sectionR}
@@ -2027,7 +2027,7 @@
 %
 % \section{Line counting}
 % \label{lineation}
-% 
+%
 
 % \subsection{Setting lineation reset}
 % \changes{v0.11.0}{2012/06/11}{Lineation can be by pstart (like in eledmac 0.15).}
@@ -2040,7 +2040,7 @@
 
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\lineationR}
-% \protect\cs{lineationR}\marg{word} is the macro used to select the 
+% \protect\cs{lineationR}\marg{word} is the macro used to select the
 % lineation system for right texts.
 % Its argument is a string: either \verb+page+, \verb+pstart+ or \verb+section+.
 % \changes{v1.15.0}{2015/04/13}{As \protect\cs{lineation}, \protect\cs{lineationR} automatically set the \protect\cs{pstartinfootnote}.}
@@ -2197,7 +2197,7 @@
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
-% \subsection{Setting lineation start and step} 
+% \subsection{Setting lineation start and step}
 % \begin{macro}{\c@firstlinenumR}
 % \begin{macro}{\c@linenumincrementR}
 % The following counters tell \macpackage  which right text lines should be
@@ -2207,7 +2207,7 @@
 % is the difference between successive numbered lines. The initial
 % values of these counters produce labels on lines $5$, $10$, $15$, etc.
 % \verb+linenumincrementR+ must be at least $1$.
-% 
+%
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcounter{firstlinenumR}
   \setcounter{firstlinenumR}{5}
@@ -2245,7 +2245,7 @@
 % These are the user's macros for changing (sub) line numbers. They are
 % defined in \macpackage.
 % The starred versions are specific to \protect\package{eledpar}.
-% \changes{v2.0.0}{2015/07/19}{\protect\cs{firstlinenum}, \protect\cs{linenumincrement}, \protect\cs{firstsublinenum}, \protect\cs{sublinenumincrement} are now defined only in \macpackage.} 
+% \changes{v2.0.0}{2015/07/19}{\protect\cs{firstlinenum}, \protect\cs{linenumincrement}, \protect\cs{firstsublinenum}, \protect\cs{sublinenumincrement} are now defined only in \macpackage.}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \WithSuffix\newcommand\firstlinenum*[1]{%
   \setcounter{firstlinenumR}{#1}%
@@ -2303,7 +2303,7 @@
 \newcommand{\setRlineflag}[1]{%
   \gdef\@Rlineflag{#1}%
 }
-\setRlineflag{R} 
+\setRlineflag{R}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 % \subsection{Setting line number style}
@@ -2332,7 +2332,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\linenumberstyle*}
 % \begin{macro}{\sublinenumberstyle*}
-% And for both side. 
+% And for both side.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \WithSuffix\newcommand\linenumberstyle*[1]{%
   \linenumberstyle{#1}%
@@ -2361,17 +2361,17 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\rightlinenumR}
 % \begin{macro}{\l@dlinenumR}
 % \protect\cs{leftlinenumR} and \protect\cs{rightlinenumR} are the macros that are
-% called to print the right text's marginal line numbers. 
+% called to print the right text's marginal line numbers.
 % Much of the
 % code for these is common and is maintained in \protect\cs{l@dlinenumR}.
-% \changes{v0.3.0}{2005/02/10}{Simplified \protect\cs{leftlinenumR} and 
+% \changes{v0.3.0}{2005/02/10}{Simplified \protect\cs{leftlinenumR} and
 %                \protect\cs{rightlinenumR} by introducing \protect\cs{l@dlinenumR}}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\leftlinenumR}{%
   \l@dlinenumR
   \kern\linenumsep}
 \newcommand*{\rightlinenumR}{%
-  \kern\linenumsep 
+  \kern\linenumsep
   \l@dlinenumR}
 \newcommand*{\l@dlinenumR}{%
   \numlabfont%
@@ -2401,7 +2401,7 @@
 %
 % \subsection{Line-number counters and lists}
 % \subsubsection{Correspond to those in \macpackage for regular or left text}
-% We need another set of counters and lists for the right text, 
+% We need another set of counters and lists for the right text,
 % corresponding to those in \parpackage for regular or left text.
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\line@numR}
@@ -2409,13 +2409,13 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\absline@numR}
 % \begin{macro}{\ifsublines@R}
 % The count \protect\cs{line@numR} stores the line number that is used in
-% the right text's marginal line numbering and in notes. 
+% the right text's marginal line numbering and in notes.
 % The count \protect\cs{subline@numR} stores
-% a sub-line number that qualifies \protect\cs{line@numR}. 
+% a sub-line number that qualifies \protect\cs{line@numR}.
 % The count \protect\cs{absline@numR} stores the
 % absolute number of lines since the start
-% of the right text section: that is, the number we have actually printed, 
-% no matter what numbers we attached to them. 
+% of the right text section: that is, the number we have actually printed,
+% no matter what numbers we attached to them.
 %
 % The boolean \cs{ifsublines@R} is set to true when we start subline on rightside.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -2437,7 +2437,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\annot@listR}
 % Now we can define the list macros that will be created from the
 % line-list file.  They are directly analogous to the left text ones.
-% The full list of action codes and their meanings is given in the \macpackage 
+% The full list of action codes and their meanings is given in the \macpackage
 % manual.
 %
 % Here are the commands to create these lists:
@@ -2523,7 +2523,7 @@
 % line-list file; its argument is the name of the file.
 % \label{readlinelist}.
 % It is defined only once time in \reledmac.
-% \changes{v2.0.0}{2015/07/19}{\protect\cs{read@linelist} is defined only once time in \protect\cs{reledmac}.} 
+% \changes{v2.0.0}{2015/07/19}{\protect\cs{read@linelist} is defined only once time in \protect\cs{reledmac}.}
 %
 % \end{macro}
 % \subsection{Commands within the line-list file}
@@ -2535,12 +2535,12 @@
 %
 % The macros with \verb"action" in their names contain all the code
 % that modifies the action-code list.
-% \changes{v2.0.0}{2015/07/19}{\protect\cs{@nl} is now defined only in \reledmac.} 
+% \changes{v2.0.0}{2015/07/19}{\protect\cs{@nl} is now defined only in \reledmac.}
 % \begin{macro}{\@nl@regR}
 % \begin{macro}{\@nl}
 % \protect\cs{@nl@regR} is called by \protect\cs{@nl} if we are on a right side.
 % It does everything related to the start of a
-% new line of numbered text on a right side. 
+% new line of numbered text on a right side.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\@nl@regR}{%
@@ -2600,7 +2600,7 @@
 % \protect\cs{this@section@last@page@numR} holds the page number of the last right page of the current section. Its value is modified globally, contrary to \cs{last@page@numR}.
 % Both are modified by \protect\cs{fix@page}, defined by \reledmac.
 %
-% \changes{v2.0.0}{2105/06/28}{\protect\cs{fix@page} is defined only once in \reledmac} 
+% \changes{v2.0.0}{2105/06/28}{\protect\cs{fix@page} is defined only once in \reledmac}
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcount\last@page@numR
@@ -2617,7 +2617,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\@adv}
 % The \protect\cs{@adv}\marg{num} macro advances
 % the current visible line number by the amount specified as
-% its argument. This is used to implement \protect\cs{advanceline}. 
+% its argument. This is used to implement \protect\cs{advanceline}.
 % It is defined in \macpackage.
 % \changes{v2.0.0}{2015/07/19}{\protect\cs{@adv} defined only in \reledmac.}
 % \end{macro}
@@ -2660,7 +2660,7 @@
 % adds an entry to the action-code list to turn sub-lineation on or
 % off, according to the current value of the \protect\cs{ifsublines@} flag.
 % It is defined in \macpackage.
-% 
+%
 % \changes{v2.0.0}{2015/07/19}{\protect\cs{sub@action} defined only in \reledmac.}
 % \end{macro}
 %
@@ -2752,7 +2752,7 @@
 % It takes two arguments:
 % \begin{itemize}
 % \item \verb"#1", the number of entries to add to \protect\cs{insertlines@list}
-% for this reference. 
+% for this reference.
 % This value for right text, here and within \protect\cs{edtext},
 % which computes it and writes it to the line-list file,
 % will be stored in the count \protect\cs{insert@countR}.
@@ -2829,7 +2829,7 @@
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % Decrease edtext level counter.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-     \global\advance\@edtext@level by -1% 
+     \global\advance\@edtext@level by -1%
 }
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
@@ -2870,7 +2870,7 @@
 % Both  are defined  in \macpackage, but they are empty.
 % They are really defined only in \parpackage.
 %
-% 
+%
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \renewcommand*{\@pend}[1]{%
   \ifbypstart@\global\line@num=0\fi%
@@ -2913,7 +2913,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\@lopL}
 % \begin{macro}{\@lopR}
 % \protect\cs{@lopL}\marg{num} adds its argument to the \protect\cs{linesonpage@listL}
-% list, and analagously for \protect\cs{@lopR}. 
+% list, and analagously for \protect\cs{@lopR}.
 % Both  are defined in \macpackage, but they are empty.
 % They are really defined only in \parpackage.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -2955,7 +2955,7 @@
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\line@list@stuffR}
 % \begin{macro}{\next@line@list@stuffR}
-% This is the right text version of the \protect\cs{line@list@stuff}\marg{file} 
+% This is the right text version of the \protect\cs{line@list@stuff}\marg{file}
 % macro. It is called by \protect\cs{beginnumberingR} and performs
 % all the line-list operations needed at the start of a section.
 % Its argument is the name of the line-list file.
@@ -2976,7 +2976,7 @@
   \iffirst@linenum@out@R
      \global\first@linenum@out@Rfalse
      \immediate\openout\linenum@outR=\l@auxdir#1%
-     \immediate\write\linenum@outR{\string\line@list@version{\this@line@list@version}}%     
+     \immediate\write\linenum@outR{\string\line@list@version{\this@line@list@version}}%
      \ifl@dpaging%
        \immediate\write\linenum@outR{\string\@par@sync@option{\@par@this@sync@option}}%
      \fi%
@@ -3048,7 +3048,7 @@
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\setline}
 % You can use \protect\cs{setline}\marg{num}
-% in running text (i.e., within \verb?\pstart...\pend?) to set the 
+% in running text (i.e., within \verb?\pstart...\pend?) to set the
 % current visible
 % line-number to a specified positive value.
 % It is defined in \macpackage.
@@ -3058,7 +3058,7 @@
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\setlinenum}
 % You can use \protect\cs{setlinenum}\marg{num}
-% before a \protect\cs{pstart} to set the visible line-number to a specified 
+% before a \protect\cs{pstart} to set the visible line-number to a specified
 % positive value. It writes a \protect\cs{l@d@set} command to the line-list file.
 % It is defined in \macpackage.
 %
@@ -3085,7 +3085,7 @@
 % \section{Marking text for notes}
 % \label{text}
 %
-% The \protect\cs{edtext}  macro is used to create all 
+% The \protect\cs{edtext}  macro is used to create all
 % footnotes and endnotes,
 % as well as to print the portion of the main text to which a given note
 % or notes is keyed. The idea is to have that lemma appear only once in
@@ -3108,7 +3108,7 @@
 % \changes{v2.0.0}{2015/07/19}{\protect\cs{set@line}  defined only in \reledmac.}
 % \end{macro}
 % \subsection{Specific hooks and commands for notes}
-% The \macpackage \protect\cs{newseries@}  initializes commands which are linked to notes series. 
+% The \macpackage \protect\cs{newseries@}  initializes commands which are linked to notes series.
 % However, to keep \macpackage as light as possible, it does not define commands which are specific to \parpackage.
 % This is what does \protect\cs{newseries@par}. The specific hooks are also defined here.
 % \begin{macro}{\newseries@par}
@@ -3141,22 +3141,22 @@
 % Consequently, if we do nothing special, the note numbers are sorted in the reading order, not in the typesetting order.
 % So we could obtain something like 1,3,2,5,4.
 %
-% To prevent this problem, we use a two new counters by  series. 
+% To prevent this problem, we use a two new counters by  series.
 % Every note, in parallel typesetting, has three associated counters.
 % \begin{enumerate}
 % \item A \LaTeX\ counter \verb+footnoteX+. This the only one manipulated by user, and the only one finally printed.
 % \item A \TeX\ counter \verb+footnoteX@reading+. Its value is incremented when reading the \cs{footnoteX} command in left or right side environments. It is used to get the correct footnote number from the \verb+.aux+ file to be typeset in the main text. This counter is already defined in \macpackage, as it is also used for hyperlink.
 % \changes{v2.6.2}{2015/11/29}{The \TeX\ counter \protect\cs{footnoteX@reading} is defined in \protect\reledmac.}
 % \item A \LaTeX\ counter \verb+footnoteX@typeset. Its value is increased when inserting footnotes. Its value is directly used in the footnote, and is stored in the \verb+aux+ files to be used on the next run for the main text.
-% \end{enumerate} 
-% 
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
 %
 %
 % So here, we only defined the new counter.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
       \newcounter{footnote#1@typeset}%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% 
+%
 % \paragraph{Familiar footnotes without marks}
 % The \protect\cs{footnoteXnomk} commands are for notes which are printed on the left side, while they are called in the right side.
 % Basically, they set first toggle \protect\cs{nomark@} to true, then call the \protect\cs{footnoteX}.
@@ -3198,7 +3198,7 @@
          \gl@p\@tmp\to\@tmpa%
          \global\cslet{footnote#1@mk}{\@tmp}%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% Set the footnotecounter with it. 
+% Set the footnotecounter with it.
 % For the sake of security, we make a backup of the previous value.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
          \letcs{\old@footnote}{c@footnote#1}%
@@ -3215,7 +3215,7 @@
          \xspace%
       }%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% End of tools specific to familiar notes. 
+% End of tools specific to familiar notes.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
   \fi
 %    \end{macrocode}
@@ -3273,7 +3273,7 @@
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 % \subsection{Tools specific to \LaTeX's classical footnotes}
-% As users can use classical footnotes of \LaTeX\ (\cs{footnote}) 
+% As users can use classical footnotes of \LaTeX\ (\cs{footnote})
 % in parallel texts, we must integrate the same tools to get correct number as for \macpackage' footnotes (\reff{familiarfootnotenumber}).
 % \begin{macro}{\footnote@reading}
 % \begin{macro}{\footnote@typeset}
@@ -3286,10 +3286,10 @@
 % \section{Pstart numbers dumping and restoration}
 % While in \macpackage the footnotes are inserted at the same time as the \protect\cs{pstart}\ldots\protect\cs{pend} are read, in \parpackage they are inserted when the \protect\cs{Columns} or \protect\cs{Pages} commands are called.
 % Consequently, if we do nothing, the value of the \verb+PstartL+ and \verb+PstartR+ counters are not the same in the main text and in the notes.
-% To solve this problem, we dump the values in two list (one by side) when processing \protect\cs{pstart} and restore these at each \protect\cs{pstart} when calling \protect\cs{Columns} or \protect\cs{Pages}. 
+% To solve this problem, we dump the values in two list (one by side) when processing \protect\cs{pstart} and restore these at each \protect\cs{pstart} when calling \protect\cs{Columns} or \protect\cs{Pages}.
 % We also dump and restore the value of the booleans \protect\cs{ifnumberpstart} and \protect\cs{ifnumberline}.
 
-% So, first step, creating the lists. 
+% So, first step, creating the lists.
 % Here, ``pc'' means ``public counters''.
 % \begin{macro}{\list@pstartL@pc}
 % \begin{macro}{\list@pstartR@pc}
@@ -3299,10 +3299,10 @@
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
-% Two commands to dump current pstarts. 
-% We prefer two commands to one with argument indicating the side, 
+% Two commands to dump current pstarts.
+% We prefer two commands to one with argument indicating the side,
 % because the commands are short, and so we save one test (or a \protect\cs{csname} construction).
-% \begin{macro}{\dump@pstartL@pc} 
+% \begin{macro}{\dump@pstartL@pc}
 % \begin{macro}{\dump@pstartR@pc}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\dump@pstartL@pc{%
@@ -3320,7 +3320,7 @@
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\restore@pstartL@pc} 
+% \begin{macro}{\restore@pstartL@pc}
 % \begin{macro}{\restore@pstartR@pc}
 % And so, the commands to restore them.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -3333,7 +3333,7 @@
 \def\restore@pstartR@pc{%
   \ifx\list@pstartR@pc\empty\else%
     \gl@p\list@pstartR@pc\to\@temp%
-    \global\c@pstartR=\@temp% 
+    \global\c@pstartR=\@temp%
   \fi%
 }%
 %    \end{macrocode}
@@ -3413,14 +3413,14 @@
 % \begin{environment}{Leftside}
 % Within the \verb?pairs? and \verb?pages? environments the left and
 % right hand texts are within \verb?Leftside? and \verb?Rightside?
-% environments, respectively. The \verb?Leftside? environment is simple, 
-% indicating that right text is not within its purview and using some 
+% environments, respectively. The \verb?Leftside? environment is simple,
+% indicating that right text is not within its purview and using some
 % particular macros.
 % \changes{v0.3.0}{2005/02/10}{Added hooks into Leftside environment}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newenvironment{Leftside}{%
   \expandafter\ifvoid\csname l@dLcolrawbox1\endcsname\else%
-   \led@err@Leftside@PreviousNotPrinted% 
+   \led@err@Leftside@PreviousNotPrinted%
   \fi%
   \ledRcolfalse
   \setcounter{pstartL}{1}
@@ -3462,19 +3462,19 @@
 % \begin{environment}{Rightside}
 % The \verb?Rightside? environment is only slightly more complicated
 % than the \verb?Leftside?.
-% Apart from indicating that right text is being provided it 
+% Apart from indicating that right text is being provided it
 % ensures that the right right text code will be used.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newenvironment{Rightside}{%
   \expandafter\ifvoid\csname l@dRcolrawbox1\endcsname\else%
-   \led@err@Rightside@PreviousNotPrinted% 
+   \led@err@Rightside@PreviousNotPrinted%
   \fi%
   \ledRcoltrue
   \let\beginnumbering\beginnumberingR
   \let\endnumbering\endnumberingR
   \let\pausenumbering\pausenumberingR
   \let\resumenumbering\resumenumberingR
-  \let\memorydump\memorydumpR 
+  \let\memorydump\memorydumpR
   \let\thepstart\thepstartR
   \let\pstart\pstartR
   \let\pend\pendR
@@ -3520,14 +3520,14 @@
 % of the paragraph decomposition.
 %
 % When we first form the paragraph, it goes into a box register,
-% \protect\cs{l@dLcolrawbox} or \protect\cs{l@dRcolrawbox} for right text, instead of onto the 
+% \protect\cs{l@dLcolrawbox} or \protect\cs{l@dRcolrawbox} for right text, instead of onto the
 % current vertical list.
 % The \protect\cs{ifnumberedpar@} flag will be \verb"true" while a paragraph is
 % being processed in that way.
 % \protect\cs{num@lines(R)} will store the number of lines in the paragraph
 % when it is complete. When we chop it up into lines, each line
 % in turn goes into the
-% \protect\cs{one@line} or \protect\cs{one@lineR} register, and \protect\cs{par@line(R)} 
+% \protect\cs{one@line} or \protect\cs{one@lineR} register, and \protect\cs{par@line(R)}
 % will be the number
 % of that line within the paragraph.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -3548,7 +3548,7 @@
 % \protect\cs{pstart} starts the paragraph by
 % clearing the \protect\cs{inserts@list} list and other
 % relevant variables, and then arranges for the
-% subsequent text to go into the appropriate box. 
+% subsequent text to go into the appropriate box.
 % \protect\cs{pstart} needs to appear at the start of
 % every paragraph that is to be numbered.
 %
@@ -3557,8 +3557,8 @@
 % them to survive past the end of the paragraph.
 %
 % We have to have specific left and right \protect\cs{pstart} when parallel processing;
-% among other things because of potential changes in the linewidth. 
-% 
+% among other things because of potential changes in the linewidth.
+%
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 
 \newcounter{pstartL}
@@ -3588,7 +3588,7 @@
   \fi%
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % If this is the first \protect\cs{pstart} in a numbered section, clear any inserts
-% and set \protect\cs{ifpst@rtedL} to FALSE. 
+% and set \protect\cs{ifpst@rtedL} to FALSE.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
   \ifpst@rtedL\else%
     \list@clear{\inserts@list}%
@@ -3612,7 +3612,7 @@
 % We set all the usual interline penalties to zero; this ensures that there will
 % be no large interline penalties to prevent us from slicing the
 % paragraph into pieces. These penalties revert to the values
-% that you set when the group for the \protect\cs{vbox} ends. 
+% that you set when the group for the \protect\cs{vbox} ends.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
   \l@dzeropenalties%
   \ifboolexpr{%
@@ -3673,7 +3673,7 @@
   }
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % The same for right side.
-% 
+%
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommandx*{\pstartR}[2][1,2,usedefault]{%
   \if@nobreak%
@@ -3762,8 +3762,8 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\pendL}
 % \changes{v1.4.3}{2013/10/27}{Spurious spaces in \protect\cs{pendL}.}
 % \changes{v1.8.0}{2014/08/05}{As in \protect\package{eledmac}, \protect\cs{pendL} can have an optional argument.}
-% \protect\cs{pend} must be used to end a numbered paragraph. Again we need 
-% a version 
+% \protect\cs{pend} must be used to end a numbered paragraph. Again we need
+% a version
 % that knows about left parallel texts.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -3778,7 +3778,7 @@
 % We immediately
 % call \protect\cs{endgraf} to end the paragraph; this ensures that there will
 % be no large interline penalties to prevent us from slicing the
-% paragraph into pieces.  
+% paragraph into pieces.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
   \@at@end@every@pend%
   \endgraf\global\num@lines=\prevgraf\egroup%
@@ -3847,24 +3847,24 @@
   \endgroup%
   \ignorespaces%
   \@oldnobreak%
-  \dump@pstartR@pc%  
+  \dump@pstartR@pc%
   \ifnumberpstart%
     \addtocounter{pstartR}{1}%
-  \fi%  
+  \fi%
   \parledgroup@beforenotes@save{R}%
   \providetoggle{after@pendR@\the\l@dnumpstartsR @par}%
   \ifboolexpr{%
     test {\ifstrempty{#1}}%
     and test {\ifstrempty{#2}}%
   }%
-    {% 
+    {%
       \ifat@every@pend@star@%
         \global\togglefalse{after@pendR@\the\l@dnumpstartsR @par}%
       \else%
         \global\toggletrue{after@pendR@\the\l@dnumpstartsR @par}%
       \fi%
       \csgdef{after@pendR@\the\l@dnumpstartsR}{\at@every@pend}}%
-    {% 
+    {%
       \ifstrempty{#1}{}{%
         \csgdef{after@pendR@\the\l@dnumpstartsR}{\noindent#1}%
         \global\toggletrue{after@pendR@\the\l@dnumpstartsR @par}%
@@ -3900,7 +3900,7 @@
 % \subsection{Processing one line}
 %
 % For parallel texts we have to be able to process left and right lines
-% independently. For sequential text we happily use the 
+% independently. For sequential text we happily use the
 % original \protect\cs{do@line}. Otherwise \ldots
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\l@dleftbox}
@@ -3952,10 +3952,10 @@
 % \changes{v1.8.0}{2014/08/05}{Change \protect\cs{do@lineR} and \protect\cs{do@lineR} to allow new sectioning commands.}
 % \begin{macro}{\do@lineL}
 % \changes{v1.8.1}{2014/08/07}{Fix a bug with critical notes a the beginning of a page, (maybe added by v1.8.0) (?).}
-% The \protect\cs{do@lineL} macro is called to 
+% The \protect\cs{do@lineL} macro is called to
 % do all the processing for a single line of left text.
 % \changes{v0.3.0}{2005/02/10}{Added \protect\cs{do@lineLhook} to \protect\cs{do@lineL}}
-% \changes{v0.3.0}{2005/02/10}{Simplified \protect\cs{do@lineL} by using macros for 
+% \changes{v0.3.0}{2005/02/10}{Simplified \protect\cs{do@lineL} by using macros for
 %                            some common code}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\do@lineL}{%
@@ -3968,9 +3968,9 @@
      \do@lineLhook%
      \l@demptyd@ta%
      \global\setbox\one@line=\vsplit\namebox{l@dLcolrawbox\the\l@dpscL}%
-                           to\baselineskip}% 
+                           to\baselineskip}%
     \IfStrEq{\splitfirstmarks\parledgroup@}{begin}{\parledgroup@notes@startL}{}%
-    \unvbox\one@line \global\setbox\one@line=\lastbox% 
+    \unvbox\one@line \global\setbox\one@line=\lastbox%
     \@writepageofparL%
     \getline@numL%
     \ifnum\@lock>\@ne%
@@ -4103,13 +4103,13 @@
   \affixside@note%
 }%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro} 
+% \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\dolineLhook}
 % \begin{macro}{\dolineRhook}
 % \begin{macro}{\doinsidelineLhook}
 % \begin{macro}{\doinsidelineRhook}
 % \changes{v1.8.3}{2014/08/31}{Added \protect\cs{dolineLhook}, \protect\cs{dolineRhook}, \protect\cs{doinsidelineLhook} and \protect\cs{doinsidelineRhook}}
-% These high-level commands just redefine the low-level commands. 
+% These high-level commands just redefine the low-level commands.
 % They have to be used by user, without \protect\cs{makeatletter}.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\dolineLhook}[1]{\gdef\do@lineLhook{#1}}%
@@ -4141,7 +4141,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\do@lineR}
-% The \protect\cs{do@lineR} macro is called to 
+% The \protect\cs{do@lineR} macro is called to
 % do all the processing for a single line of right text.
 % \changes{v0.3.0}{2005/02/10}{Changed \protect\cs{do@lineR} similarly to \protect\cs{do@lineL}}
 % \changes{v1.8.1}{2014/08/07}{Fix a bug with critical notes a the beginning of a page, added by v1.8.0 (?).}
@@ -4161,7 +4161,7 @@
      \do@lineRhook%
      \l@demptyd@ta%
      \global\setbox\one@lineR=\vsplit\namebox{l@dRcolrawbox\the\l@dpscR}%
-                           to\baselineskip}% 
+                           to\baselineskip}%
     \IfStrEq{\splitfirstmarks\parledgroup@}{begin}{\parledgroup@notes@startR}{}%
     \unvbox\one@lineR \global\setbox\one@lineR=\lastbox%
     \@writepageofparR%
@@ -4293,7 +4293,7 @@
  \affixside@noteR%
 }%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro} 
+% \end{macro}
 % \subsection{Line and page number computation}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\getline@numR}
@@ -4349,7 +4349,7 @@
 % \relax
 % The real work in the line macros above is done in \protect\cs{do@actions}, but
 % before we plunge into that, let is get \protect\cs{do@ballastR} out of the
-% way.  
+% way.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\do@ballastR}{\global\ballast@count=\z@
   \begingroup
@@ -4382,7 +4382,7 @@
 
 \newif\ifl@dskipversenumberR
 \newcommand*{\do@actions@fixedcodeR}{%
-  \ifcase\@l@dtempcnta% 
+  \ifcase\@l@dtempcnta%
   \or%                     % 1001 = starting sublineation
     \global\sublines@Rtrue
   \or%                     % 1002 = ending sublineation
@@ -4408,9 +4408,9 @@
  \or%                      % 1008 = skipping numbering in stanza
     \l@dskipversenumberRtrue%
  \or%                      % 1009 = hiding number
-    \l@dhidenumbertrue% 
+    \l@dhidenumbertrue%
  \or%                       % 1010 = inserting msdata
-    \add@msdata%      
+    \add@msdata%
  \else%
     \led@warn@BadAction
  \fi%
@@ -4474,7 +4474,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\ch@ck@l@ckR}
 % \begin{macro}{\f@x@l@cksR}
 % \begin{macro}{\affixline@numR}
-% \protect\cs{affixline@numR} is the right text version of the 
+% \protect\cs{affixline@numR} is the right text version of the
 % \protect\cs{affixline@num} macro.
 % \changes{v0.3.0}{2005/02/24}{Changed \protect\cs{affixline@numR} to match new eledmac}
 % \changes{v0.11.0}{2012/06/11}{Changed \protect\cs{affixline@numR} to allow to disable line numbering (like in eledmac 0.15).}
@@ -4581,11 +4581,11 @@
         \fi
         \ifboolexpr{%
            bool {l@dprintingcolumns}%
-           and (% 
+           and (%
              (test {\ifdefstring{\linenum@OnlyPages@ForColumnsR}{left}}%
              and test {\ifnumodd{\page@numR}}%
              )%
-             or% 
+             or%
              (test {\ifdefstring{\linenum@OnlyPages@ForColumnsR}{right}}%
              and not test {\ifnumodd{\page@numR}}%
              )%
@@ -4792,7 +4792,7 @@
 %       \fi
 %     \fi}
 % \end{verbatim}
-% This is for a single chunk. However, as we are probably dealing 
+% This is for a single chunk. However, as we are probably dealing
 % with several chunks at a time, the above is nor really relevant. Peter Wilson thinks
 % that it is likely with parallel text that there is no real need to add
 % back any penalties; even if there was, they would have to match across the
@@ -4845,13 +4845,13 @@
 % The \protect\cs{Xonlyside} and \protect\cs{onlysideX} hooks for \protect\cs{Pages}
 % allow notes to be printed  either in left or right pages only.
 % The implementation of such features is delegated to \protect\cs{print@Xnotes@forpages},
-% which replaces \protect\cs{print@Xnotes} inside \protect\cs{Pages}. 
+% which replaces \protect\cs{print@Xnotes} inside \protect\cs{Pages}.
 % Here is how we proceed\footnote{See \url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/230332/7712}.}:
 % \begin{itemize}
 %    \item If notes are to be printed on both sides, we just proceed the usual way: print the foot starts for the series, then the foot group.
 %    \item If notes are to be printed in the left side, we do these prints only for even pages ; if notes are to be printed in the right side, we do these prints only for odd pages.
 %    \item However, that is not enough. Because the problem does not only consists in printing notes in any particular page. It is also not to put aside room for notes in the pages where we do not want to print them.
-%    To take an example: if some note in the left side is too long by 160pt to be printed in full in the left page, we do not want to put aside 160pt a space for it in the following right page. 
+%    To take an example: if some note in the left side is too long by 160pt to be printed in full in the left page, we do not want to put aside 160pt a space for it in the following right page.
 %    \item To solve this problem, we change the magnification factor associated with notes before going to the next page.
 %    If we start a page where no notes are supposed to be  printed, the magnification counter is set to 0. The dimension associated to footnote is set to \cs{maxdimen}, and so we can keep all the notes we want, without any break inside  We also set the note skip to 0pt. Before starting a new page where these notes are supposed to be printed, we reset these counter and skip to their default values. (About these counter, dimension and skip, read \thetexbook\ p.~122-125).
 %    \item In the output macro of the page where notes must NOT be printed, we store the content of the footnote box produced by \TeX\ to a temporary box.
@@ -4868,7 +4868,7 @@
      \csuse{#1footgroup}{#1}%
    }%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% Second case: notes are for  one side only. 
+% Second case: notes are for  one side only.
 % First test if we are in a page where they must be printed.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
    {%
@@ -4884,7 +4884,7 @@
          \csuse{#1footstart}{#1}%
          \csuse{#1footgroup}{#1}%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% Then, set to not to keep room for notes in the next page. 
+% Then, set to not to keep room for notes in the next page.
 % Also set to that, in the next page, notes are not to be split, using \cs{maxdimen}.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
          \global\count\csuse{#1footins}=\z@%
@@ -4901,7 +4901,7 @@
          \bgroup%
             \csuse{Xnotefontsize@#1}%
             \global\dimen\csuse{#1footins}=\csuse{Xmaxhnotes@#1}%
-         \egroup%     
+         \egroup%
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %  Then, save the current insert box to a temporary insert box.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -4940,7 +4940,7 @@
          \bgroup%
             \csuse{Xnotefontsize@#1}%
             \global\dimen\csuse{footins#1}=\csuse{maxhnotesX@#1}%
-         \egroup%  
+         \egroup%
          \global\setnamebox{footins#1@kept}=\box\namebox{footins#1}%
        }%
      }%
@@ -5005,7 +5005,7 @@
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % The main feature of \cs{edtextlater} is to create a macro which will be called on the equivalent \cs{edtextnow}.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
-% 
+%
   \csxdef{edtext@later@\the\edtext@later}{%
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \cs{edtextnow} will insert a empty \cs{edtext}.
@@ -5045,7 +5045,7 @@
     }%
   }%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% And now, we print the current lemma data. 
+% And now, we print the current lemma data.
 % But we save the beginning and the starting line using the crossref mechanism.
 % We also store information in the auxiliary file about the existence of a \cs{edtextlater} and, if required, about the use of a \cs{lemma}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -5135,7 +5135,7 @@
 % appearing in the \protect\cs{linenum@out} file.
 %
 % It is defined on \macpackage.
-% \changes{v2.0.0}{2015/28/06}{\protect\cs{@lab} defined only in \eledmac.} 
+% \changes{v2.0.0}{2015/28/06}{\protect\cs{@lab} defined only in \eledmac.}
 % \end{macro}
 %
 %
@@ -5176,11 +5176,11 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\@morespace@rightnote@leftcolumn}
 % \begin{macro}{\@morespace@leftnote@rightcolumn}
 % \begin{macro}{\get@sidenote@morespace@columns}
-% If we are typesetting parallel columns, we may want a left sidenote called on the right column be put on the left of the page and not on the left of the column, 
+% If we are typesetting parallel columns, we may want a left sidenote called on the right column be put on the left of the page and not on the left of the column,
 % and a right sidenote called on the left column be put on the right of the page and not on the right of the column. We store as an option in the \cs{if@sidenotesmarginpage} boolean.
 %
-% To do it, we need to add spaces, respectively defined on \cs{@morespace@leftnote@rightcolumn} and \cs{@morespace@rightnote@leftcolumn}. 
-% The \cs{get@sidenote@morespace@columns} calculate there two lengths. 
+% To do it, we need to add spaces, respectively defined on \cs{@morespace@leftnote@rightcolumn} and \cs{@morespace@rightnote@leftcolumn}.
+% The \cs{get@sidenote@morespace@columns} calculate there two lengths.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newdimen\@morespace@leftnote@rightcolumn%
 \newdimen\@morespace@rightnote@leftcolumn%
@@ -5202,7 +5202,7 @@
 %    \begin{macrocode}
   \else%
     \global\@morespace@leftnote@rightcolumn=\z@%
-    \global\@morespace@rightnote@leftcolumn=\z@%  
+    \global\@morespace@rightnote@leftcolumn=\z@%
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % End of \cs{get@sidenote@morespace@columns}.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -5305,7 +5305,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
 
-% Before we can define the main stanza macros we need to be able to save 
+% Before we can define the main stanza macros we need to be able to save
 % and reset
 % the category code for \&. To save the current value we use
 % \verb+\next+ from the \verb+\loop+ macro.
@@ -5335,7 +5335,7 @@
   \fi
   \ifnum\usenamecount{szp@0@}=\z@
     \let\sza@penalty\relax
-  \fi 
+  \fi
   \def&{%
     \endlock\mbox{}%
     \sza@penalty
@@ -5356,8 +5356,8 @@
 % \end{environment}
 %
 % \begin{macro}{\@stopastanza}
-% This command is called by \verb+\&+ in \env{astanza} environment. 
-% It allows optional arguments. 
+% This command is called by \verb+\&+ in \env{astanza} environment.
+% It allows optional arguments.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommandx{\@stopastanza}[2][1,2,usedefault]{%
   \endlock\mbox{}%
@@ -5404,7 +5404,7 @@
   \catcode`\&=\next
 
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% 
+%
 % \begin{macro}{\thestanzaL}
 % \begin{macro}{\thestanzaR}
 % And now, the left and right stanza counter.
@@ -5456,7 +5456,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\bbl@set@language}
 % In \protect\package{babel} the macro \protect\cs{bbl@set@language}\marg{lang} does the work when
-% the language \meta{lang} is changed via \protect\cs{selectlanguage}. 
+% the language \meta{lang} is changed via \protect\cs{selectlanguage}.
 % Unfortunately for us, if it is given
 % an argument in the form of a control sequence it strips off the \verb?\?
 % character rather than expanding the command. We need a version that accepts
@@ -5493,11 +5493,11 @@
 % Now do the \protect\package{babel} or \protect\package{polyglossia}  fix or, if necessary.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \AtBeginDocument{%
-  \@ifundefined{xpg@main@language}{% 
-    \@ifundefined{bbl@main@language}{% 
+  \@ifundefined{xpg@main@language}{%
+    \@ifundefined{bbl@main@language}{%
 %    \end{macrocode}
 %  Either \protect\package{babel}   has not been used or it has been used with no
-% specified language. 
+% specified language.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
     \l@dusedbabelfalse
     }{%
@@ -5560,7 +5560,7 @@
 %
 %    In sequential text, each chunk (that enclosed by \protect\cs{pstart} \ldots
 % \protect\cs{pend}) is put into a box called \protect\cs{raw@text} and then immediately
-% printed, resulting in the box being emptied and ready for the next chunk. 
+% printed, resulting in the box being emptied and ready for the next chunk.
 % For parallel processing multiple boxes are needed as printing is delayed.
 % We also need extra counters for various things.
 %
@@ -5588,7 +5588,7 @@
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
-% 
+%
 % \begin{macro}{\l@dpscL}
 % \begin{macro}{\l@dpscR}
 % A couple of scratch counts to count left and right \cs{pstart}, respectively.
@@ -5599,7 +5599,7 @@
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
-% 
+%
 % \begin{macro}{\l@dsetuprawboxes}
 % This macro creates \protect\cs{maxchunks} pairs of boxes for left and right
 % chunks. The boxes are called \protect\cs{l@dLcolrawbox1}, \protect\cs{l@dLcolrawbox2}, etc.
@@ -5687,14 +5687,14 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\checkraw@text}
 % \protect\cs{checkraw@text} checks whether the current Left or Right box is
 % void or not. If one or other is not void it sets \protect\cs{araw@texttrue},
-% otherwise both are void and it sets \protect\cs{araw@textfalse}. 
-%    \begin{macrocode} 
+% otherwise both are void and it sets \protect\cs{araw@textfalse}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
 \newif\ifaraw@text
 \newcommand*{\checkraw@text}{%
   \araw@textfalse
   \ifvbox\namebox{l@dLcolrawbox\the\l@dpscL}
     \araw@texttrue
-  \else  
+  \else
     \ifvbox\namebox{l@dRcolrawbox\the\l@dpscR}
       \araw@texttrue
     \fi
@@ -5706,8 +5706,8 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
-% 
-% 
+%
+%
 % \begin{macro}{\@writelinesinparL}
 % \begin{macro}{\@writelinesinparR}
 % These write the number of text lines in a chunk to the section files,
@@ -5807,8 +5807,8 @@
 % two by two (left and right pairs).
 %    \begin{macrocode}
     \check@pstarts
-    \loop\if@pstarts                
-        \global\pstartnumtrue 
+    \loop\if@pstarts
+        \global\pstartnumtrue
         \global\pstartnumRtrue
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % Increase \protect\cs{l@dpscL} and \protect\cs{l@dpscR} which here count
@@ -5827,7 +5827,7 @@
       \Columns@print@before@pstart%
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % Check if there is text yet to be processed in at least one of
-% the two current chunks, and also whether the left and right languages 
+% the two current chunks, and also whether the left and right languages
 % are the same
 % \changes{v0.2.0}{2004/12/20}{Added \protect\cs{l@dchecklang} and \protect\cs{l@duselanguage}
 %                to \protect\cs{Columns}}
@@ -5856,8 +5856,8 @@
                 {%
                 \ifdefstring{\@eledsectmark}{R}%
                   {\csuse{eled@sectmark@\the\l@dpscR R}%
-                  }{}%   
-                \global\csundef{eled@sectmark@\the\l@dpscR R}%             
+                  }{}%
+                \global\csundef{eled@sectmark@\the\l@dpscR R}%
                 \savebox{\@eledsectionR}{\parbox[t][][t]{\Rcolwidth}{\vbox{}\print@eledsectionR}}}%\vbox{}-> prevent alignment troubles with RTL language
                 {}%
           \hb@xt@ \hsize{%
@@ -5874,7 +5874,7 @@
         \repeat}
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % Having completed a pair of chunks, write the number of lines
-% in each chunk to the respective section files. 
+% in each chunk to the respective section files.
 % Increment pstart counters and reset line numbering if it is by pstart.
 % \changes{v0.11.0}{2012/06/11}{Line numbering by pstart.}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -5916,7 +5916,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\print@columnseparator}
 % \changes{v1.8.0}{2014/08/05}{Move some code of \protect\cs{Columns} to \protect\cs{print@columnseparator}.}
 % \protect\cs{print@columnseparator} prints the column separator, with surrounding spaces (as the user has set them).
-% We use the \TeX\ \protect\cs{ifdim} instead of \protect\package{etoolbox} 
+% We use the \TeX\ \protect\cs{ifdim} instead of \protect\package{etoolbox}
 % to avoid having \protect\cs{hfill} in a \verb+{}+, which deletes some space (but not much).
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\print@columnseparator{%
@@ -6012,7 +6012,7 @@
       {}%
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % Now, we have finished with the case the columns are centered aligned.
-%    \begin{macrocode}  
+%    \begin{macrocode}
   }%
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % Other case, the columns are left or right aligned.
@@ -6086,8 +6086,8 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\print@leftcolumn}
 % \begin{macro}{\print@rightcolumn}
-% \cs{print@leftcolumn} and \cs{print@rightcolumn} print the line number of the left or right column respectively. 
-% Normally, it is defined by the content of the \env{Leftside} or \env{Rightside} environments. 
+% \cs{print@leftcolumn} and \cs{print@rightcolumn} print the line number of the left or right column respectively.
+% Normally, it is defined by the content of the \env{Leftside} or \env{Rightside} environments.
 % But if \cs{movecolumnspositiononrightpage} is set to TRUE, it also depends on the page number.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\print@leftcolumn}{%
@@ -6184,7 +6184,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\columnsposition}
 % \begin{macro}{\columns@position}
-% The position of the \protect\cs{Columns} in a page. Default value is R. 
+% The position of the \protect\cs{Columns} in a page. Default value is R.
 % Stored in \protect\cs{columns@position}.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\columnsposition}[1]{%
@@ -6215,7 +6215,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{setnotepositionliketwocolumns@C}
 % \begin{macro}{setpositionliketwocolumns@R}
 % \begin{macro}{setnotepositionliketwocolumns@R}
-% The \protect\cs{setwidthliketwocolumns} macro is called in \protect\cs{beginnumbering} in a \textbf{non-parallel} 
+% The \protect\cs{setwidthliketwocolumns} macro is called in \protect\cs{beginnumbering} in a \textbf{non-parallel}
 % typesetting context, to fix the width of the lines to be vertically aligned with parallel columns. It is also called at the beginning of a note's group, if some options are enabled.
 % The \protect\cs{setposition…} macros are called in \protect\cs{beginnumbering} in a \textbf{non- parallel} typesetting context to fix the position of the lines.
 % The \protect\cs{setnoteposition…} macros are called in \protect\cs{xxxfootstart} in a \textbf{non- parallel} typesetting context to fix the position of notes block.
@@ -6260,7 +6260,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
-% 
+%
 % \begin{macro}{\Columns@print@before@pstart}
 % \begin{macro}{\Columns@print@after@pend}
 % The \protect\cs{Columns@print@before@pstart} and \protect\cs{Columns@print@after@pend} print the content of the optional argument of \protect\cs{pstart} / \protect\cs{pend}. If this content is not empty, it also print the separator.
@@ -6275,7 +6275,7 @@
        \ifboolexpr{not togl{before@pstartR@\the\l@dpscR @par} and not togl{before@pstartL@\the\l@dpscL @par}}{%
          \csuse{before@pstartL@\the\l@dpscL}%
          \csuse{before@pstartR@\the\l@dpscR}%
-       }{%     
+       }{%
          \hb@xt@ \hsize{%
            \ifdefstring{\columns@position}{L}{}{\hfill }%
            \par\parbox[t][][t]{\Lcolwidth}{%
@@ -6287,7 +6287,7 @@
              \csuse{before@pstartR@\the\l@dpscR}%
            }%
            \ifdefstring{\columns@position}{R}{}{\hfill}%
-         }%  
+         }%
         }%
        }%
     \global\csundef{before@pstartL@\the\l@dpscL}%
@@ -6303,7 +6303,7 @@
        \ifboolexpr{not togl{after@pendR@\the\l@dpscR @par} and not togl{after@pendL@\the\l@dpscL @par}}{%
          \csuse{after@pendL@\the\l@dpscL}%
          \csuse{after@pendR@\the\l@dpscR}%
-       }{% 
+       }{%
          \hb@xt@ \hsize{%
            \ifdefstring{\columns@position}{L}{}{\hfill }%
            \parbox[t][][t]{\Lcolwidth}{%
@@ -6414,7 +6414,7 @@
     \check@pstarts%
     \loop\if@pstarts%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% Loop over the number of chunks, incrementing the chunk counts 
+% Loop over the number of chunks, incrementing the chunk counts
 % (\protect\cs{l@dpscL}
 % and \protect\cs{l@dpscR} are chunk (box) counts).
 %
@@ -6476,15 +6476,15 @@
 %      \begingroup
 {        \loop\ifaraw@text%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% See if there is more that can be done for the left page and set up the 
+% See if there is more that can be done for the left page and set up the
 % left language.
 % \changes{v0.2.0}{2004/12/20}{Added \protect\cs{l@duselanguage} to \protect\cs{Pages}}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
           \checkpageL%
           \l@duselanguage{\theledlanguageL}%
-{            \loop\ifl@dsamepage%       
+{            \loop\ifl@dsamepage%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% Process the next (left) text line, adding it to the page. 
+% Process the next (left) text line, adding it to the page.
 % Eventually, adds the optional argument of pstart.
 % \changes{v0.3.0}{2005/02/10}{Added \protect\cs{ledstrutL} to \protect\cs{Pages}}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -6499,7 +6499,7 @@
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % When using shiftedpstarts option, a \protect\cs{l@dleftbox} with a null height is not printed.
 % That means we do not insert blank lines at the end of a left chunk lower than the corresponding right chunk.
-% However, a \protect\cs{l@dleftbox} with a null height will advance the \protect\cs{pagetotal} in any case. 
+% However, a \protect\cs{l@dleftbox} with a null height will advance the \protect\cs{pagetotal} in any case.
 % Because if we do not do this, the \protect\cs{checkpageL} could let \protect\cs{ifl@pagefull} to false,
 % and consequently a \protect\cs{@lopL} equal to 1000 could be written in the numbered file,
 % even if all the lines actually needed for the current page have been printed.
@@ -6516,7 +6516,7 @@
                         \unless\ifadvancedshiftedpstarts%
                           \dimen0=\pagetotal%
                           \advance\dimen0 by \baselineskip%
-                          \global\pagetotal=\dimen0%  
+                          \global\pagetotal=\dimen0%
                         \else%
                           \ifnomaxlines%
                             \numdef{\@tmp}{\the\l@dpscL+1}%
@@ -6528,8 +6528,8 @@
                                }%
                               {}%
                             }{}%
-                          \fi%  
-                        \fi%                     
+                          \fi%
+                        \fi%
                       \fi%
               \else%
                       \parledgroup@correction@notespacing{L}%
@@ -6537,13 +6537,13 @@
               \fi%
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % Perhaps we have to move to the next (left) box. Check if we have got all
-% we can onto the page. If not, repeat for the next line. 
+% we can onto the page. If not, repeat for the next line.
 % Check if we have to print the optional argument of the last pend.
 % Check if the page is full.
 % Check if the verse is split in two subsequent pages.
 % Check there is any forced page breaks.
 % Reset the verse skipnumber boolean
-%    \begin{macrocode}        
+%    \begin{macrocode}
               \get@nextboxL%
               \global\l@dskipversenumberfalse%
                   \ifprint@last@after@pendL%
@@ -6555,8 +6555,8 @@
               \checkpbL%
             \repeat%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% That (left) page has been filled. Output the number of real lines 
-% on the page --- if the page break is because the page has been 
+% That (left) page has been filled. Output the number of real lines
+% on the page --- if the page break is because the page has been
 % filled with lines, use the actual number, otherwise the page has been
 % ended early in order to synchronise with the facing page so use an
 % impossibly large number.
@@ -6612,7 +6612,7 @@
                                }%
                               {}%
                             }{}%
-                          \fi%                        
+                          \fi%
                         \fi%
                       \fi%
               \else%
@@ -6637,7 +6637,7 @@
             \numpagelinesR=\z@%
             \parledgroup@correction@notespacing@init%
 %    \end{macrocode}
-% The page is full, so move onto the next (left, odd) page and repeat left 
+% The page is full, so move onto the next (left, odd) page and repeat left
 % text processing.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
             \clearl@drightpage}%
@@ -6675,7 +6675,7 @@
     \global\instanzaLfalse%
     \global\instanzaRfalse%
   \global\l@dprintingpagesfalse%
-%    \end{macrocode} 
+%    \end{macrocode}
 % Check the consistency of \cs{edtext@later} and \cs{edtext@now}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum\edtext@later=\edtext@now%
@@ -6694,7 +6694,7 @@
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 %
-% \subsection{Ensure all notes are printed at the end of parallel pages} 
+% \subsection{Ensure all notes are printed at the end of parallel pages}
 % \begin{macro}{\finish@Pages@notes}
 % This macro ensures that all long notes are printed at the end of \protect\cs{Pages} typesetting, and that there are no more long notes left for the next pages.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -6742,12 +6742,12 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
 %
-% 
+%
 % \subsection{Page clearing}
 % \begin{macro}{\cleartoevenpage}
 % \begin{macro}{\cleartol@devenpage}
-% \protect\cs{cleartoevenpage}, which is defined in the memoir class, 
-% is like \protect\cs{clear(double)page} except that we 
+% \protect\cs{cleartoevenpage}, which is defined in the memoir class,
+% is like \protect\cs{clear(double)page} except that we
 % end up on an even page.
 % \protect\cs{cleartol@devenpage} is similar except that it first checks to see
 % if it is already on an empty page.
@@ -6778,10 +6778,10 @@
 % \protect\cs{clearl@dleftpage} and \protect\cs{clearl@drightpage} get us onto
 % an odd and even page, respectively, checking that we end up on
 % the subsquent page.
-% Both commands use \protect\cs{newpage} and not \protect\cs{clearpage}. 
-% Because \protect\cs{clearpage} prints all footnotes before the next page, even if it has to add new empty pages, while \protect\cs{newpage} does not. 
+% Both commands use \protect\cs{newpage} and not \protect\cs{clearpage}.
+% Because \protect\cs{clearpage} prints all footnotes before the next page, even if it has to add new empty pages, while \protect\cs{newpage} does not.
 % And as we want notes started in the left page continue in the right page and \emph{vice-versa}, we must use \protect\cs{newpage} and not \protect\cs{clearpage}
-% 
+%
 % \changes{v1.13.0}{2015/03/06}{Use \protect\cs{newpage} instead of \protect\cs{clearpage}.}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand*{\clearl@dleftpage}{%
@@ -6793,7 +6793,7 @@
     \hbox{}%
     \cleardoublepage
   \fi}
-  
+
 \newcommand*{\clearl@drightpage}{%
   \ifdim\pagetotal=0pt\hbox{}\fi%
   \newpage%
@@ -6813,7 +6813,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\@cs@linesinparL}
 % \begin{macro}{\getlinesfromparlistR}
 % \begin{macro}{\@cs@linesinparR}
-% \protect\cs{getlinesfromparlistL} gets the next entry from the 
+% \protect\cs{getlinesfromparlistL} gets the next entry from the
 % \protect\cs{linesinpar@listL} and puts it into \protect\cs{@cs@linesinparL}; if the
 % list is empty, it sets \protect\cs{@cs@linesinparL} to 0. Similarly
 % for \protect\cs{getlinesfromparlistR}.
@@ -6841,7 +6841,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\@cs@linesonpageL}
 % \begin{macro}{\getlinesfrompagelistR}
 % \begin{macro}{\@cs@linesonpageR}
-% \protect\cs{getlinesfrompagelistL} gets the next entry from the 
+% \protect\cs{getlinesfrompagelistL} gets the next entry from the
 % \protect\cs{linesonpage@listL} and puts it into \protect\cs{@cs@linesonpageL}; if the
 % list is empty, it sets \protect\cs{@cs@linesonpageL} to 1000. Similarly
 % for \protect\cs{getlinesfrompagelistR}.
@@ -6887,7 +6887,7 @@
 % \protect\cs{l@dcalc@maxoftwo}\marg{num}\marg{num}\marg{count} sets \meta{count}
 % to the maximum of the two \meta{num}.
 %
-% Similarly 
+% Similarly
 % \protect\cs{l@dcalc@minoftwo}\marg{num}\marg{num}\marg{count} sets \meta{count}
 % to the minimum of the two \meta{num}.
 %
@@ -6919,8 +6919,8 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\checkpageL}
 % \begin{macro}{\checkpageR}
 % \protect\cs{checkpageL} tests if the space and lines already taken on the page by
-% text and footnotes is less than the constraints. If so, then 
-% \protect\cs{ifl@dpagefull} is set FALSE and \protect\cs{ifl@dsamepage} is set TRUE. 
+% text and footnotes is less than the constraints. If so, then
+% \protect\cs{ifl@dpagefull} is set FALSE and \protect\cs{ifl@dsamepage} is set TRUE.
 % If the page is spatially full
 % then \protect\cs{ifl@dpagefull} is set TRUE and \protect\cs{ifl@dsamepage} is set FALSE.
 % If it is not spatially full but the maximum number of lines have been
@@ -6977,7 +6977,7 @@
      \l@dpagefullfalse%
      \l@dsamepagefalse%
      \print@last@after@pendRfalse%
-  \fi%    
+  \fi%
   }%
 
 %    \end{macrocode}
@@ -7061,7 +7061,7 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\ledthegoal}
 % \begin{macro}{\goalfraction}
 % \begin{macro}{\check@goal}
-% \protect\cs{ledthegoal} is the amount of space allowed to taken by text and 
+% \protect\cs{ledthegoal} is the amount of space allowed to taken by text and
 % footnotes on a page before a forced pagebreak. This can be controlled via
 % \protect\cs{@goalfraction}. \protect\cs{ledthegoal} is calculated via \protect\cs{check@goal}.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -7097,7 +7097,7 @@
 %
 % \subsection{Getting boxes content}
 % \begin{macro}{\if@getnextbox}
-% The \cs{if@getnextbox} boolean is switched to true if we can get the next chunk in a page after finished previous chunk. 
+% The \cs{if@getnextbox} boolean is switched to true if we can get the next chunk in a page after finished previous chunk.
 % That is:
 % \begin{itemize}
 %   \item If we use the \option{nosyncpstarts} option, in any case
@@ -7110,8 +7110,8 @@
 % \begin{macro}{\get@nextboxL}
 % \begin{macro}{\get@nextboxR}
 % \changes{v0.11.0}{2012/06/11}{Change \protect\cs{get@nextboxL} and \protect\cs{get@nextboxR} to allow to disable line numbering (like in eledmac 0.15).}
-% If the current box is not empty (i.e., still contains some lines) 
-% nothing is done. Otherwise if and only if a synchronisation point is 
+% If the current box is not empty (i.e., still contains some lines)
+% nothing is done. Otherwise if and only if a synchronisation point is
 % reached the next box is started.
 %
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -7189,7 +7189,7 @@
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \changes{v0.11.0}{2012/06/11}{Pstart number can be printed in side}
 % There are still unprocessed boxes. Recalculate the maximum number of
-% lines needed, and move onto the next box (by incrementing \protect\cs{l@dpscL}). If needed, restart the line numbering. 
+% lines needed, and move onto the next box (by incrementing \protect\cs{l@dpscL}). If needed, restart the line numbering.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
         \writtenlinesLfalse
          \ifbypstart@
@@ -7266,7 +7266,7 @@
                 {\@getnextboxtrue}%
                 {\@getnextboxfalse}%
              }%
-             {\@getnextboxtrue}%  
+             {\@getnextboxtrue}%
          }{}
        \fi%
     \fi%
@@ -7326,7 +7326,7 @@
 % \section{Sections' titles' commands}
 % As switching from left to right pages does not clear the page since v1.13.0,
 % but only creates new pages, no \verb+\vbox{}+ is inserted, and consequently parallel chapters are mis-aligned.
-% 
+%
 % So we patch the \protect\cs{chapter} command in order to prevent this problem.
 % \begin{macro}{\chapter}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -7465,7 +7465,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\insert@noterule@ledgroup}
-% A \protect\cs{vskip} is not used when the boxes are constructed. So we insert it before ledgroup note series when parallel lines are constructed. 
+% A \protect\cs{vskip} is not used when the boxes are constructed. So we insert it before ledgroup note series when parallel lines are constructed.
 % This is the goal of \protect\cs{insert@noterule@ledgroup}
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\insert@noterule@ledgroup}[1]{
@@ -7488,7 +7488,7 @@
 }
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
-% 
+%
 % \begin{macro}{\@parledgroupnotespacing}
 % \protect\cs{@parledgroupnotespacing} can be redefined by the user to change the interline spacing of ledgroup notes.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
@@ -7510,7 +7510,7 @@
 % \end{macro}
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\parledgroup@correction@notespacing@init}
-% \protect\cs{parledgroup@correction@notespacing@init} sets the value of accumulated corrections of note spacing to 0~pt. 
+% \protect\cs{parledgroup@correction@notespacing@init} sets the value of accumulated corrections of note spacing to 0~pt.
 % It is called at the beginning of each pages AND at the end of each ledgroup.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\parledgroup@correction@notespacing@init}{
@@ -7521,7 +7521,7 @@
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\parledgroup@correction@notespacing@final}
-% \protect\cs{parledgroup@correction@notespacing@final} adds the total space deleted because of correction for notes, in a parallel ledgroup. 
+% \protect\cs{parledgroup@correction@notespacing@final} adds the total space deleted because of correction for notes, in a parallel ledgroup.
 % It also adds the space needed by the other side spaces between note rules and notes.  It is called after the print of each pstart/pend.
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \newcommand{\parledgroup@correction@notespacing@final}[1]{
@@ -7546,9 +7546,9 @@
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \end{macro}
 % \begin{macro}{\parledgroup@correction@notespacing}
-% \protect\cs{parledgroup@correction@notespacing} is used before each printed line. 
+% \protect\cs{parledgroup@correction@notespacing} is used before each printed line.
 % If it is a line of notes in parallel ledgroup, the space \protect\cs{parledgroup@notespacing@correction} is decreased, to make interline space correct.
-% The decreased space is added to \protect\cs{parledgroup@notespacing@correction@accumulated} and \protect\cs{parledgroup@notespacing@correction@modulo}. 
+% The decreased space is added to \protect\cs{parledgroup@notespacing@correction@accumulated} and \protect\cs{parledgroup@notespacing@correction@modulo}.
 % If \protect\cs{parledgroup@notespacing@correction@modulo} is equal or greater than \protect\cs{baselineskip}:
 % \begin{itemize}
 %    \item It is decreased by \protect\cs{baselineskip}.
@@ -7563,7 +7563,7 @@
       \dimdef{\parledgroup@notespacing@correction@accumulated}{\parledgroup@notespacing@correction@accumulated+\parledgroup@notespacing@correction}%
       \dimdef{\parledgroup@notespacing@correction@modulo}{\parledgroup@notespacing@correction@modulo+\parledgroup@notespacing@correction}%
       \ifdimless{\parledgroup@notespacing@correction@modulo}{\baselineskip}{}{\advance\numpagelinesL -\@ne%
-      \dimdef{\parledgroup@notespacing@correction@modulo}{\parledgroup@notespacing@correction@modulo-\baselineskip}%    
+      \dimdef{\parledgroup@notespacing@correction@modulo}{\parledgroup@notespacing@correction@modulo-\baselineskip}%
      }% mean greater than equal
     \fi%
 }
@@ -7594,7 +7594,7 @@
 % \section{Compatibility with \eledmac}
 %
 % Here, we define some command for the \verb+eledmac-compat+ option.
-% 
+%
 %    \begin{macrocode}
 \ifeledmaccompat@%
 
@@ -7602,11 +7602,11 @@
   \unless\ifnocritical@
   \let\onlyXside\Xonlyside
   \fi
-\fi 
+\fi
 %    \end{macrocode}
 % \section{The End}\label{end}
 %
-% 
+%
 %</code>
 %
 % \newpage
@@ -7615,6 +7615,7 @@
 %
 % \let\oldthesection\thesection
 % \renewcommand{\thesection}{Appendix \oldthesection}
+% \renewcommand{\thesubsection}{\oldthesection.\arabic{subsection}}
 % \section{Some things to do when changing version}
 % \input{doc-include/migrate-par.dtx}
 % \bibliographystyle{alpha}
author	Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>	2018-10-12 21:42:10 +0000
committer	Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>	2018-10-12 21:42:10 +0000
commit	f60e45c7636a3b54b556da015da13743807d34d7 (patch)
tree	4096cdd5c94d86c21b0415cca71273c8b474c708 /Master/texmf-dist/source/latex
parent	2cd9698e5b60d9707958452fdf16a5f990fd33c7 (diff)